TM

EBTS PR 3.2
Installation,
Configuration and
Basic Service Manual

European Publications Department.

6866538D01-C, Issued: February 2005.
 Computer Software Copyrights

The Motorola products described in this instruction manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programmes. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for
copyrighted computer programmes. Including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted
computer programme. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programmes contained in the Motorola
products described in this Instruction manual may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express
written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant
either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent
applications of Motorola, except for the normal nonexclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of
law in the sale of a product.

Copyrights

© 2001 and 2002 Motorola Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Inc.

Trademarks

Motorola, the Motorola Logo and all other trademarks identified as such herein are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All
other product or service names are the property of their respective owners.

Your Input

...is much appreciated. If you have any comments, corrections, suggestions or ideas for this publication or any
other requirements regarding Motorola publications, please send an e-mail to doc.emea@motorola.com.

ii 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 1

1Document History

The following major changes have been implemented in this manual:

Edition Description Date

6866538D01-O New document. Nov-02

6866538D01-A Chapter 1 - EBTS Platform: Nov-03

The EBTS is managed via X21/E1 link by the Zone Control
Manager.

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands:

Removed MMI commands:
The following commands are listed any more, because they are
not applicable with Field Service access:
TSC Configuration Mode:
E1CONFIG
GO
INVALIDATE
LOAD
TSC Application Mode:
STATUS TTG
STATUS X21Q

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands:

New MMI commands:
TSC Application Mode:
STATUS BSLQ
STATUS KEYS
STATUS SEC
BRC:
AIEA
AIR_TRACER
AIR_TRACER_MODE
CCIMMUN
GET BTS_TYPE
STATISTICS

6866538D01-C iii
February 2005
Document History

Edition Description Date

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands:

Updated MMI commands:
TSC Configuration Mode:
LOOP
TSC Application Mode:
STATUS BSLQ
BRC:
HELP

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands,

Chapter 6 - Configuration and Testing:
An X.21 loopback is not supported. The paragraphs referring to
the X.21 site link LOOP/DELOOP command are deleted.

Chapter 8 - TETRA Site Contoller:

New desription of TSC battery removal.

Chapter 8 - TETRA Site Controller

Chapter 11 - Base Radio:
The Service Access connectors on the TSC and BRC front sides
are DB9 female connectors. Table 2-4 with TSC Service Access
pinouts is now Table 8-5 in the TSC chapter.

Service Information: The Chapter European Radio Support

Center (ERSC) was removed. All Service Information are now
in Chapter 1 - EBTS Platform.

General: Replace all references to ’EBTS Service Software

(TESS)’ with ’BTS Service Software’

6866538D01-B Chapter 3 - EBTS Interface Commands Oct 2004

New or updated Site Contoller Application Mode MMI
commands for D5.2:
ATTRIB,
BTS_TYPE,
CRASHDUMP,
DIAG,
EAS_OUT,
EXIT,
KILL,
LOG,
RECEIVE
SEND
STATUS BTS,
STATUS SRI,
TFTP,
WHO.

iv 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Document History

Edition Description Date

Chapter 3 - EBTS Interface Commands

New or updated Base Radio Application Mode MMI commands
for D5.2:
CLS,
EXIT,
GET ACTIVE_TRACES,
GET INFO,
GET PA_STATUS,
SET TRACES_OFF,
HELP,
SET CABINET,
SET POSITION.

Chapter 4 - EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware

Installation:
On page 4-4 a note is added with additional installation and
removal instructions for RFDS moduls. In Chapter 10
references to this note are added in the Cavity Combiner, APM,
and Filter Tray removal sections.

Chapter 6 - Configuration and Testing

New section “Upgrading TSC Software and Configuration
Files”

Chapter 7 - EBTS System Troubleshooting

Changes to meet D5.2 GPS operation features:
Rewritten sections “Troubleshooting”.
Rewritten section “MMI fault indications”.

Chapter 4, Chapter 9 EAS Alarm Connector Pinouts

Paragraph EAS Alarm/Control Connector Pinouts has moved
from Chapter 4 to Chapter 9 Environmental Alarm System

Chapter 9 - Environmental alarm System

In D5.2 the eight EAS alarm outputs may be configured to
respond automatically to certain EBTS state changes or to be
manually controlled.

6866538D01-C Chapter 3 - EBTS Interface Commands Feb 2005

Updated Site Contoller Application Mode MMI command for
D5.1 SER, D5.2 SER:
DISPLAY CONFIG

Chapter 8 - TETRA Site Contoller:

Two E1 Net/Mon/Eqp connector blocks were removed on the
front side. Two 10Base2 ports were removed on the rear side.

6866538D01-C v
February 2005
Document History

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

vi 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 C

CTable of Contents

1 Document History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

C Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

F List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

T List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1

1 EBTS System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Icon Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Dimetra IP System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
EBTS Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Equipment Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Environmental Alarm System (EAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Analog Power Monitor (APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Site Controller (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
The Site Controller supports the following I/O: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Front Panel Switches, Indicators, and Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Base Radio (BR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

6866538D01-C C-1
February 2005
Table of Contents

Base Radio Controller (BRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

DC Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Power Amplifier (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

2 Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Static Sensitive Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

ESD Wriststrap Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Recommended Tools, Equipment, and Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Recommended Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Recommended Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Recommended Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

3 EBTS Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

MMI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Access Levels and Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Site Controller Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Site Controller Configuration Mode MMI Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
APM_CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
ATTRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DELOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
EVICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
FORCE_ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LOGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

C-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Table of Contents

MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
PAGE_SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
PBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
PING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RECEIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
SITELINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Site Controller Application Mode MMI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
ATTRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
AUDIOSTAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
BTS_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
BRLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
CRASHDUMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
DIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
DISPLAY CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
EAS_OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
EVICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
KILL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
KVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
LOGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
NETSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
PAGE_SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
PING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

6866538D01-C C-3
February 2005
Table of Contents

RECEIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
RGPS_DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
SITE_LOCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
STATUS BR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
STATUS BSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS BSLQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS CRTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
STATUS FR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
STATUS FRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
STATUS KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS LMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS PEER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS RIGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
STATUS SEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
STATUS SRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
UNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
WHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Base Radio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Base Radio Configuration and Application Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
AIEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
AIR_TRACER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
AIR_TRACER_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
ATC CAV_PARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
ATC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
ATC GET CAV_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
ATC GET CAV_INP_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
ATC GET CAV_REFL_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
ATC GET CAV_STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
ATC GET CAV_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ATC GET CAV_VSWR_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ATC GET CHAN_SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ATC GET COMBINER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
ATC GET FWARE_REV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

C-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Table of Contents

ATC GET TUNE_TIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

ATC HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
ATC RESET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
ATC SANITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
ATC SET CAV_VSWR_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
ATC SET TUNE_TIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
CCIMMUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
DEKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GET ACTIVE_TRACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GET ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GET ALARM_MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
GET ALARM_REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
GET BRC_KIT_NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
GET BRC_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
GET BRC_SCRATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
GET BTS_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
GET CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GET DEFAULT_TX_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GET DSP_SANITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GET DSP_VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET ENET_ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET EX_AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET EX_THRESHOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
GET EX_KIT_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
GET EX_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
GET EX_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
GET FWD_PWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
GET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
GET INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
GET K_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
GET MAX_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
GET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
GET PA_AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
GET PA_COEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
GET PA_KIT_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
GET PA_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
GET PA_SCALING_FACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

6866538D01-C C-5
February 2005
Table of Contents

GET PA_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

GET PA_STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
GET PCTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
GET POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
GET PS_AD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
GET REF_PWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
GET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
GET RESET_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
GET ROM_VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
GET RPTR_STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
GET RSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
GET RX(n)_AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
GET RX(n)_DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
GET RX(n)_KIT_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
GET RX(n)_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
GET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
GET RX(n)_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
GET RX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
GET RX_FRU_CONFIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
GET RX_INJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
GET RX_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
GET RX_QSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
GET RX_STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
GET SYS_GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
GET TETRA_FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
GET TRAINING_INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
GET TXDC_I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
GET TXDC_Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
GET TXIQ_PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
GET TXLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
GET TXLIN_STAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
GET TXLIN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
GET TXLIN2_STAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
GET TX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
GET TX_IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
GET VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
GET WATTMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
KVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

C-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Table of Contents

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
SET ALARM_MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
SET ALARM_REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
SET BRC_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
SET CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
SET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
SET EX_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
SET EX_THRESHOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
SET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
SET K_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
SET MAX_VSWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
SET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
SET PA_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
SET PA_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
SET PCTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
SET POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
SET REAR_SERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
SET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
SET RX(n)_DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
SET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
SET RX(n)_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
SET RX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
SET RX_FRU_CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
SET RX_INJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
SET RX_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
SET RX_QSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SET SYS_GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SET TETRA_FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SET TONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
SET TRACES_OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
SET TRAINING_INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
SET TXDC_I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
SET TXDC_I_FINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
SET TXDC_Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
SET TXDC_Q_FINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
SET TXLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
SET TXLIN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
SET TX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
SET TX_IF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
SET TXIQ_PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

6866538D01-C C-7
February 2005
Table of Contents

SET TXIQ_PH_FINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83

SET TX_TEST_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
SET TX_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

4 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
EBTS Site Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Site Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
X.21 Facility Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
E1 Facility Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Applicable Codes and Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
AC Service and Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Surge Arrestors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Tower Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Site Building and Equipment Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Ground Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Alarm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Receipt of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Equipment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Equipment Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Personnel Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Transportation of the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Lifting Equipment Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
EBTS Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Equipment Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cabinet Bracing Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

C-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Table of Contents

Access Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Cabinet Position Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Expansion Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Power Supply Equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
External Cabling Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
EBTS Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Cabinet Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
-48 VDC Power Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Base Radio Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
GPS Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Alarm System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
X.21, E1 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Final Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Final Checkout Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Equipment Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Powering the Power Supply Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Powering the Equipment Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
EAS/Site Controller Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Base Radio/Receiver Multicoupler Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Site Controller Power-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Redundant Site Controller Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Auto Tune Combiner Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Planned Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

5 Interconnection and Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Receiver Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Transmit Power Out Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

DC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

5 MHz/1 PPS and GPS Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Ethernet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Site Controller/EAS Intercabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

E1 and X.21 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

6866538D01-C C-9
February 2005
Table of Contents

Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Site Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

RS-232 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

6 Configuration and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Setup and Testing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

MMI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Setup and Testing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Site Controller Setup and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Site Controller Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Service Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Site Controller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
E1 Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dual APM Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Starting The Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
EAS Alarm Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Site Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Redundant Site Controller Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Configuration Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Application Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Redundant BR Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Verification Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Optional Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Equipment Cabinet Setup/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Equipment Cabinet Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Base Radio Start-up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Selecting a Receiver Complement for a Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Displaying Base Radio Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Setting RX and TX Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Checking Transmit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Checking Receive Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Sensitivity Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
BER Floor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Checking BER of Receiver 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Viewing the Transmit Spectrum (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

C - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Table of Contents

VSWR Alarm Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Choose an Appropriate Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Conformance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Site Controller Operation (RF Conformance Testing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Base Radio MMI Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Configuration Mode Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Transmit and Receive Frequency Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Keying Base Radios and Setting Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Configuring Test Signal Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Receiver Testing Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Example Test Setups Using Commercially Available Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Test Setup for T1 Test Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Upgrading TSC Software and Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Upgrade - Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Using SWDLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Using BTS Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Upgrade - Case 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Using SWDLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Using BTS Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

7 EBTS System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Site Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Site Controller Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
LED Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Troubleshooting: Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Troubleshooting: General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Troubleshooting: TSC Config File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting: BRC Config Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting: BRC Code File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting: General Check of a TSC File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
MMI Fault Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Troubleshooting GPS Training and Site Reference Faults (Prior to Release D5.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Troubleshooting: GPS Training and Site Reference Faults (Release D5.2 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Troubleshooting: GPS Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Troubleshooting Site Link Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Other Site Controller Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

6866538D01-C C - 11
February 2005
Table of Contents

Base Radio / RFDS / EAS / Miscellaneous Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Base Radio Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Troubleshooting Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Troubleshooting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Routine Checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Reported/Suspected Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
BR FRU Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Base Radio Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Station Verification Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Transmitter Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Receiver Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Base Radio Fault Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
RF Distribution System Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Environmental Alarm System Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Miscellaneous Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

8 TETRA Site Controller (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Controller Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Performance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Front Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Site Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Available FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Site Controller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Redundant Site Controller Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Lithium Battery Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
TSC Battery Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

9 Environmental Alarm System (EAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Environmental Alarm System (EAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

C - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Table of Contents

Alarm System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
EAS Output Relay Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
EAS Alarm/Control Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

FRU Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Available EAS FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

10 RF Distribution System (RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Available RFDS FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Cavity Combining RF Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
General Cavity Combining RFDS Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Receive Branch Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Transmitter to Antenna Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Analog Power Monitor (APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Theory of Operation of Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Removal/Replacement Procedures (Cavity Combining RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Anti-Static Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Analog Power Monitor (APM) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Removal/Installation Procedures Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Anti-Static Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Expansion Cable Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Expansion Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Receiver Multicouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

RMC Operation and Receive Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
RMC Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

6866538D01-C C - 13
February 2005
Table of Contents

RMC Removal/Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Anti-Static Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Expansion Splitter Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Expansion Splitter Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
LNA/Splitter Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
LNA/Splitter Board Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
I/O Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
I/O Board Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Power Supply Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Power Supply Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Alarm Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Alarm Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Analog Power Monitor (APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Alarm/Power Monitor Pinouts and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

11 Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Available Base Radio FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Base Radio Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Performance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Transmit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Receive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Base Radio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

BRC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Host Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Serial Communication Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Address and Data Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Non-Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Digital Signal Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

C - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Table of Contents

TISIC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Station Reference Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Input Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Remote Station Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Exciter Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
DAC and Alias filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Memory Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
A/D Converter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
PLA Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
LNODCT IC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Synthesizer Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
774..785 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
157.3 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Regulator Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Linear RF Amplifier Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20

Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22

PA Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
DC/Metering Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Linear Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
RF Splitter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Linear Final Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Peripheral Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Replacement of Fan Assembly in Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26

DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28

DC Power Supply Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30

3X Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Definition and Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Diversity Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Diversity Uses and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

6866538D01-C C - 15
February 2005
Table of Contents

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

Frequency Synthesiser and VCO Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Receiver Front End Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Address Decode Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Memory Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
A/D Converter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Voltage Regulator Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34

Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Backplane Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Backplane Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38

A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

B Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Safety Information Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Static Sensitive Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

C Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Available FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

D Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Planned Maintenance Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

I Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

C - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 F

FList of Figures

Figure 1-1 Dimetra IP System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Figure 1-2 Equipment Cabinet (Primary Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Figure 1-3 Site Controller Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Figure 1-4 Base Radio Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Figure 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Figure 4-2 Typical EBTS Site Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-3 Mating View of Remote GPS Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Figure 4-4 Minimum Distance Eyenut to Lifting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Figure 4-5 Top View Equipment Rack "Eyenut Alignment" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Figure 4-6 Typical EBTS Site Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Figure 4-7 Junction Panel (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Figure 4-8 Equipment Cabinet Power Distribution Panel (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Figure 4-9 RFDS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Figure 4-10 EAS Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Figure 4-11 Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Figure 4-12 EAS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Figure 4-13 Cavity Combiner Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Figure 5-1 Receiver Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Figure 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Figure 5-3 Chassis Grounding Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Figure 5-4 DC Power Connections Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Figure 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Figure 5-6 Ethernet Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Figure 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Figure 5-8 E1/X.21 Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Figure 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Figure 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Figure 5-11 RS-232 Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Figure 6-1 BRC Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Figure 6-2 Antenna Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Figure 6-3 Spectrum Analyser Display of Transmitted Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Figure 7-2 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Figure 7-3 Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Figure 7-4 Transmitted Signal Spectrum (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Figure 8-1 Site Controller (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Figure 8-2 Site Controller (rear view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Figure 8-3 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Figure 8-4 Controller Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Figure 8-5 Site Controller functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Figure 8-6 Inserting the Lithium Battery on TSC board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

6866538D01-C F-1
February 2005
List of Figures

Figure 9-1 Environmental Alarm System (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1

Figure 9-2 EAS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Figure 9-3 EAS (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Figure 9-4 EAS User Alarms/Control (P9) and System Alarms/Control (P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Figure 9-5 User Alarm/Control on Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Figure 10-1 Four-Channel Auto Tune Cavity Combining RFDS (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Figure 10-2 Four-Channel Auto Tune Cavity Combining RFDS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Figure 10-3 Four-Channel AutoTune Cavity Combiner, front view. (with front cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Figure 10-4 Four-Channel AutoTune Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Figure 10-5 Expansion Cable Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Figure 10-6 RMC Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Figure 10-7 RMC FRU/Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Figure 10-8 RMC Tray in the Service Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Figure 10-9 Analog Power Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Figure 11-1 Base Radio (Front View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Figure 11-2 Base Radio Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Figure 11-3 Base Radio Controller (with cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Figure 11-4 BR Controller (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Figure 11-5 Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram, Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Figure 11-6 Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram, Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Figure 11-7 Exciter (with cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17
Figure 11-8 Exciter Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-21
Figure 11-9 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-23
Figure 11-10 Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-27
Figure 11-11 DC Power Supply (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-28
Figure 11-12 3X Receiver (with cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-31
Figure 11-13 3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-35
Figure 11-14 Base Radio Backplane, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-37
Figure 11-15 Base Radio Backplane, Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-37

F-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 T

TList of Tables

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Table 2-2 Recommended Test Equipment for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-3 Recommended Parts for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-4 “Service Access” DB-9 Connector Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Table 2-5 Recommended Tools for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table 3-1 Set TETRA_Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Table 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-2 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4-3 Typical Power Consumption of EBTS Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Table 4-4 -48 VDC Power Bus Colour Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-5 GPS Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Table 4-6 GPS Antenna Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Table 4-7 Equipment Cabinet Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Table 4-8 External Cabling Connection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Table 4-9 Power Connections Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Table 4-10 E1 Connector on Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Table 4-11 X.21 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Table 5-1 Receiver Cabling (Cavity Combining RFDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Table 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling (4-Channel Cavity Combining RFDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-3 Ground Straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-4 DC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Table 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Table 5-6 Ethernet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Intercabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Table 5-8 E1/X.21 cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Table 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Table 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Table 5-11 RS-232 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Table 6-1 Test Equipment for Site Controller Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Table 6-2 RS-232 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Table 6-3 AT Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Table 6-4 Test Equipment for Equipment Cabinet Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Table 6-5 Base Radio LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 6-6 Example: 8 Base Radio Omni-EBTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6-7 Transmit Level Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Table 6-8 set tetra_format variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Table 6-9 set tx_test_mode variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Table 6-10 get rssi command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Table 7-1 LED Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Table 7-2 Site Reference Reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-3 Site Reference States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

6866538D01-C T-1
February 2005
List of Tables

Table 7-4 BRC Config File Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Table 7-5 Other Site Controller Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Table 7-6 Recommended Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Table 7-7 80 Watt PA Transmitter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Table 7-8 Base Radio Fault Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Table 7-9 RFDS Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Table 7-10 EAS Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Table 7-11 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Table 8-1 Controller Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Table 8-2 System Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-3 Front Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-4 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-5 Controller Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 9-1 EAS Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Table 9-2 EAS Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Table 9-3 EAS Output Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Table 9-4 EAS Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-5 User Alarm Inputs (P9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-6 System Alarm Inputs (P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Table 9-7 Internal Alarm Inputs (P5, P6, P7, P8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Table 9-8 User Relay Outputs (P9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Table 9-9 System Relay Outputs (P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Table 9-10 Internal Relay Outputs (P5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Table 10-1 Cavity Combiner General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Table 10-2 Auto Tune Cavity Combining Transmitter Port-to-Antenna Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Table 10-3 Antenna Port-to-Receiver Port Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Table 10-4 Key Specs for APM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Table 10-5 Pin Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Table 10-6 I/O Board Rear Panel Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Table 10-7 Power Monitor DB-9 Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Table 10-8 I/O Board Power Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Table 11-1 Base Radio General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Table 11-2 Transmit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Table 11-3 Receive Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Table 11-4 BR Controller Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Table 11-5 BR Controller Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Table 11-6 Service Access Connector Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Table 11-7 BR Controller Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Table 11-8 Exciter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Table 11-9 Power Amplifier Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Table 11-10 DC Power Supply Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Table 11-11 DC Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Table 11-12 DC Power Supply Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Table 11-13 3X Receiver Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Table 11-14 Base Radio Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Table 11-15 BRC P1 Pinout, Signal and Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Table 11-16 RX1 P2 Pinout, Signal and Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Table 11-17 RX1 P3 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Table 11-18 Backplane Alarm 25-Pin Dsub (P7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Table 11-19 PA P6 Pinout, Signal and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
Table 11-20 EX P5 Pinout, Signal and Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
Table 11-21 Backplane RS-232 Pin Dsub (P8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42
Table 11-22 -48 VDC Battery Power (P12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Table 11-23 P11 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43

T-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 List of Tables

Table 11-24 Backplane Coaxial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43

Table 11-25 EX P14 EX OUT, P15 EX FB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Table 11-26 EXBRC P16 PA FB, P17 PA IN, P18 PA RF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Table 11-27 Blind Mates - Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Table 11-28 PS Power and Signal (P9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Table 11-29 Base Radio Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Table C-1 Available Frequency Replacable Units (FRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Table D-1 Field Replacable Units PMIs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2
Table D-2 Receiver Multicoupler PMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2
Table D-3 Combiner PMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2

6866538D01-C T-3
February 2005
List of Tables

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

T-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 1

1EBTS System Overview

Manual Overview
About This Manual

This manual is intended to provide an overview of the Enhanced Base Transceiver System
(EBTS) within the Dimetra System.
The information in this manual is current as of the issue date. Changes which occur after the issue
date will be incorporated through use of manual updates or revisions.

Intended Audience

It targets the following audiences within the user community:

Operations Group - This group is responsible for the day-to-day system operation and comprises
system administrators and communication specialists, usually under the supervision of an
operations manager.
Field Technicians / Engineers - Responsible for installation, configuration, support of customer
systems, and FRU replacement.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the operating principles of Motorola Dimetra trunked
radio equipment or similar.

6866538D01-C 1-1
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Icon Conventions
The document set is designed to give the reader more visual cues. The following graphic icons
are used throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are
described below.

Notes define terminology, refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader
how to complete an action (when it’s not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the
reader where something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a Note.

Information that is crucial to the discussion at hand, but that is not a Caution or Warning, receives
an Important icon. There is no warning level associated with text tagged with the Important icon.

The caution icon implies information that must be carried out in a certain manner to avoid
problems, procedures that may or may not be necessary as determined by the reader’s system
configuration, and so on. Although no damage will occur if the reader does not heed the caution,
some steps may need repeating.

The warning icon implies potential system damage if the instructions or procedures are not
carried out exactly, or if the warning is not heeded. This is the highest level of warning.

1-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Overview

Service Information
Maintenance Philosophy

Various equipment within the Dimetra Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) has been
designed with a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) concept to minimise system down time. Faulty
FRUs may be quickly and easily replaced with replacement FRUs. This helps to quickly bring the
system back to normal operation.
Due to the high percentage of surface mount components and multi-layer circuit boards, field
component-level repair is discouraged for all equipment. The European System Management
Centre should be contacted for further troubleshooting and repair.

Service and Replacement

Each FRU has a bar code label attached to its front panel. This label identifies the assembly’s
sequential serial number. Log this number whenever contacting the European Systems Support
Centre. For complete information on ordering replacement assemblies, or instructions on how to
return faulty assemblies for repair.

Call Management Centre

Customers within the EMEA region should contact the Call Management Centre for all Service
related enquiries unless they have alternative contractual arrangements. Enquiries to the centre
will be allocated a tracking number and will be routed to the relevant department within Motorola.
The Call management Centre operates a 24 hour by 7 day service.

6866538D01-C 1-3
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

European Systems Support Centre (ESSC)

The EMEA Systems Support Centre provides a technical consulting service. This
service is accessed via the Call Management Centre.

Jays Close, Viables Industrial State

Basingstoke, Hampshire RG22 4PD,
United Kingdom

Call Management Centre:

Telephone: +44 1256 484448
E-mail: ESSC@motorola.com

European Systems Component Centre (ESCC)

The European System Component Centre provides a repair service for infrastructure
equipment, including the EBTS. Customers requiring repair service should contact the
Call Management Centre to obtain a Return Material Authorization number (RMA).

The equipment should then be shipped to the following address unless advised
otherwise.The Systems Component Centre is available at:

Motorola GmbH CGISS

European System Component Centre
Am Borsigturm 130
13507 Berlin
Germany

Telephone: +49 30 66861414

Telefax: +49 30 66861426
E-mail: ESCC@motorola.com

Parts Identification and Ordering

Request for help in identification of non-referenced spare parts should be directed to

the Customer Care Organization of Motorola’s local area representation. Orders for
replacement parts, kits and assemblies should be placed directly on Motorola’s local
distribution organization or via the Extranet site Motorola Online at
https://emeaonline.motorola.com.

EMEA Test Equipment Support

Information related to support and service of Motorola Test Equipment is available by
calling the Motorola Test Equipment Service Group in Germany at +49 6128 702179,
Telefax +49 6128 951046, through the Customer Care Organization of Motorola’s local
area representation, or via the Internet at:
http://www.gd-decisionsystems.com/cte/.

1-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Overview

System Overview
Dimetra is a digital communications system which provides the dispatch features defined in the
TETRA (Terrestrial Trunked Radio) standard. Dimetra provides a concept of a wide-area trunked
communications system, where an RF coverage area is a provided by number of Remote Sites
connected to the Network Infrastructure.
The system allows users with mobile and portable subscriber units to communicate with one
another and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) using the RF system as the medium.
The RF system consists of strategically located Enhanced Base Transceiver Systems (EBTS)
which are linked to the Network Infrastructure. The Network Infrastructure in turn provides the
connectivity to the PSTN.
Private dispatch calls, group dispatch calls, private full-duplex calls and full-duplex mobile to
land, land to mobile and mobile to mobile telephony calls, Short Message Service (SMS) and
Packet Data services are all supported.
The network elements that constitute the Dimetra system are fully managed, allowing remote
configuration and maintenance of the system.

Dimetra IP System Overview

The Motorola TETRA network solutions, Dimetra IP, are based on existing proven technologies
that have been modified as appropriate to support the TETRA standard.
The Dimetra IP system provides telephone interconnect, two way dispatch and data services for
private and public safety networks.
Dimetra-P features include:
• Voice Services
• Data Services
• Supplementary Services
• Dispatch Console Operator Features
• Dispatch Console Management Features
• Radio Control Management Features
• Network Management Features
• Mobile Station Features
Mobility Management is fully supported to allow continuity of service as subscribers move
through the network coverage area.
The network elements that constitute the Dimetra IP system are fully managed, allowing remote
configuration and maintenance of the system.
The Dimetra IP System elements can be broadly divided into those elements that provide
interconnect (telephony) functionality, those that provide dispatch functionality, those that
provide system connectivity and those responsible for system element management.

6866538D01-C 1-5
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

EBTS
EBTS X21/E1 Link between
EBTS and Dimetra IP Infrastructure

Dimetra IP
Infrastructure

EBTS
EBTS

Figure 1-1 Dimetra IP System Block Diagram

EBTS Platform
The TETRA EBTS consists of the Site Controller, an Environmental Alarm System, one or more
Base Radios (BR), and a radio frequency distribution system (RFDS).
The EBTS provides the interface between the mobile radio units within the Dimetra system and
the rest of the network. The main functions of the EBTS are listed below:
• Base Radio Transceiver
• Radio link formatting, coding, timing, framing and error control
• Timing control supervision to mobile stations (timing advance)
• Radio link quality measurements (Signal Quality Estimate)
• Site to site frame synchronisation
• Interface translation - radio link to network “land” equipment
• Switching functions between base transceivers
• Operation, maintenance and administration agent
It is possible to equip the EBTS with a redundant Site Controller to permit continued site
operation should the primary Site Controller fail.
The Site Controller (TSC) controls the BR’s via an Ethernet LAN. The Dimetra IP EBTS uses an
X.21/E1 connection for communication with other network elements.
In Dimetra IP systems the Site Controller may be configured to control a redundant Base Radio
to provide back-up Base Radio operation, in the event of a Base Radio failing. If configured this

1-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Overview

Base Radio can also be switched in by the Central Network Equipment (CNE) to provide extra
capacity. This feature is configured by the TETRA EBTS Service Software (TESS). The
redundant BR feature requires an Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC) to operate, as the standby
BR must be able to configure itself to the radio frequency used by a failed BR. In systems with
multiple ATCCs, minimum channel separation must not only be maintained between channels on
each ATCC, but also between channels of all ATCCs. This allows the redundant BR to be able to
replace any failed BR and allows the redundant BR's ATCC to maintain correct channel
separation. Note that, only the last BR in the EBTS may be configured as the redundant BR.
The EBTS works in conjunction with the mobile stations to make measurements that are used in
the handover decision process when interconnect calls are in progress and the mobile stations are
moving in and out of the EBTS coverage area.
The Dimetra IP EBTS is managed by the Zone Control Management (ZCM), communication
between the EBTS and the ZCM takes place over the X.21/E1 link. The ZCM can download new
configuration files to the EBTS and receive alarm/event and performance statistic information
from the EBTS.

6866538D01-C 1-7
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Equipment Cabinet
The EBTS Equipment Cabinet contains RF and control equipment. It provides the radio
communication link between the land network and the mobile/portable units. The EBTS site
consists of one cabinet (Primary Rack) or two cabinets (Primary and Expansion Rack).
The Equipment Cabinet is a self-contained 1.845-metre (37 EIA RU) cabinet that contains the
various equipment modules. Figure 1-2 shows an Equipment Cabinet fitted with a cavity
combining RF Distribution System (RFDS).
The equipment modules contained in a Primary Rack are as follows:
• Breaker Panel
• Junction Panel (top of cabinet)
• Analog Power Monitor Tray (with two Analog Power Monitors)
• Auto Tune Cavity Combiner
• Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) for Primary Rack
• Filter Tray (not part of the standard equipment)
• Environmental Alarm System (EAS)
• Two Site Controllers
• Four Base Radios
The equipment modules contained in an Expansion Rack are as follows:
• Breaker Panel
• Junction Panel (top of cabinet)
• Auto Tune Cavity Combiner
• Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) for Expansion Rack
• Four Base Radios
The Site Controller and Base Radios are interconnected via an Ethernet Local Area Network
(LAN). The Site Controller also interfaces communication between the Network Infrastructure
and the EBTS via an X.21/E1 link in a Dimetra IP system.
For a complete description of each module, refer to the appropriate chapter. Each chapter contains
an overview, a description of switches, indicators, and test connectors, and a functional
description of each module. Troubleshooting and removal/ replacement procedures are also
included for Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).

1-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Overview

BR1 BR3 RFS1 RFS3 CTRL A BR2 BR4 RFS2 EAS/IMU CTRL B

ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

JUNCTION PANEL
STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

OFF

25A
OFF

25A
OFF

3A
OFF

3A
OFF

7.5A
OFF

25A
OFF

25A
OFF

3A
OFF

7.5A
OFF

7.5A
OFF

BREAKER PANEL B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

ANALOG POWER
ANALOG POWER MONITOR MONITOR

CAVITY COMBINER

CAVITY COMBINER

CAVITY COMBINER
RECEIVER
MULTICOUPLER
RECEIVER MULTICOUPLER

ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM SYSTEM

ENVIRONMENTAL -48V RTN

Motorola
CONTROLLER A
PARALLEL
CONTROLLER B
PARALLEL
CONTROL RF1
e

SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
e

Ac ut

USER ALARM/CONTROL
at

e
r

Ac t
tiv
we

tiv

ENVIRONMENTAL
pu
er

tp
Po

Op

Ou
In

ALARM SYSTEM
Power Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

ALARM SYSTEM GPS

INPUT -48V , 0.5A
r

e
we

4 3 2 1
tiv

PS

4 3 2 1
Po

Ac

DCE Net Eqp

SITE REF OUT

SITE CONTROLLER A
Net Eqp Power
T1/E1
O
LO

Ye

AI

FE

BP

Net

Lo

BAT
O

Service Access Sel/ Abort/

ca
llo

/C
S/

V/
F

Mon Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp
w

l
RC

PD

Loop Reset X.21

-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS
r

e
we

4 3 2 1
tiv

PS

4 3 2 1
Po

Ac

DCE Net Eqp

SITE REF OUT

SITE CONTROLLER B
Net Eqp Power
T1/E1
O
LO

Ye

AI

FE

BP

Net

Lo

BAT
O

Service Access Sel/ Abort/

ca
llo

/C
S/

V/
F

Mon Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp
w

l
RC

PD

Loop Reset X.21

-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER

BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #4)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL

US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER

BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #3)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL

US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER

BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #2)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL

US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER

BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #1)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL

US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

FRONT VIEW BACK VIEW

TEBTS018B

Figure 1-2 Equipment Cabinet (Primary Rack)

6866538D01-C 1-9
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Breaker Panel
The Breaker Panel is mounted in the uppermost location of the Equipment Cabinet, as shown in
Figure 1-2. This is the central location for power distribution and overload protection of the
Equipment Cabinet.
Each circuit breaker is dedicated to a single module within the Equipment Cabinet. The circuit
breakers provide manual on/off control for the modules, as well as providing automatic
disconnect in the event of an electrical overload.

Junction Panel
The Junction Panel provides a central location for cabinet grounding and intercabling. Access to
the Junction Panel is gained from the top of the Equipment Cabinet.
The Junction Panel is mounted at the top of the Equipment Cabinet toward the rear, as shown in
Figure 1-2.

Cavity Combiner
The cavity combiner is a tuned 915-950 MHz transmit combining system for 4 channels.
The cavity combiner is mounted, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Receiver Multicoupler (RMC)

The Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) is an active receive multicoupler assembly that provides
multiple receive signal ports. Each diversity branch antenna is connected to a module in the
Receiver Multicoupler. Each RMC module is then correspondingly connected to one receiver in
each of the BRs.
The Receiver Multicouplers are mounted below the Cavity Combiner, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

The EAS provides a central location for alarm signals into the EBTS site. The EAS provides an
electrical interface to monitor such environmental conditions as site power, smoke detectors, and
intrusion (burglar) detectors. Only one EAS is used per site.
The EAS also receives alarms from the Breaker Panel and the RFDS. Base Radio alarms are sent
directly to the Site Controller over the Ethernet LAN.
The EAS accepts 48 alarm inputs and provides eight control outputs. The inputs are opto-isolated
and sense contact closure between the alarm sensor and its return. Four RJ-45 connectors are used
for the alarm connections within the Equipment Cabinet. The remaining alarm inputs and control
(relay) outputs are accessible via two 50-pin subminiature-D connectors, one of which is
accessible via the Junction Panel. The eight alarm outputs may be configured to respond
automatically to certain EBTS state changes or to be manually controlled. The EAS contains its
own power supply.

1 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Overview

The eight alarm outputs are not supported with System Releases prior to D5.2.

The EAS module is mounted below the Receiver Multicoupler area, as shown in Figure 1-2.
Alarm wiring is connected to the EAS via the junction panel at the top of the EBTS. Some of the
connections are dedicated to specific equipment, although several inputs are available for
assignment by the customer. The EAS interfaces with the Site Controller(s) via an IEEE 1284
interface.

Analog Power Monitor (APM)

The Analog Power Monitor monitors the forward and reflected power. The Analog Power
Monitor Tray is located above the Cavity Combiner. The power monitor outputs a 0-5V voltage
corresponding power levels between 0 - 320W.The first APM monitors the power of the Primary
Rack, the second APM monitors the power of the Expansion Rack (if installed).

Site Controller (TSC)

The TSC assigns available frequencies and slots to the mobiles. It also communicates with the
network via an X.21 or E1 link for Dimetra IP.
One TSC is required per EBTS configuration, the other TSC presence a redundance (the active
and the standby TSC is linked via the 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface).
The TSC receives Global Positioning System (GPS) signals via the GPS interface, which it uses
to develop high-precision system timing signals. The EAS interfaces with the TSC via the IEEE
1284 interface to communicate alarm signals from the EBTS to the network management centre.
The Base Radios communicate with the TSC via the 10Base2 Ethernet interface.

The Site Controller supports the following I/O:

• One 10/100BaseT Ethernet port
• Three 10Base2 Ethernet ports
• Four T1/E1 connections
• One X.21 connection
• One IEEE 1284 parallel port (for connecting to the EAS)
• One front panel RS232 MMI
• Three time / frequency reference outputs
• GPS (internal receiver)
• RJ45 Serial
• RJ45 Redundancy
Figure 1-3 shows a block diagrams of the Site Controller and the I/O interfaces.

6866538D01-C 1 - 11
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

SITE CONTROLLER
BLOCK DIAGRAM

L2 CACHE

MEMORY

CPU

RS232 SERIAL
RS232 MMI
COMMUNICATIONS
PROCESSOR X.21

10/100 BASE T ETHERNET

3
10 BASE 2 ETHERNET

QUAD
T1/E1 4
FRAMER/ T1/E1
LINE DRIVER

IEEE 1284
INTERFACE EAS

GPS ANTENNA
+5V
POWER SITE
-48V SUPPLY REFERENCE 3 1PPS/5MHZ
+3.3V SITE REFERENCE

iSC412
011101JNM

Figure 1-3 Site Controller Block Diagram

Front Panel Switches, Indicators, and Test Connectors

The Site Controller front panel is equipped with several switches, indicators, and test connectors
as follows:
• Power switch
• Push-button Abort/Reset. NB this button must be pressed for two seconds or more to
perform a CPU reset
• Push-button Sel/Loop selects a span or initiates network loopbacks
• Power LED
• Green LED Active site reference status
• Green LED indicator for GPS status
• Span and E1 connection status LEDs

1 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Overview

• Monitor SMB port for monitoring time/frequency standard signals

• DB-9 service access connector for Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
• Network Access bantam jacks - bantam jacks provide access for servicing the E1 network.
These items are discussed in greater detail in Chapter 8, “TETRA Site Controller (TSC)”.

Base Radio (BR)

The Base Radio provides reliable digital communications capabilities by incorporating a compact
software-controlled design. Increased channel capacity is achieved through voice compression
techniques and time division multiplexing. Each BR is made up of the following FRUs:
• Base Radio Controller
• Power Supply
• Receiver
• Exciter
• Power Amplifier
Figure 1-4 shows a block diagram of the Base Radio. Each module of the Base Radio is
individually discussed below.

DC POWER SUPPLY
RECEIVER
MODULE EXTERNAL
MODULE
DC INPUT
-41 to -60 VDC

FROM RFDS RF IN
(RX ANT)

}
+14.2 VDC
TO BR
+5.1 VDC
DATA/CONTROL/TIMING BUSES CIRCUITS
+28.6 VDC

BASE RADIO CONTROLLER

MODULE
5 MHz/1 PPS
EXT REF
TO/FROM EXCITER
ETHERNET MODULE

POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE
TO RFDS RF OUT
(TX ANT) RF FEEDBACK

RF IN

TEBTS027
040801JNM

Figure 1-4 Base Radio Functional Block Diagram

Base Radio Controller (BRC)

The BRC serves as the main controller of the Base Radio. The BRC provides signal processing
and operational control for the other Base Radio modules.

6866538D01-C 1 - 13
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

DC Power Supply
The DC Power Supply provides conditioned DC operating voltages to the various Base Radio
FRUs. It accepts an input voltage range of -41 to -60V.

Receiver
The Receiver provides the receive functions for the Base Radio. The receiver module contains
three separate receivers to allow receive diversity using multiple receive antennas.

Exciter
The Exciter, in conjunction with the Power Amplifier (PA), provides the modulation and
transmitter functions for the Base Radio.

Power Amplifier (PA)

The PA, in conjunction with the Exciter, provides the transmitter functions for the Base Radio.
The PA accepts the low-level modulated RF signal from the Exciter and amplifies the signal for
transmission via the RF output connector.

Each module is described in greater detail in Chapter 11, “Base Radio”.

The BRs are mounted in the lower-most rack positions, as shown in Figure 1-2. The first BR is
installed at the bottom of the cabinet. The next BR is installed above the first and each additional
BR is installed above the previous one.

1 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 2

2Safety Precautions /
Recommended Tools

Safety Precautions

Introduction
Below is a brief summary of some of the safety precautions that should be taken into account
when working with the EBTS. They are not exhaustive and all personnel should ensure they
comply with any additional precautions applicable when using test equipment or facilities.

Static Sensitive Precautions

The static grounding wrist strap (Motorola P/N 4280385A59) must always be used when
handling any board or module within the EBTS. Many of the boards or modules used in the EBTS
equipment are vulnerable to damage from static charges.
Extreme care must be taken while handling, shipping, and servicing these boards or modules. To
avoid static damage, observe the following precautions:
• Prior to handling, shipping, and servicing EBTS equipment, connect a wrist strap to the
grounding clip on the Equipment Cabinet. This discharges any accumulated static charges.

Use extreme caution when wearing a conductive wrist strap near sources of high voltage. The low
impedance provided by the wrist strap also increases the danger of lethal shock should accidental
contact with high voltage sources occur.

• Avoid touching any conductive parts of the module with your hands.
• Never remove boards or modules with power applied to the unit (hot-pull) unless you have
verified it is safe to do for a particular board or module. Make sure the unit will not be
damaged by this. Several boards and modules require that power be turned off before any
boards or modules are removed.
• Avoid carpeted areas, dry environments, and certain types of clothing (silk, nylon, etc.)
during service or repair due to the possibility of static buildup.
• Apply power to the circuit under test before connecting low impedance test equipment
(such as pulse generators). When testing is complete, disconnect the test equipment before
power is removed from the circuit under test.

6866538D01-C 2-1
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

• Be sure to ground all electrically powered test equipment. Connect a ground lead (-) from
the test equipment to the board or module before connecting the test probe (+). When
testing is complete, remove the test probe first, then remove the ground lead.
• Lay all circuit boards and modules on a conductive surface (such as a sheet of aluminium
foil) when removed from the system. The conductive surface must be connected to ground
through 100k Ω.
• Never use non-conductive material for packaging modules being transported. All modules
should be wrapped with static sensitive (conductive) material. Replacement modules
shipped from the factory are packaged in a conductive material.

Any device (i.e., power supply) providing isolation between the mains and the EBTS must
provide reinforced insulation to hazardous voltages. The DC power source providing power to
the EBTS shall comply with requirements specified for a safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV)
per EN60950, 1995.

Equipment has two independent power sources (A and B). To remove power from equipment,
disconnect both power sources.

Always use appropriate lifting equipment and numbers of personnel when moving an EBTS
equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of tipping. A fully configured equipment cabinet weighs
approximately 276 kg (608 lbs). Tipping can result in serious injury and extensive equipment
damage.

The Dimetra IP EBTS System Manual is intended for trained technicians experienced with
Motorola base radio equipment or similar types of equipment.

The site controller board contains a lithium battery. Refer to local regulatory requirements for
proper disposal.

2-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

ESD Wriststrap Safety Precautions

All EBTS platforms have had a small stainless steel bracket mounted on the front left-hand side,
held by a metal surface screw.
The purpose of this bracket is to give a service or installation technician a point to which a wire
from a wrist strap can be connected. This is for ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) protection.
The purpose of this TIB is to emphasise the need and the use of the ESD bracket and use of wrist
strap.
The ESD point is a small bracket that is mounted with one of the screws that holds a unit.
• In PR3.2 it is placed in the front of the redundant TSC just above Base Radio 4. If there is no
redundant TSC it is placed on a blank panel at the same position.
In order to make good electrical contact with the rack frame, the cage nut in which the screw is
mounted is a special grounding type, which has “teeth” that cut through the paint of the rack
frame. The screw that holds the bracket is made of steel, which is not painted black for the same
reason.
There are two cases where special attention must be made.
1 Removal of the ESD point

The ESD bracket will have to be removed temporarily in two cases.

• Service of the redundant TSC.
• Installation/replacement of the entire Base Radio 4 (ESD bracket overlaps by 1-2 mm).

Replacing an entire TSC or Base Radio 4 does not require the use of an ESD wrist strap, as both
boxes are ESD protected. However if any other service is required, the ESD bracket must be put
back at the right position and with the right screw to enable the effective use of the ESD wrist
strap.

2 Use of an ESD wrist strap and ESD earthing point

ESD wrist strap use is critical in the following cases.

• Replacement of any module inside a box. This includes service of any modules in a base
radio.
• Service of Receiver Multicoupler (RMC). The RMC is a relatively open mechanical
design and ESD protection is critical when servicing this module.

Special attention must be made to the cable that connects the (optional) CMU/duplexer tray RX
outputs to the Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) inputs of the RMC. The LNA is made with a GaAs
FET input, which by nature cannot be ESD protected. Never connect or disconnect this cable
without using a correctly earthed ESD wrist strap.
If The ESD bracket is removed in order to remove a complete FRU, attention must be paid to the
position of the ESD bracket when it is restored. Also, the point must be restored for wrist-strap
use.
It is important that the ESD bracket is not moved to another position where the caged nut and
screw is not of the type which makes electrical connection to the rack frame.

6866538D01-C 2-3
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Recommended Tools, Equipment,

and Parts
Tables 2-1 through 2-3 list the Tools, Test Equipment and locally procured parts that are required
for the installation procedure. The model numbers listed are recommended, but equivalent tools
and equipment made by other manufacturers are acceptable.

When selecting tools and equipment, always choose those which have insulated grips and
handles. This helps prevent potential injury resulting from electrical shock.

Recommended Tools
Table 2-1 lists the recommended tools for installation. These are not included as part of the EBTS
shipment and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers, unless
noted otherwise. Equivalent items may be used, unless noted otherwise.

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation

Tool Model/Type Supplier Description

Banding cutter Locally Procured

Cable Crimp Tool TBM5 S Thomas & Betts Crimping lugs on power cables
Calculator Locally Procured
Cart, Two-wheeled 6680387A47 Motorola Transportation of tools and test
(luggage type) equipment
Circuit Cooler Spray 0180334B46 Motorola Low temperature alarm testing
Cellular tool kit RPX4286A Motorola Miscellaneous tools
Digital Level 60 cm (24") w/module Pro Smartlevel Antenna downtilt measurements
Driver Tools 2” hex to hex extension (2) Locally Procured
6” hex to hex extension (2)
T10 TORX bit (APEX)
Long T10 TORX bit
T15 TORX bit (APEX)
T20 TORX bit (APEX)
T25 TORX bit (APEX)
T30 TORX bit (APEX)
Electric Drill Locally Procured Drilling holes
Electric Screwdriver heavy duty Locally Procured Tightening screws/nuts
(only 1 required)
heavy duty (variable Locally Procured Tightening screws/nuts
speed)
light duty Locally Procured Tightening screws/nuts

2-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation (continued)

Tool Model/Type Supplier Description

Flashlight, small Locally Procured

Hammer Drill Locally Procured Drilling concrete floor for
mounting studs
Heat Gun Locally Procured High temperature alarm testing
Hole Punch 1” Locally Procured Wiring 240 VAC to power
supply cabinet
Knife, utility Locally Procured
Markers (2) Locally Procured
Nut driver, 3/16” Locally Procured
Nut driver, 10 mm Locally Procured
Pliers Locally Procured
Pliers, connector Snap-on
Pliers, needle nose Locally Procured
Screw driver, torque 5 in-lbs Ind Pneumatic
hand tool
HILTI Gun Locally Procured Nail/fastener driving
Canvas lifting slings Locally Procured Lifting and moving the cabinet
Sack trolley Locally Procured Negotiating steps and curbs
10 m steel rule Locally Procured
1.0 m Spirit level Locally Procured
3 m extending ladder Locally Procured
Step ladder Locally Procured
2 sets of tower Locally Procured
climbing equipment
and safety harnesses
4 wheel cable Locally Procured
dispensing
bogie/trolley
Workmate with a Locally Procured
portable
metalworkers vice
Drives for torque 1/4” drive, 7/16” deep Ind Pneumatic
screw driver socket
1/4” drive, 5/16” deep
socket
1/4” drive, 3/16” socket
1/4” drive, 1” blade
screwdriver
1/4” hex to 1/4” hex drive

6866538D01-C 2-5
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation (continued)

Tool Model/Type Supplier Description

Screw drivers #0 Phillips Locally Procured

#2 Phillips
3/16” blade
#1 blade
1/4” blade
Tarpaulin Approximately 8’ x 10’ Locally Procured Protecting equipment during
installation
Tie wrap gun Locally Procured
Tool box Locally Procured
Torque wrenches 6680388A27 Motorola Tightening battery lug nuts
5/16” breaking type, 5 in- Locally Procured For SMA connectors
lbs
Drives for 5/16” 6” extension, 3/8” drive Snap-on
torque wrench
1” deep 6 point socket,
3/8” drive
5/8” deep socket, 3/8” Ind Pneumatic
drive
9/16” deep socket, 3/8”
drive
1” deep socket, 3/8” drive
1/4” hex to 3/8” hex drive
TORX driver with Locally Procured
bits (handle storage)
Tweezers Locally Procured
Vacuum cleaner Locally Procured General clean-up
Wire cutters Locally Procured Cutting power cables
(#6 AWG to 250 MCM)
Wrenches, open end 3/8” Locally Procured
1-1/16”
Wrist strap Locally Procured

2-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Recommended Test Equipment

Table 2-2 lists the recommended test equipment for installation. These are not included as part of
the EBTS shipment and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers,
unless noted otherwise.

Table 2-2 Recommended Test Equipment for Installation

Test Equipment Model/Type Supplier Description

Digital Multimeter Fluke 77 Fluke DC measurements

(only 1 required)
Milli-ohmmeter capable of
measuring < 1.0 Ω at 2.0 A
Megohmmeter capable of
measuring > 5.0 M Ω
Time Domain
Reflectometer (TDR)
Ground Resistance
Ohmmeter
Service Computer
Communication Cable
Between PC Service
Computer and EBTS
Equipment
R1037A Motorola DC measurements
R1073A Motorola DC measurements
Locally Procured
Locally Procured
Locally Procured
AEMC 3700 clamp- Locally Procured Measure for adequate ground
on ground tester
Locally Procured Local service terminal
0102611X03 Motorola Pinouts from DB-9 to DB-9
must be straight through
Connects service computer to
DB-9 female on Site Controller
and BRC. Also provides pin 9
breakout connection.

Recommended Parts
Table 2-3 lists the recommended parts for installation. These are not included as part of the EBTS
shipment and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers, unless
noted otherwise.

Table 2-3 Recommended Parts for Installation

Part Type/Size Supplier Where Used

Anchor Kit #02100-13 Hendry EBTS cabinet floor anchors

Bolts 3/8” x 16” x 3/4” Locally Procured Breaker panel on Power Supply rack
1/4” x 20” x 1/2” Locally Procured DC return bus, Power Supply rack
Coloured red, black, green, brown, Locally Procured Wire identification
Vinyl Tape yellow, and white
Grease anti-oxidant Locally Procured Battery terminal corrosion control
Lockwashers split - 3/8” Locally Procured Breaker panel, Power Supply rack
split - 1/4” Locally Procured DC return bus, Power Supply rack

6866538D01-C 2-7
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Table 2-3 Recommended Parts for Installation (continued)

Part Type/Size Supplier Where Used

Lugs 2 hole 1" centre various Locally Procured Battery connection; 3/8” bolt, 4/0 Cu
sizes
Lugs 2 hole 1" centre Locally Procured DC return connection; 1/4” bolt, #6 Cu
Power Cables 2
13.4 mm CSA (#6 AWG) Locally Procured Power supply wiring
stranded Cu (blue (or red)
and black)

111.3 mm2 CSA (4/0 Locally Procured Power supply wiring

AWG) stranded Cu (blue
(or red) and black)
Ground 33.7 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) Locally Procured Cabinet grounding
Cables stranded Cu (green or
green-yellow)

13.4 mm2 CSA (#6 AWG) Locally Procured Cabinet grounding

stranded Cu (green or
green-yellow)

Table 2-4 lists the signal designations on the DB-9 connector for the service computer, located on
the Site Controller front panel, and the required breakout pins for external trigger signal access.

Table 2-4 “Service Access” DB-9 Connector Details

DB-9 Female Connector Pinout Function

1 not used
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 not used
5 GND
6 not used
7 not used
8 not used
9 not used

2-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Recommended Torque
Table 2-5 lists the recommended torque for RF Connectors, screws, nuts and bolts.

Table 2-5 Recommended Tools for Installation

Torque Torque
Item
Nm in-lb

“N” Coupling Nuts 3-4 26 - 35

“SMA” Coupling Nuts 0.78 - 1.13 6.9 - 10
M 3.5 Screw 1 - 1.5 8 - 13
M 6 Screw 4-7 35 - 62
M 6 Nut 6-7 53 - 62
M 10 Nut 7-8 62 - 70
Eye Bolts 10 - 13.5 88 - 119

6866538D01-C 2-9
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 3

3EBTS Interface Commands

MMI Commands
MMI commands are input from a service computer to the system RS-232 serial port (19200 bps,
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity). Depending on the task, the RS-232 port is accessed from the Site
Controller, or from the front of each Base Radio Controller (BRC) in the Equipment Cabinet.
The service technician enters the MMI commands to communicate with the Site Controller at the
system level. The system response is returned to the service computer via RS-232.
Various test procedures use these commands to test and configure the system. The test procedure
for the Site Controller is in Chapter 6, “Configuration and Testing”.

Access Levels and Modes

The Site Controller and BR commands are available through the use of the password: motorola.
This password allows the service technician access to a subset of the MMI command set for field
service operations.
The motorola password is a default password that is programmed during manufacturing. The
password may be changed via the MMI.
The Site Controller has a configuration mode MMI which provides facilities for setup and testing.
The Dimetra IP Site Controller additionally has an MMI in application mode which provides local
diagnostic information.
Most of the BR commands are valid only while the BR is in the test mode. The configuration data
is temporarily stored in RAM until the BR is taken out of the test mode. Most MMI commands
do not allow the configuration data to be permanently stored in EEPROM, although a limited
number do. Commands that allow configuration data to be changed are noted.

6866538D01-C 3-1
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Conventions
The syntax for each command is presented as follows:
• plain text shows the actual text to be typed to invoke a command or action
• italic text shows where a parameter or value is to be substituted
• text enclosed in brackets [ ] indicates an optional value that may be entered
• where items are separated by vertical bars | , the items are the applicable choices that may
be entered
• text enclosed in braces { } indicates a corresponding selection or parameter that must be
entered for the command to execute
• a series of dots ... indicates one or more occurrences of a preceding parameter
• a pair of dots .. indicates a range of valid values
The syntax for the Site Controller and BR commands is case sensitive. Each example is shown in
the format that should be entered by the operator.
Some commands require the use of parameters. If input parameters are not entered, a response is
returned identifying the proper syntax for the command.
A definition describes in detail each command’s purpose and function. Where helpful, the
definition is followed by an example of the commands response. Typical values have been used
whenever possible.
Some commands return varying responses (such as available, not available, unknown, o.k., and
alarm). Only one of the possible responses is listed in each example.

3-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Site Controller Commands

The Site Controller commands consist of two groups: configuration and application. Both groups
are individually described below.
The Site Controller may be accessed simultaneously via the front panel Service Access port and
the rear panel SERIAL port.
Two access modes exist: unrestricted and restricted. In the restricted mode, a much reduced set of
commands are available. These are the commands that have no effect on Site Controller operation
(e.g., cls, dir, ver, help, logout).
If a user logs in to the Site Controller while another user is already logged in, the second user will
gain access, but in the restricted mode. Warning messages are displayed when a second user logs
in or logs out. Conversely, the evict command enables a user logged in under the restricted mode
to force the logout of the other user, thereby gaining unrestricted access rights. The evict command
is available only while logged in under the restricted mode.
The restricted and unrestricted modes can be differentiated by means of the prompt displayed. In
the unrestricted mode an upper-case prompt is displayed (SC>), while in the restricted mode a
lower-case prompt is displayed (sc>). Throughout this manual, it is assumed the user is logged in
with the unrestricted mode, thereby having unrestricted access rights.
The Dimetra IP software consists of a boot-up Configuration Mode software program and an
Application Mode software program.
The boot-up Configuration Mode software is responsible for:
- Boot-up and basic hardware configuration
- Allowing TSC and BRC config files to be loaded via TESS
- Providing MMI commands that support basic TSC configuration.
- Transferring control to the Application mode software. This normally occurs automatically
after a ten second wait for users to log-in to the Configuration Mode MMI.
The Application Mode software provides the functionality and features that support normal EBTS
networking operation.

6866538D01-C 3-3
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Site Controller Configuration Mode MMI Commands

The Site Controller Configuration Mode commands are as follows:

APM_CONFIG

Syntax:
apm_config [-brpos [11,12..etc] | -brReport [11,12..etc] -apm [1..3] | -? | -invalidate]
To configure the APM to BR Mapping. apm_config on its own reports the current mapping. The
default configuration will de-key all BRs on reception of a VSWR alarm

Options:
-brpos [11,12..etc] The BR position to mapped to an APM
-brReport [11,12..etc] The BR position that reports APM alarms
-apm [1..3] The APM number to map a BR to
-invalidate Warning!!!, Clears all mapping
-? Display help

Example:
This example assumes the following theoretical configuration. 3 BR system, BR1 and BR2
connected to APM 1, BR3 connected to APM2. BR1 reports APM1 alarms, BR2 reports APM2
alarms

apm_config -brpos 11 -apm1

apm_config -brpos 12 -apm 1
apm_config -brpos 13 -apm 2
apm_config -brReport 11 -apm 1
apm_config -brReport 12 -apm 2

To display the current configuration, use apm_config

apm_config
BR 11 -> APM 1
BR 12 -> APM 1
BR 13 -> APM 2
BR 11 Reports APM 1 Alarm
BR 12 Reports APM 2 Alarm

3-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

ATTRIB

Syntax:
Syntax1: attrib {-c | -n | -cn | -f | -fClear} | -nClear} file...
Syntax2: attrib {-install | -remove | -passed | -failed} [file...]
Syntax3: attrib [-v verStr] [-d dateStr] component ...
Syntax4: attrib [ -update ] [component ...]
The attrib command displays or edits information associated with hardware and file components
within the TSC.

Attribute Bit Values:

Bit Summary Description

r Readable File exists

w Writable File does not exist

a Archive File has been modified

n Next File will be used next after reset

c Current File is currently being used

f Fallback File will be used next if site fails

Common Options:

-c Sets file(s) to be used as current now

-n Sets file(s) to be used as next after reset. Valid file must exist

-cn Sets file(s) to be used as current and next. Valid file must exist

-f Sets file(s) to be used as fallback if next fails

-fClear Clears the fallback bit (if set) for the specified file(s)

-nClear Clears the next bit (if set) for the specified file(s)

-passed Sets file(s) as passed, i.e. working. If any fallback has been set, then this will
clear it

-failed Sets file(s) as failed, i.e. faulty. If any fallback has been set, then this will select
it to be used next and clear the fallback

file Specifies file to set. If no file is given, then used all current files

-v Sets component(s) version string

-d Sets component(s) upgraded date

6866538D01-C 3-5
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Other Options:

-install Sets a file as valid

-remove Sets a file as invalid. Clears the date and version string

-update Update date and readable flag data from hardware and filing system

Options at any time and any syntax:

-all Display current versions as well

-bare Does not page information or display the header text

-verboseOff Turn display of SWDL errors/information off

-verboseErrors Turn display of SWDL errors only on

-verboseAll Turn display of SWDL errors and information on

General Parameters:

verStr Version label for the component

dateStr The upgraded date string (hh:mm:ss) for the component

component Specifies the component to set/display

Example:
attrib Displays all attributes
attrib tsc.code.1 brc.code.1 Displays the attributes of
brc.code.1 and tsc.code.1
attrib -c tsc.code.1 brc.code.1 Sets the brc.code.1 and
tsc.code.1 to be used now
attrib -v R03.01.00 tsc.code.1 Sets the version of tsc.code.

CLS

Syntax:
cls
The cls command causes a VT100 clear screen escape sequence followed by a cursor location (top
left) command to be sent to the console screen.

DELOOP

Syntax:
deloop
The deloop command takes the site link E1 out of loop back mode.

3-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

DIR

Syntax:
dir [-all]
The dir command lists the current contents of the Site Controller file system. By default, only
valid files are listed.

Options:
-all Display all files even if invalid.

EVICT

Syntax:
evict
The evict command enables a user logged in under the restricted mode to force the logout of the
other user, thereby gaining unrestricted access rights. The evict command is available (and
displayed by the help command) only while logged in under the restricted mode.

FORCE_ACTIVE

Syntax:
force_active
The force_active command is only applicable in an EBTS with a dual site controller
configuration and allows the user to force a redundant site controller to become active. It is
important to note that the site controller will become active even if the other site controller is
active and in a trunking state. This command is not available on System Releases that do not
support the redundant TSC.

HELP

Syntax:
help
The help command displays a list of all available commands and a short synopsis of their use,
comprising an option list and a brief description.

All commands support a ‘-?’ option which displays a description of that command and its usage,
including a brief description of each parameter.

6866538D01-C 3-7
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ID

Syntax:
id [A|B]
The id command enables the user to set or display the position identity of the site controller. This
command is not available on System Releases that do not support the redundant TSC.

Options:
A|B set position identity to either A or B.

LOGOUT

Syntax:
logout
The logout command logs out a user and returns to the “Username: “ prompt on the MMI.

LOOP
Syntax (Sitelink setting = E1):
loop [-line | -payload | -local -test [ -s bytes] [ -max | -i iter]]
The loop command performs a loopback test, on the currently selected site link interface E1.
Depending on the sitelink command setting to E1 the command has the following set of options.

Options:
-line Start an E1 Line (whole interface) remote loop 1, 2)
-payload Start an E1 Payload (Data Timeslot) remote loop 1, 2)
-local Start an E1 Loopback internal to the TSC 1)
-test -HDLC3) Perform an HDLC loopback test with a number of packets similar in
size to a voice packet
-i iter Overrides the default number of iterations (100).
-max Run the link at maximum rate until a key is pressed on the console
-s bytes Set the size of the test data packets (from 10 to 1534 bytes).
1)
Use the deloop command to terminate any loops or tests started with this command.
2)
Cannot run an HDLC test with this loop type. If no loopback is specified, an external loop is assumed.
3) Default setting if not specified.

3-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

MODEM

Syntax:
modem [-port] [-baud baud] AT_command
The modem command allows an AT command to be sent to a modem connected to the specific
serial port.
It is possible to use this command to set up and store a modem profile, but there is no confirmation
to the user that the modem has accepted the commands.
If a user is logged into the modem port, then the AT command will not be sent (along with a
possible change in baud rate) until the user has logged out.

Options:
-1 | -2 Select between serial port 1 or serial port 2. NB Port 1 is the front
panel Service Access MMI port. If no port number is specified, then
the port from which the command was entered will be used.
--baud baud Select baud rate for modem. This baud rate will be retained at power-up.
-AT_command Specifies the AT command and should include the “AT” prefix.

MONITOR

Syntax:
monitor [ -none | -5mhz | -ext | -gps]
The monitor command configures the Site Controller’s monitor port to provide the desired
output. With no options, the current setting is displayed.

Options:
-none Switches off the monitor port
-5mhz 5 MHz clock
-ext External 1 PPS signal
-gps GPS 1 PPS signal

PAGE_SIZE

Syntax:
page_size [lines]
The page_size command either reports or configures the auto-scrolling MMI page length.

6866538D01-C 3-9
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
lines A decimal number representing the number of lines printed to the
screen before the user is prompted to continue. If set to 0 the display
is continuous.

PASSWORD

Syntax:
password
Upon entry of the password command, the user will be prompted to enter the existing password.
A correct entry will result in a request for the new password, and the presentation of the restriction
to which it must conform. If the entry is valid, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new
password.
A message will then be displayed informing the user whether a change has been made. The
command will change the appropriate password according to the newly entered password.

PBR

Syntax:
pbr address | -all
The pbr (“ping base radio”) command causes a message to be transmitted via Ethernet to the
specified Medium Access Control (MAC) address. The Site Controller will display an appropriate
success or failure message.

Options:
address MAC address in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx where x is a
hexadecimal digit.
-all Sends a broadcast ping to all BRs.

The MAC address can be obtained from a BR by using the BR MMI command get enet_id.

PING

Syntax:
ping [-n pkts_to_send] [-l data_size] [ip_address]
The ping command enables the user to send an ICMP ping message to be sent to the specified IP
address over a connected IP network. This command is not available on System Releases that do
not support the redundant TSC.
If the IP address is not specified the help text will be dispalyed. If -n is not specified it will use
the default, as specified in the options text for -n.

3 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
-n pkts_to_send number of packets to send, defaulted to 4. For a continuous ping set
to 0, and then any key press will stop the continuous ping.
-l data_size byte size of the ping message packets, defaulted to 32.
-ip_address standard 'dot' format.

RECEIVE

Syntax:
receive
The receive command loads files over the Site Controller’s console serial port into non-volatile
storage. File names are supplied by the sender via the zmodem protocol.

RESET

Syntax:
reset
The reset command causes the Site Controller to perform a hardware reset, which is roughly
equivalent to pressing the front panel RESET button.

RUN

Syntax:
run
The run command leaves configuration mode and causes the Site Controller to continue with
normal system operation. In general this means that the Site Controller will then proceed to load
and run the main application program.

SEND

Syntax:
send filename...
The send command transfers files from the Site Controller via the console serial port. The files
are transferred using the Zmodem protocol. A typical use would be for uploading configuration
data files.

6866538D01-C 3 - 11
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SITELINK

Syntax:
sitelink [-x21 | -e1 | -?]
This will allow the selection of X.21 or E1 site link interface type. The X.21 site link will always
be the default unless changed via this command. sitelink on its own will return the current
configuration. When -e1 option is selected the text for the e1config command will be displayed

Options:
-x21 Select X.21 site link interface
-e1 Select E1 site link interface
-? Display help

Example:
sitelink -e1

STATUS

Syntax:
status [-c]
The status command displays status and configuration information relating to the TSC. With no
options, the TSC status (BSL looped or direct, date/time of last boot, current internal temperature
etc) is displayed.

Options:
-c Show configuration parameters. These will include appropriate
parameters from the Configuration Mode software’s areas of NVRAM.

TEST

Syntax:
test [-all | -bsl | -eas | -eth | -ffs | -led | -sri]
The test command tests the peripheral inside or related to the Site Controller. With no options,
the status of each device is reported until a device is found to have failed, at which point the
reporting is aborted.

Options:
-all This performs all tests as for the command with no parameters but in
the event of a failure, reporting will continue.

3 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

-bsl This option reports the results of the currently selected site link (E1
or X.21) driver initialisation.
-eas This option tests connectivity with the EAS. The EAS LEDs are
turned on (then off) and status of the alarm input buffers is displayed.
-eth This option reports the result of the Ethernet device driver
initialisation.
-ffs This option reports the result of the flash memory initialisation.
-led Perform front panel LED tests (active and power-on LEDs
excluded).
-sri This option reports the result of the site reference device driver
initialisation.

TIMEZONE

Syntax:
timezone [ [+|-] {0..14}:{00 | 30}]
The timezone command sets the Site Controller timezone relative to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

VER

Syntax:
ver [-all | -h]
The ver command displays Site Controller version information. With no options, the copyright
banner is displayed.

Options:
-all Displays both hardware and software version information.
-h Displays versions of hardware within the Site Controller.

6866538D01-C 3 - 13
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Site Controller Application Mode MMI Commands

The Site Controller Application Mode commands are as follows. With the ’-?’ option a command
displays a description of that command and its usage.
The # character can be used with any of the Application Mode commands to introduce a comment
on the command line. The # character and any text following it are ignored.

ARP

Syntax:
arp
The arp command displays the current ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) lookup table
maintained internally by the IP protocol stack in the Site Controller. This table shows the Site
Controller's mapping of MAC addresses to IP addresses of the devices connected to it.

ATTRIB
Syntax:
Syntax1: attrib [-bare] [-n | -a | -aClear] [<file1> [<file2> ...]]
Syntax2: attrib [-bare] [-v <verStr>] [-d <dateStr>] [<comp1> [<comp2> ...]]
Syntax3: attrib [-bare] [-update] [-dump] [<comp1> [<comp2> ...]]
The attrib command displays or edits information associated with hardware and file components
within the Site Controller.

Attribute Bit Values

Bit Summary Description

r Readable File exists

w Writable File does not exist
a Archive File has been modified
n Next File will be used next after reset
c Current File is currently being used
f Fallback File will be used next if site fails

Options
-a Set file archive flag
-aClear Clear file archive flag
-all Display all versions including log files, etc.
-bare Suppress display of heading, paging and results
-d Set component upgraded date and time

3 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Options (continued)
-dump Display as commands to paste/re-enter
-n Set file to used as next after reset
-update Update component data automatically
-v Set version label of component (no spaces allowed)
-a Set file archive flag

Parameters
file Specify file to set. If no file is given, then uses all current files

comp Specify the component to set or display.

dateStr The upgraded date string (<dd/mm/yyyy> <hh:mm:ss>) for the component

verStr Version label for the component

Valid for System Releases prior to D5.2:

The operation of this command in Application Mode is identical to the operation when in
Configuration Mode with the exception that attrib -cn will only set the next attribute NOT current
and next as IN THE CONFIGURATION MODE. See page 3-5.

AUDIOSTAT

Syntax:
audiostat [-br br_number | -src source_type | -call call_type | -tsa timeslot_assignment]
audiostat -a
audiostat -r
audiostat -f [-br br_number | -call call_type | -src source_type | -tsa timeslot_assignment]
After a voice call is ended, statistical information on audio parameters during the call is gathered
by the EBTS. The audiostat command will display those statistics on a per call basis for the most
recent calls. The calls are displayed in a chronological order: the most recent is displayed last.

Options:
-br br_number Only the statistics for the calls established on the BR specified by
br_number are displayed. br_number consists of the BR cabinet and
position entered directly next to each other without any separating
spaces, so a BR in cabinet 1 position 1 would be specified with the
number 11.
-src source_type Only the statistics for the calls sourced by a source of the type
specified by source_type are displayed. source_type can take the
following values:
0 Synchronised base radio
33 Unsynchronised SwMI vocoder without JDA

6866538D01-C 3 - 15
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

37 Unsynchronised site controller

-call call_type Only the statistics for the calls of the type specified by call_type are
displayed. call_type can take the following values:
0 Console (Individual)
1 Console (Group)
2 Console (Group Re-group)
3 Telephone Interconnect

The call type field is valid only if the source type is unsynchronised SwMI vocoder without JDA.

-tsa timeslot_assignment
Only the statistics of the calls that have used traffic channels with the
timeslots specified by timeslot_assignment are displayed.
timeslot_assignment is used as a four-bit bitmap and several
timeslots can be selected. For example a value of 5 for
timeslot_assignment will specify time slots 1 and 3 (5 = 0101 in
binary.)
-a Rather than display all audio statistics for each calls, the average
value as well as the minimum and the maximum values for a subset
of these statistics are displayed.
-r The values displayed by option -a are reset to zero.
-f Allow filtering of the calls that will be taken into account for the
computation of the values displayed by option a. Use options -br,
-src, -call and -tsa to set the filters. Alone this option disable filters
that might have been previously set.

The values computed prior to calling this command are reset to zero.

BTS_TYPE
Syntax:
bts_type
The bts_type command displays the type of Base Transceiver Station, i.e. EBTS or MBTS.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

BRLOCK

Syntax:
brlock
brlock -status br_number
brlock -clear br_number

3 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

brlock -clearall
Following a VSWR alarm all BRs are locked. The brlock command allows the service personnel
to ascertain the lock status of BRs and unlock individual BRs. brlock -clear br_number clears
the lock from an individual br; brlock -clearall clears the lock from all brs; brlock -status
br_number returns the lock status for an individual br.

CLS

Syntax:
cls
The cls command causes a VT100 clear screen escape sequence followed by a cursor location (top
left) command to be sent to the console screen.

CRASHDUMP
Syntax:
crashdump [<id>]
The crashdump command is used to display the diagnostic information which is captured
automatically in the event of some TSC application crashes. If invoked with no arguments,
crashdump gives a list of crashes for which the information is available, showing a numeric ID,
date/time, and reason for each. If the crashdump command is run with the ID of one of the crash
records as an argument, the full diagnostic information recorded for that crash is displayed.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

DIAG

Syntax:
diag
The diag command allows access to the Site Controller’s internal diagnostic information.
An on-screen menu allows selection of the following information:
1 Display menu
2 Call allocation table
3 Affiliation database
4 Call logging
5 Volatile event logging
6 Fault/event logging
7 Alarm logging
8 Major event logging
9 User log-ins

6866538D01-C 3 - 17
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

10 BRC SNMP trace

11 Reset log
12 Route logs to display (Release D5.2 and later)
13 Route no logs to display (Release D5.2 and later)
0 Exit DIAG mode

DIR

Syntax:
dir [-all]
The dir command lists the current contents of the Site Controller file system. By default, only
valid files are listed.

Options:
-all Display all files even if file is invalid.

DISPLAY CONFIG

Syntax:
display config [-quick | -ip]
The display config command display the current configuration data of the Site Controller. By
default, this command displays all of the configurable parameters set in the configuration data file
downloaded from the BTS Service Software. Options are provided to allow useful subsets of this
information to be displayed.

Options:
-ip Display all IP addresses and port settings.
-quick Display site and zone ID, adjacencies, LST enabled flag, GPS status,
and all address ranges.

The options are only available on System Releases D5.1 SER, D5.2 SER, and later.

EAS_OUT
Syntax:
eas_out [<n>|<n> on|<n> off]
The eas_out command is used to query or control the state of EAS output relays. Invoking the
command with no arguments displays the configured functionality and state of all outputs. With
a single argument (the output number), further detail about the last state change of the specified
output is displayed.

3 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

To control an output’s state, both the output number and the required state (on or off) are specified
as arguments.

This command can only be used to control the state of EAS outputs which are configured for
manual control. These can be identified by running eas_out with no arguments. The eas_out
command is only available on the EBTS platform (not MBTS).

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

EVICT

Syntax:
evict
The evict command enables a user logged in under the restricted mode to force the logout of the
other user, thereby gaining unrestricted access rights. The evict command is available (and
displayed by the help command) only while logged in under the restricted mode.

EXIT
Syntax:
exit
This command is used to log out the user and terminate the MMI. If the user was logged in via
telnet, the connection is dropped.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

HELP

Syntax:
help
The help command displays a list of all available commands and a short synopsis of their use,
comprising an option list and a brief description.

All commands support a ‘-?’ option which displays a description of that command and its usage,
including a brief description of each parameter.

ID
The operation of the id command in the application mode is identical to the operation when in
configuration mode. This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the
redundant TSC.

6866538D01-C 3 - 19
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

KILL
Syntax:
kill <Console ID>
Disconnects the specified console, logging the user out first. The console ID can be found by
using the who command, and must not specify the current console (the logout or exit commands
can be used to terminate the current session).

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

KVL

Syntax:
kvl
The kvl command entered via the front serial port of the Site Controller configures the front port
for communication with the Key Variable Loader device. If no valid KVL communication is
received within 60 seconds, then the port returns to normal operation. Since the front serial port
is normally used by the MMI, no MMI commands may be entered via this port until the
communication with the Key Variable Loader device has been terminated.The success of this
operation is indicated at the Key Variable Loader device only. Following termination of
communication by the KVL, the front serial port will automatically return to normal MMI mode.

LOCK

Syntax:
lock
The lock command places the EBTS into the locked state. While in the locked state, the BRs are
prevented from keying. The MMI will wait while the Site Controller performs the operation
before returning to the user. The call processing operation will be shut down gracefully when a
lock command is issued.

LOG
Syntax:
log [-inform | -minor | -major | -fatal] <string>
The log command saves the specified string into one of the TSC’s log files. The string may be up
to approximately 80 characters in length, and will be converted to lower case before being saved.
If no option is specified, the minor (Fault/Event) log will be used by default.

The # character is the MMI comment character. If this character is used in the string, then any
text following it will be discarded.

3 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
-inform Saves string to the information (Volatile) log
-minor Saves string to the minor (Fault/Event) log
-major Saves string to the major (Major Event) log
-fatal Saves string to the fatal (Major Event) log

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

LOGOUT

Syntax:
logout
The logout command logs out a user and returns to the “Username: “ prompt on the MMI.

MONITOR

Syntax:
monitor [ -none | -5mhz | -ext | -gps]
The monitor command configures the Site Controller’s monitor port to provide the desired
output. With no options, the current setting is displayed.

Options:
-none Switches off the monitor port.
-5mhz 5 MHz clock.
-ext External 1 PPS signal.
-gps GPS 1 PPS signal.

NETSTAT

Syntax:
netstat [-s]
The netstat command displays the current active TCP/IP connections to the Site Controller and
the current active UDP ports.

Options:
-s Display the current statistics associated with the IP, TCP, UDP and
ICMP protocols.

6866538D01-C 3 - 21
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

PAGE_SIZE

Syntax:
The operation of the page_size command in the Application Mode is identical to the operation in
the Configuration Mode. See page 3-9.

PASSWORD

Syntax:
password
Upon entry of the password command, the user will be prompted to enter the existing password.
A correct entry will result in a request for the new password, and the presentation of the restriction
to which it must conform. If the entry is valid, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new
password.
A message will then be displayed informing the user whether a change has been made. The
command will change the appropriate password according to the current access mode.

PING
The operation of the ping command in the application mode is identical to the operation when in
configuration mode. This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the
redundant TSC.

RECEIVE
The operation of this command in Application Mode is identical to the operation when in
Configuration Mode.

RESET

Syntax:
reset [-ebts | -peer | -br br_num]
The reset command command when used without any options causes the Site Controller to
perform a hardware reset, which is roughly equivalent to pressing the front panel RESET button.
In a dual TSC EBTS reset of the active TSC will cause the standby TSC to take over.

Options:
-ebts Causes the BRs to be reset as well as the Site Controller.
-peer Enables the user to perform a hardware reset on the other site
controller. This option is only applicable for an EBTS with a dual
site controller configuration. This command option is not available
on System Releases that do not support the redundant TSC.

3 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

-br br_num Reset the BR specified by br_num (1..7). This command option is
not available on System Releases that do not support the redundant
TSC.

RGPS_DELAY

Syntax:
rgps_delay [-set <delay> | -invalidate]
The rgps_delay command sets the transmission time delay for the cable connecting the RGPS
(Remote GPS) receiver to the Site Controller. The time delay is only to be set when a
independently powered RGPS receiver is being used. By setting a time delay the Site Controller
assumes that a independently powered RGPS is present.

Options:
-set Set the transmission time delay to the entered value. Must be entered
in nanoseconds.
-invalidate This command invalidates the transmission time delay value.

This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the use of a remote GPS
antenna.

SEND
The operation of this command in Application Mode is identical to the operation when in
Configuration Mode.

SITE_LOCATION

Syntax:
site_location
site_location {-reset | -valid}
site_location -co_ordinates [N | S] deg: min: sec [W | E] deg: min: sec H metres
This command allows resetting, setting and checking of the site location. The system needs to
determine its location in order to synchronize its timing with other sites.

When a remote GPS is used, the position information is relevant to the remote GPS and not to the
EBTS.

6866538D01-C 3 - 23
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
-reset Clears any site location information from permanent memory. The
Site Controller will perform GPS site survey when it is next
restarted.
-valid Determine if a valid site location has been stored in permanent
memory.
-co_ordinates Sets the lattitude, longitude and height co-ordinates for the site
location.

If the TSC is moved, the site_location -reset command must be entered immediately after first
power up to allow the system to calculate its new location.

Example:
site_location Determine location of site
site_location -reset Clear any stored site location
site_location -valid Determine if site location valid
site_location N54:12:45.789 W1:6:12.345 H174 Set the site location

The system must be restarted for these commands to have any effect.

STATUS BR

Syntax:
status br [cabinet | position]
The status br command returns information relating to a single BR or all BRs. If entered without
cabinet and position parameters, the command causes the information for all BRs to be displayed
in a table.
If no response is received from a BR, then the entries in the table are made with a series of dashes.

Options:
cabinet The cabinet in which the BR is physically located.
position The position of the specified BR within the cabinet.

The cabinet and position parameters must be entered directly next to each other without any
separating spaces, so a BR in cabinet 1 position 1 would be checked with the command “status
br 11”.

3 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS BSL

Syntax:
status bsl
The status bsl command will display the current status of the base site link, including the results
of any tests performed.

STATUS BSLQ
Syntax:
status bslq [-r]
The status bslq command displays the statistics for the transmission queues associated with the
X.21 interface.
-r Resets the statistics for the X.21 transmission queues.

STATUS BTS
Syntax:
status bts [-l]
The status bts command displays state information for various EBTS subsystems.

Options:
-l Long output format. In addition to the state, the associated probable
cause and time of last state change trap are displayed or each
subsystem.

The status bts command is only available on the EBTS platform (not MBTS).

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

STATUS CRTP

Syntax:
status crtp [-r]
The status crtp command displays the current CRTP (Compressed Real Time Protocol) statistics.

Options:
-r Resets these CRTP statistics

6866538D01-C 3 - 25
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS EAS

Syntax:
status eas [ -Pn | -all | -m ]
The status eas command displays the status of all the alarm contacts of the EAS. Status results
are displayed in a table.
The table contains input/output number, a textual description, and a status (o.k./alarm for inputs and
active/inactive for outputs). The inputs and outputs are displayed in separate sections in the table.

Options:
-Pn This option gets the status of the plug number entered (where n is the
EAS rear panel plug (connector) number 5 to 10).
-all This option shows all inputs (including disabled inputs).
-m This option starts continuous status monitoring.

STATUS FR

Syntax:
status fr [-r]
The status fr command displays the current statistics associated with the frame relay protocol
layer.

Options:
-r Resets these frame relay statistics

STATUS FRF

Syntax:
status frf [-r]
The status frf command displays the current statistics associated with frame relay fragmentations
and reassembly.

Options:
-r Resets the frame relay fragmentation statistics

3 - 26 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS KEYS
Syntax:
status keys
The status keys command displays the security key status information.

STATUS LMI

Syntax:
status lmi [-r]
The status lmi command displays the current LMI (Local Management Interface) statistics. The
LMI protocol monitors the PVCs (Permanent Virtual Circuit) that link the Site Controller to the
Core Routers.

Options:
-r Resets these LMI statistics

STATUS PEER

Syntax:
status peer
The status peer command displays information on the other site controller's current functional
status and its identity position. A valid id will only be displayed if the peer TSC is responding
and correctly configured. The command is only applicable for an EBTS with a dual site controller
configuration. This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the
redundant TSC.

STATUS RIGMP

Syntax:
status rigmp [-r]
The status rigmp command displays the current statistics associated with robust IGMP (Internet
Group Membership Protocol).

Options:
-r resets these robust IGMP statistics

6866538D01-C 3 - 27
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS SC

Syntax:
status sc [-all]
The status sc command displays preliminary diagnostics information on the TSC. This includes
the health of the TSC, the trunking state, the internal state and the site link status.

Options:
-all Displays the internal state of the cell and BRs.

STATUS SEC
Syntax:
status sec
The status sec command displays security parameters used by the Site Controller.

STATUS SRI

Syntax:
status sri [-gps | -sr | -t | -stat_show | -stat_reset | -p]
The status sri command provides general information on the health of the Site Reference system.
This includes the Site Reference and GPS operational status, UTC, GPS and local times and 1PPS
signal status.

Options:
-gps Displays detailed status of the GPS receiver including a satellite
tracking report. (Release D5.2 and later)
-sr Provides details of the site reference internal state status sri [-all | -t
| -p | -stat_show | -stat_reset] (Release D5.2 and later)
-t Displays GPS receiver identifier.
-p Displays continuously updated satellite tracking information.
-stat_show Display GPS statistics.
-stat_reset Reset GPS statistics.

When a remote GPS is used, the position information is relevant to the remote GPS and not to the
EBTS

TFTP
Syntax:
tftp <host_ip> {get|put} [-d <host_dir>] {-a[lltsclogs] | [file1 ...]}

3 - 28 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

The tftp command allows files to be uploaded to or downloaded from a remote computer. The
remote host whose IP address is specified by host_ip must be running TFTP server software.

Options:
-d Specifies the source or destination directory on the host machine.
The directory name must end with a “/” or “\” character.
-a For a put operation, indicates that all TSC log files should be sent.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

UNLOCK

Syntax:
unlock
The unlock command places the Site Controller into the unlocked state from the current state.

VER

Syntax:
ver [-h]
The ver command displays version information for Site Controller software and, optionally, the
Site Controller hardware. If entered without options, the firmware and application version
numbers are displayed.

Options:
-h Displays both hardware and software information.

WHO
Syntax:
who
This command displays a list of users logged in or connected to the TSC. The information
displayed includes the user name, port, and access mode. If the user name field is blank, then a
telnet connection exists but no user is logged in over it.
If a user is logged into a Base Radio, then the user name is displayed as “Unknown”.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

6866538D01-C 3 - 29
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Base Radio Commands

The BR command set is used to configure and test the Base Radio.
All MMI commands can be divided into three groups:
a) Configuration MMI specific commands:
get ex_threshold
get reset_info
get rssi
get rx_mode
get rx_status
get tetra_format
get txdc_i
get txdc_q
get txiq_ph
set ex_threshold
set rx_qsign
set tetra_format
set tone
set txdc_i_final
set txdc_q_final
set tx_test_mode
b) Application MMI specific commands:
cls
exit
get active_traces
get aiea
get air_tracer [xxxx]
get ccimmun
get config
get info
get pa_status
kvl
set ddk
set traces_off
set rear_serial
statistics
c) All remaining commands are common Configuration (ROM) and Application MMI
commands.

3 - 30 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Base Radio Configuration and Application Mode Commands

AIEA
Syntax:
aiea
This aiea command returns the Air interface Encryption and Authentication configuration.

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
BRC> aiea
ZONE ID : 1
SITE ID : 1
CK change : 65535 seconds notification period
SC change : 65535 seconds notification period
DCK DB : download not onging
DCK DB : overflow flag clear
SC1 : supported
SC2 : disabled
SC3 : disabled
AUTH : not required
SC1MS : supported (ignored)
Registr. : clear (ignored)
Broadcast : clear (ignored)
KSG : TEA1
START Addr: 0x0d0000 851968
END Addr: 0xafffff 11534335
KEK1 : undefined
KEK2 : undefined
SCK1 : undefined
SCK2 : undefined
CCK1 : undefined
CCK2 : undefined
SCK : undefined
CCK : undefined
DL-SC : 1
DL-CK : undefined
DL-KSG : no TEA
UL-SC : 1
UL-CK : undefined
UL-KSG : no TEA

6866538D01-C 3 - 31
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

AIR_TRACER
Syntax:
air_tracer | at [xxxx]
The rear Base Radio serial port can be used to monitor the air interface. It has to be configured
for diagnostics (see set rear_ser).
Data is available from the rear serial port for all slots with a channel set-up. Additionally data is
available for slots that are configured via the air_tracer command.
The data is available in clear or encrypted format (see air_tracer_mode for details).

Works only with Application Software.

Example:

BRC> air_tracer

usage: air_tracer | at [xxxx]

xxxx is the config for the TMV/air tracer for slot 1..4
0 : air tracer disabled for this slot
1 : air tracer enabled for this slot
Examples:
"at 0100" enables air trace for slot 2
"at 111" invalid, always provide 4 parameters
"at 11 11"invalid, no spaces in parameter string allowe
CAUTION: Enabling traces impairs BRC performance,
disable for normal operation!
NOTE: see "atm" to enable encrypted TMV output

current air tracer configuration (for help type "at"):

slot 1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0

By default the Air Tracer output is disabled, the rear serial port is busy (in autotune mode). Use
set rear_ser diagnostic command to change the port mode to diagnostic mode.

3 - 32 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

AIR_TRACER_MODE
Syntax:
air_tracer_mode [xxxx]
The air_tracer_mode command sets the Mode of the TMV output to clear, encrypted or both.

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
a) Querying the current air tracer setting

BRC> air_tracer_mode

usage: air_tracer_mode | atm [xxxx]

xxxx is the config for the TMV/air tracer for slot 1..4
C : clear air tracer selected for this slot
E : encrypted air tracer selected for this slot
B : clear AND encrypted air tracer selected for this slot
Examples:
"atm EECC" encrypted slote 1 and 2, clear slot 3 and 4
"atm BEC" invalid, always provide 4 parameters
"atm BE CC"invalid, no spaces in parameter string allowed
CAUTION: This does not enable the traces. See "at" and
"set rear_ser diagnostic" command to enable traces.

current air tracer modes are (for help type "atm"):

slot 1 2 3 4
C C C C

b) Setting new air tracer mode

BRC> air_tracer_mode ecec

current air tracer modes are (for help type "atm"):

slot 1 2 3 4
E C E C

ATC CAV_PARK
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc cav_park cavity
The atc cav_park command instructs the Autotuner to park the specified cavity.

6866538D01-C 3 - 33
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> atc cav_park 1
Command executed OK

ATC CHECK
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc check
The atc check command tests the LGP ATCC firmware.

Example:
BRC> atc check
Command executed OK

ATC GET CAV_FREQ

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_freq cavity
The atc get cav_freq command displays the frequency that the specified cavity is tuned to. If the
cavity frequency has not been established, a value of zero is displayed.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_freq 1
Cavity 1
Cavity Freq. 932000000 Hz
Cavity Status 1a - Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_INP_POWER

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_inp_power cavity
The atc get cav_inp_power command displays the input power for the specified cavity in dBm.

3 - 34 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> atc get cav__inp_power 1
Cavity 1
Input Power 37.68 dBm
Cavity Status 1a- Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_REFL_POWER

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_refl_power cavity
The atc get cav_refl_power command displays the reflected power for the specified cavity in
dBm.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_refl_power 1
Cavity 1
Reflected Power 20.12 dBm
Cavity Status 1a- Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_STATUS

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_status cavity
The atc get cav_status command displays the full status for the given cavity. The Frequency,
Input Power, Reflected Power, VSWR, Alarm Status Flags and Cavity Status Flags are displayed.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_status 1
Cavity 1
Cavity Freq. 937000000 Hz
Input Power 37.68 dBm
Reflected Power 20.12 dBm
VSWR Ratio 2.15
Alarm Status 00 -
Cavity Status 1a- Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

6866538D01-C 3 - 35
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ATC GET CAV_VSWR

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_vswr cavity
The atc get cav_vswr command displays the VSWR ratio for the specified cavity.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_vswr 2
Cavity 2
VSWR Ratio 2.15
Cavity Status 1a - Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_VSWR_ALM

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_vswr_alm cavity
The atc get cav_vswr_alm command displays the VSWR alarm threshold for the given cavity.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_vswr_alm 2
Cavity 2
VSWR Threshold 02.80
Cavity Status 1a - Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CHAN_SPC

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get chan_spc
The atc get chan_spc command displays the cavity channel spacing in kHz.

Example:

BRC> atc get spc

Chan Spacing 150 kHz

3 - 36 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

ATC GET COMBINER

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get combiner
The atc get combiner command displays which type of ATCC is connected to the BRC.

Example:
BRC> atc get combiner
LGP Combiner detected

ATC GET FWARE_REV

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get fware_rev
The atc get fware_rev command displays the Autotuner Firmware Revision Number, the
Attached Cavity Count and a Product ID code.

Example:
BRC> atc get fware_rev
Firmware Revision 12.34
Cavity Count 3
Product ID 0x01

ATC GET TUNE_TIMO

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get tune_timo
The atc get tune_timo command displays the ATCC tune timeout.

Example:
BRC> atc get tune_timo
Tune Timeout0 mins

6866538D01-C 3 - 37
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ATC HELP
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc [help | ?]
atc get [help | ?]
atc set [help | ?]
This is an example of the Autotuner general "Help" facility. It displays all possible sub-
commands following the atc command.

Example:
BRC> atc help
auto|atc HELP
Autotuner sub-commands :-
set Set
get Get
sanity Sanity check
reset Reset
cav_park Park cavity

ATC RESET
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc reset
The atc reset command performs a warm reset of the Autotuner.

Example:
BRC> atc reset
Command executed OK

ATC SANITY
Supported by: LGP

Syntax
atc sanity
The atc sanity command simply displays the Autotune Controller’s firmware revision number, as
a means of checking the serial link. If the link is down, an error message is displayed.

3 - 38 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> atc sanity
Firmware Revision 12.34
Cavity Count 3
Product ID 0x01
BRC> atc sanity
........
FAILED - Autotune link down

ATC SET CAV_VSWR_ALM

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc set cav_vswr_alm cavity threshold
The atc set cav_vswr_alm command establishes a threshold for initiating a VSWR alarm on the
specified cavity. The threshold must be in the range 1.00 to 10.00.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_vswr_alm 1 3.3
Cavity 1
VSWR Threshold 03.30

ATC SET TUNE_TIMO

Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc set tune_timo
The atc set tune_timo command sets the ATCC tune timeout.

Example:
BRC> atc set tune_timo 1
Tune Timeout 1mins

CCIMMUN
Syntax:
ccimmun
The ccimmun command returns the Control Channel Immunity configuration.

6866538D01-C 3 - 39
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
BRC> ccimmun
Interference condition alert ratio : 20
condition hysteresis : 2
received signal strength : -50 dbm

Automatic handling : disabled

Proprietary Scrambler : enabled

seed : 000102 - 030405 - 060708

seed : 090a0b - 0c0d0e - 0f1011
seed : 121314 - 151617 - 18191a
seed : 1b1c1d - 1e1f20 - 212223
seed : 242526 - 272829 - 2a2b2c
seed : 2d2e2f - 303132 - 333435

CLS
Syntax:
cls
This command clears the current display. It is useful for removing clutter from the screen.

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

DEKEY

Syntax:
dekey
The dekey command stops all RF transmission.

Example:
After the command is entered, an indication of a successful transmission stop is returned.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

3 - 40 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

EXIT
Syntax:
exit
Logs out the user and turns off run-time logging. This is most applicable on a remote MMI
session, as it will terminate the session. On a local MMI session this is equivalent to 'logout'

Example:
BRC_c1_p1# exit
Are you sure you want to exit?
[y/n]:y

Connection to host lost.

d:\temp>

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

GET ACTIVE_TRACES
Syntax:
get active_traces
Displays a list of active report traces, to local and remote MMIs

Example:
BRC> get active_traces
No traces are currently active
BRC>

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

GET ALARMS

Syntax:
get alarms
The get alarms command returns any BR alarm conditions.

Example:

6866538D01-C 3 - 41
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

If alarm conditions exist, every active alarm is returned.

BRC> get alarms

[brc fru warning]
[gps failure]

If no alarm conditions exist, a message is returned indicating alarms have not been detected.

BRC> get alarms

NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED.

GET ALARM_MASK

Syntax:
get alarm_mask
The get alarm_mask command returns sixteen, 1-byte hexadecimal fields. These bytes represent
alarms that are enabled or disabled.
“ff” indicates that all alarms covered by that byte are enabled.

Example:
BRC> get alarm_mask
ALARM MASK is |ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|

GET ALARM_REPORTS

Syntax:
get alarm_reports
The get alarm_reports command returns the enabled/disabled status of the extended alarm
reporting mechanism.

Example:
BRC> get alarm_reports
ALARM REPORTS: TRACE is ENABLED

GET BRC_KIT_NO
Syntax:
get brc_kit_no
The brc_kit_no command returns the kit number of the BRC.

3 - 42 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get brc_kit_no
BRC KIT NUMBER is CTF1088A

GET BRC_REV_NO

Syntax:
get brc_rev_no
The brc_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the BRC.

Example:
BRC> get brc_rev_no
BRC REVISION NUMBER is RXX.XX.XX

GET BRC_SCRATCH
Syntax:
get brc_scratch
The get brc_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for a scratch pad on
the BRC.

Example:
BRC> get brc_scratch
BRC SCRATCH is Motorola, Inc.

GET BTS_TYPE
Syntax:
get bts_type
The get bts_type command prints the current BTS_TYPE setting on the BR MMI.

Example:
BRC> get bts_type
BTS_TYPE: EBTS

6866538D01-C 3 - 43
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET CABINET
Syntax:
get cabinet
The get cabinet command returns the cabinet in which the current BR resides.

Example:
BRC> get cabinet
CABINET is 1

GET DEFAULT_TX_POWER

Syntax:
get default_tx_power
The get default_tx_power command returns the default transmit operating power level. The
value is returned in Watts and dBm.

Example:
BRC> get default_tx_power
DEFAULT TRANSMITTER POWER is 75.00 watts (48.75 dbm)

GET DSP_SANITY

Syntax:
get dsp_sanity
The get dsp_sanity command returns the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) operational condition
as either passed or failed.

Example:
BRC> get dsp_sanity
DSP SANITY: PASSED
DSP Sanity check.... passed.

3 - 44 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET DSP_VERSION

Syntax:
get dsp_version
The get dsp_version command returns the current Digital Signal Processor (DSP) software
version number.

Example:
BRC> get dsp_version
DSP VERSION is 2.2

GET ENET_ID
Syntax:
get enet_id
The get enet_id command returns the Ethernet address for the current BRC.

Example:
BRC> get enet_id
BRC ETHERNET ADDRESS is 08 00 3E C0 02 C8

GET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get exciter_scaling_factor port
The get exciter_scaling_factor command returns the scaling factor for a specified Exciter
module A/D port (0 to 11).

Example:
BRC> get exciter_scaling_factor 1
EXCITER SCALING FACTOR 1 is 1.000000

GET EX_AD

Syntax:
get ex_ad [port]
The get ex_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports (0 to 11) on the
Exciter module with their interpreted voltages.

6866538D01-C 3 - 45
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

Example:
BRC> get ex_ad
EXCITER A->D PORT[0] = 0x6a[13.97v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[1] = 0x3[0.06v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[2] = 0xa2[9.90v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[3] = 0xfe [4.96v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[4] = 0x7c[4.84v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[5] = 0x1d[0.57v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[6] = 0xfe [4.96v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[7] = 0x39 [2.62v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[8] = 0x80 [5.00v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[9] = 0x6[0.06v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[10]= 0xfe [2.48v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[11]= 0x80[2.50v].

GET EX_THRESHOLD

Syntax:
get ex_threshold
The get ex_threshold command returns the two threshold power values currently stored in RAM.

Example:
BRC> get ex_threshold
The thresholds for register 01 of fwd LNODCT are:
Threshold Low: 16.0W
Threshold High: 40.0W

GET EX_KIT_NO

Syntax:
get ex_kit_no
The get ex_kit_no command returns the kit number of the Exciter module.

Example:
BRC> get ex_kit_no
EXCITER KIT NUMBER is CTF6339B

3 - 46 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET EX_REV_NO

Syntax:
get ex_rev_no
The get ex_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the Exciter module.

Example:
BRC> get ex_rev_no
EXCITER REVISION NUMBER is RXX.XX.XX

GET EX_SCRATCH

Syntax:
get ex_scratch
The get ex_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad on
the Exciter module.

Example:
BRC> get ex_scratch
EXCITER SCRATCH is Motorola, Inc.

GET FWD_PWR

Syntax:
get fwd_pwr
The get fwd_pwr command returns the current value of forward power. This reading is taken
from the built-in power meter of the RF Power Amplifier module. The results are returned in
Watts and dBm.

This command should be used only when the transmitter is keyed to obtain accurate results.

Example:
BRC> get fwd_pwr
FORWARD POWER is 39.57 watts [45.97 dbm]

6866538D01-C 3 - 47
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor
The get fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor command returns the linear multiplier used to derive the
forward power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> get fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor
FORWARD POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR is 36.00

GET INFO
Syntax:
get info
Displays BRC hardware and configuration information. This includes software and hardware
revision numbers, transmit and receive frequencies and power. The DSP software version is only
available when the BR is keyed.

Example:

BRC> get info

BRC Code Version : R05.x2.xx
ROM Code Version : R07.03.03
BRC Revision : R03.00.00
Exciter Revision : R05.00.03
PA Revision : R07.00.00
RX1 Revision : R04.01.01
RX2 Revision : R04.01.01
RX3 Revision : R04.01.01
Receive Freq : 380.00000 MHz
Transmit Freq : 390.00000 MHz
Power Levelling Disable. [300 Seconds].
Maximum VSWR : 4.00:1
Forward Power : 0.00 watts [-inf dbm]
Reflected Power : 0.50 watts [26.99 dbm]
DSP Version unavailable as BRC is not keyed

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

3 - 48 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET K_FACTOR

Syntax:
get k_factor
The get k_factor command returns the current operational k_factor value.

Example:
BRC> get k_factor
K FACTOR is 0.85000000

GET MAX_VSWR

Syntax:
get max_vswr
The get max_vswr command returns the maximum VSWR before an alarm is triggered, as
measured by the built-in power meters of the RF Power Amplifier module.

Example:
BRC> get max_vswr
MAXIMUM VSWR is 4.00:1

GET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR

Syntax:
get max_wattmeter_vswr
The get max_wattmeter_vswr command returns the maximum Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) before an alarm is triggered, as measured by the external wattmeter located in the RFDS,
if applicable.

Example:
BRC> get max_wattmeter_vswr
MAXIMUM VSWR AT WATTMETER: 4.00:1

6866538D01-C 3 - 49
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET PA_AD

Syntax:
get pa_ad [port]
The get pa_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports ( 0 to 11) on the
Power Amplifier module with their interpreted voltages.
If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

Example:
BRC> get pa_ad
PA A->D PORT[0] = 0x0[0.00v].
PA A->D PORT[1] = 0x0 [0.00v].
PA A->D PORT[2] = 0x3[0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[3] = 0x70[2.19v].
PA A->D PORT[4] = 0xf [0.29v].
PA A->D PORT[5] = 0xc [0.23v].
PA A->D PORT[6] = 0x5 [0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[7] = 0x6 [0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[8] = 0x5 [0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[9] = 0x80[2.50v].
PA A->D PORT[10]= 0x6[0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[11]= 0x80 [2.50v].

GET PA_COEF

Syntax:
get pa_coef
The get pa_coef command returns the Power Amplifier coefficients. These values are determined
and programmed during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> get pa_coef
***AT AND BELOW 937.000 MHz***
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR A: 0.04900
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR B: 1.93630
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR C: 3.84640

***ABOVE 937.000 MHz***

PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR D: 0.00300
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR E: 1.87780
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR F: 3.76310
PA TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT:

3 - 50 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET PA_KIT_NO

Syntax:
get pa_kit_no
The get pa_kit_no command returns the kit number of the Power Amplifier module.

Example:
BRC> get pa_kit_no
POWER AMPLIFIER KIT NUMBER is CTF1085A

GET PA_REV_NO

Syntax:
get pa_rev_no
The get pa_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the Power Amplifier
module.

Example:
BRC> get pa_rev_no
POWER AMPLIFIER REVISION NUMBER is R06.00.00

GET PA_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get pa_scaling_factor port
The get pa_scaling_factor command returns the scaling factor for a specified Power Amplifier
module A/D port ( 0 to 11).

Example:
BRC> get pa_scaling_factor 1
POWER AMPLIFIER
BRC> get SCALING FACTOR
pa_scaling_factor 1 1 is 1.000000
POWER AMPLIFIER SCALING FACTOR 1 is 1.000000

6866538D01-C 3 - 51
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET PA_SCRATCH

Syntax:
get pa_scratch
The get pa_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad on
the Power Amplifier module.

Example:
BRC> get pa_scratch
POWER AMPLIFIER SCRATCH PAD is Motorola, Inc.

GET PA_STATUS
Syntax:
get pa_status
Displays all configuration information and current status relating to the PA.

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

GET PCTRL

Syntax:
get pctrl
The get pctrl command returns the current enabled/disabled state of the power leveling
functionality of the BR.

Example:
BRC> get pctrl
POWER CONTROL is ENABLED

GET POSITION

Syntax:
get position
The get position command returns the position number of where the current BR is mounted
within a selected cabinet. This does not represent the cabinet in which the BR resides.

3 - 52 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get position
POSITION is 2

GET PS_AD

Syntax:
get ps_ad [port]
The get ps_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports ( 0 to 11) on the
Power Supply module with their interpreted voltages.
If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

Example:
BRC> get ps_ad
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[0] = 0xeb[28.04v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[1] = 0xe2 [14.17v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[2] = 0xd8 [5.13v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[3] = 0xd9 [4.20v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[4] = 0x3 [0.04v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[5] = 0xd0 [4.06v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[6] = 0x8e [2.77v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[7] = 0x86 [2.60v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[8] = 0xee [4.69v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[9] = 0x0 [0.00v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[10]= 0xca [3.95v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[11]= 0x80 [2.50v].

GET REF_PWR

Syntax:
get ref_pwr
The get ref_pwr command returns the current value of reflected power. This reading is taken
from the built-in power meter of the RF Power Amplifier module. The results are returned in
Watts and dBm.
This command should only be used when the transmitter is keyed to obtain accurate results.

Example:
BRC> get ref_pwr
REFLECTED POWER is 1.50 watts [31.75 dbm]

6866538D01-C 3 - 53
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor
The get ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor command returns the linear multiplier used to derive the
reflected power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> get ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor
REFLECTED POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR is 52.00

GET RESET_INFO

Syntax:
get reset_info
The get reset_info command displays the cause of the last BRC reset. Possible reset causes are
(more than one may be displayed):
• Power-on reset
• Ext hard reset
• Ext soft reset
• Loss-of-lock reset
• Software watchdog reset
• Check stop reset
• Debug port hard reset
• Debug port soft reset
• JTAG reset
• Front panel reset
• Software controlled reset

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> reset_info
Reset status register = 0x00000000. Reset latches = 1
Reset cause :-
Software controlled reset

3 - 54 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET ROM_VER
Syntax:
get rom_ver
The get rom_ver command returns the current software version stored in firmware on the BRC
module.

Example:
BRC> get rom_ver
BRC ROM VERSION is RXX.XX.XX

GET RPTR_STATUS
Syntax:
get rptr_status
The get rptr_status command returns the overall status of the base radio.

Example:
BRC> get rptr_status
********************************************************
BRC CODE VERSION U07.02.02-TETRA-BRC-ROM
OUTPUT PORT 0 = 0x808604
INPUT PORT 0 = 0xc9b81f
INPUT PORT 1 = 0x808604

NUMBER WORKING RECEIVERS DETECTED : 3.

RX1 PRESENT...
RX2 PRESENT...
RX3 PRESENT...

BAND : TETRA {900 MHz}

RX FREQUENCY : 917.01250
TX FREQUENCY : 932.01250
TX IF FREQUENCY : 157.3 MHz.

WINDOW CLIPPING LEVEL: 5.500000 db.

WINDOW CLIPPING SATURATION LEVEL: 15.000000 db.
WINDOW CLIPPING MODE: ON

SGC STATUS : ENABLED

SGC DELAY : 0 units = 0.000000 msec. [msec = units/120]

PERIODIC TRAINING DISABLED. [900 SECONDS].

POWER LEVELING DISABLED. [300 SECONDS].
RF POWER REPORTS DISABLED.
RF ALARM REPORTS DISABLED.
POWER WATCHDOG ENABLED.
INITILIZATION TRACE DISABLED.

ALARM MASK :
|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|

6866538D01-C 3 - 55
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET RSSI

Syntax:
get rssi num_of_reports num_of_samples
The get rssi command allows examination of the received RF signal quality of the BR. A
performance report is returned including Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) for each
branch, the Software Gain Control (SGC) attenuation setting, a composite RSSI level, Bit Error
Rate (BER), and the sync miss rate.
RSSI data is calculated for the specified number of samples. Each sample is averaged over the
specified number of reports specified. A report is generated once every 56.67 msec.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> get rssi 7 1
Starting RSSI monitor for 7 repetitions averaged each 1
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER Sync Miss

dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ --------- ---------
0 -58.5 -118.5 -111.7 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
1 -58.5 -120.1 -117.4 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
2 -58.7 -122.0 -119.2 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
3 -59.4 -120.8 -116.3 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
4 -59.4 -118.7 -118.7 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
5 -59.3 -120.8 -109.8 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
6 -59.4 -119.0 -115.5 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
7 -58.4 -118.9 -114.5 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00

GET RX(n)_AD

Syntax:
get rx1_ad [port]
get rx2_ad [port]
get rx3_ad [port]
The get rx(n)_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports (0 to 11) on
the Receiver module with their interpreted voltages.
If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

3 - 56 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get rx1_ad
RX1 A->D PORT[0] = 0xe0 [9.71v].
RX1 A->D PORT[1] = 0x67 [4.02v].
RX1 A->D PORT[2] = 0xe1 [9.76v].
RX1 A->D PORT[3] = 0xff [4.98v].
RX1 A->D PORT[4] = 0x7c [4.84v].
RX1 A->D PORT[5] = 0xe9 [4.51v].
RX1 A->D PORT[6] = 0x4a [1.45v].
RX1 A->D PORT[7] = 0x44 [1.33v].
RX1 A->D PORT[8] = 0x7c [4.84v].
RX1 A->D PORT[9] = 0xcf [8.09v].
RX1 A->D PORT[10]= 0x95 [2.91v].
RX1 A->D PORT[11]= 0x80 [2.50v].

GET RX(n)_DELTA

Syntax:
get rx1_delta
get rx2_delta
get rx3_delta
The get rx(n)_delta command returns the contents of the RSSI offset value in dBm for a selected
receiver.

The rx delta values should not be altered; they are calibrated during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_delta
RECEIVER 1 RECEIVE SIGNAL STRENGTH DELTA is 0.0

GET RX(n)_KIT_NO

Syntax:
get rx1_kit_no
get rx2_kit_no
get rx3_kit_no
The get rx(n)_kit_no command returns the kit number of a selected Receiver module.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_kit_no
RECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER is CRF6114B

6866538D01-C 3 - 57
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET RX(n)_REV_NO

Syntax:
get rx1_rev_no
get rx2_rev_no
get rx3_rev_no
The get rx(n)_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the specified Receiver
module.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_rev_no
RECEIVER 1 REVISION NUMBER is RXX.XX.XX

GET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get rx1_scaling_factor [port]
get rx2_scaling_factor [port]
get rx3_scaling_factor [port]
The get rx(n)_scaling_factor command returns the scaling factor for a specified Receiver
module A/D port (0 to 11).

Example:
BRC> get rx1_scaling_factor 1
RECEIVER 1 SCALING FACTOR 1 is 2.000000

GET RX(n)_SCRATCH

Syntax:
get rx1_scratch
get rx2_scratch
get rx3_scratch
The get rx(n)_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad
on the specified Receiver module.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_scratch
RECEIVER 1 SCRATCH is Motorola, Inc.

3 - 58 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET RX_FREQ

Syntax:
get rx_freq
The get rx_freq command returns the programmed receiver frequency for the current BR.

Example:
BRC> get rx_freq
RECEIVE FREQUENCY is: 922.50000 MHz

GET RX_FRU_CONFIG

Syntax:
get rx_fru_config
The get rx_fru_config command displays the current receiver configuration of a Base Radio.

Example:
BRC> get rx_fru_config
RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 RX2 RX3 }

GET RX_INJ

Syntax:
get rx_inj
The get rx_inj command returns the high/low side injection status of the second Local Oscillator
(LO) for all receivers.

Example:
BRC> get rx_inj
RECEIVER INJECTION is LOW

6866538D01-C 3 - 59
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET RX_MODE

Syntax:
get rx_mode
The get rx_mode command returns the enabled/disabled status of the receiver.

Example:
BRC> get rx_mode
RECEIVER 1 is ENABLED
RECEIVER 2 is ENABLED
RECEIVER 3 is ENABLED

GET RX_QSIGN

Syntax:
get rx_qsign
The get rx_qsign command returns the current Q sign status of the receivers.

Example:

BRC> get rx_qsign

RECEIVER Q SIGN is NON-INVERTED

GET RX_STATUS

Syntax:
get rx_status
The get rx_status command returns status information of the receivers.

Example:
BRC> get rx_status
BRC> get rx_status
BER STATUS is UNLOCKED
BER STATUS is UNLOCKED
RECEIVER Q SIGN is NON-INVERTED
RECEIVER Q SIGN is NON-INVERTED
RECEIVER 1 ENABLED
RECEIVER 1 ENABLED
RECEIVER 2 ENABLED
RECEIVER 2 ENABLED
RECEIVER 3 ENABLED
RECEIVER 3 ENABLED
RECEIVER INJECTION is LOW
RECEIVER INJECTION is LOW

3 - 60 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET SYS_GAIN

Syntax:
get sys_gain
The get sys_gain command returns the enabled/disabled status of the system gain factor.

Example:
BRC> get sys_gain
SYSTEM GAIN is ENABLED

GET TETRA_FORMAT

Syntax:
get tetra_format
The get tetra_format command returns the current setting used for framed TETRA signalling.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> get tetra_format
MCC: 0
MNC: 0
CC: 1
Downlink Type: 1
Uplink Type: 7
Trigger: frame
MS Power: 15 dBm
ACC param: -53 dBm

GET TRAINING_INTERVAL

Syntax:
get training_interval
The get training_interval command returns the number of timer ticks between training
operations.

Example:
BRC> get training_interval
TRAINING INTERVAL is 90000 ticks (15 min)

6866538D01-C 3 - 61
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET TXDC_I

Syntax:
get txdc_i
The get txdc_i command returns the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC i offset value.

Example:
BRC> get txdc_i
TXDC_I is 1

GET TXDC_Q

Syntax:
get txdc_q
The get txdc_q command returns the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> get txdc_q
TXDC_Q is 1

GET TXIQ_PH

Syntax:
get txiq_ph
The get txiq_ph command returns the value stored in RAM for the Exciter IQ phase_offset value.

Example:
BRC> get txiq_ph
Temperature corrected phase offset : 10.0 degrees.
Phase offset without correction : 10.0

3 - 62 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET TXLIN

Syntax:
get txlin [register]
The get txlin command returns the corresponding byte of the LNODCT registers (0x00 to 0x21)
as mapped into memory for LNODCT device number 1. For compatibility reasons with PR2 BR
the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin
TXLIN [0x00]: 0x68TXLIN [0x01]: 0x18TXLIN [0x02]: 0x34
TXLIN [0x03]: 0xefTXLIN [0x04]: 0xf9TXLIN [0x05]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x06]: 0x00TXLIN [0x07]: 0x00TXLIN [0x08]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x09]: 0x21TXLIN [0x0A]: 0x10TXLIN [0x0B]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x0C]: 0x00TXLIN [0x0D]: 0x00TXLIN [0x0E]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x0F]: 0x00TXLIN [0x10]: 0x00TXLIN [0x11]: 0x1b
TXLIN [0x12]: 0x28TXLIN [0x13]: 0x00TXLIN [0x14]: 0x3a
TXLIN [0x15]: 0xbbTXLIN [0x16]: 0x53TXLIN [0x17]: 0x80
TXLIN [0x18]: 0xa3TXLIN [0x19]: 0x06TXLIN [0x1A]: 0x10
TXLIN [0x1B]: 0x00TXLIN [0x1C]: 0x08TXLIN [0x1D]: 0x02
TXLIN [0x1E]: 0x0fTXLIN [0x1F]: 0xbfTXLIN [0x20]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x21]: 0x00

GET TXLIN_STAT

Syntax:
get txlin_stat
The get txlin_stat command returns the operational status of LNODCT number 1. For
compatibility reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin_stat
Checksum: 1641 (0x0669)
Test Register: 0x82
Clip Detect Bit OFF
Local Osc. Locked
I - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
Q - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
IRQ Bit not set
Over Current Detection Bit not set
Old Clip Detection Bit not set
During TX Slot Bit Set (Low Active)
Level Set: 0xbf
Sine Value: 0x89
Cosine Value: 0x00
Cir. Elim. Info: 0x0000
Offset Train. res.: 0x3f3d
LNODCT Rev. Control: 0x55

6866538D01-C 3 - 63
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET TXLIN2

Syntax:
get txlin2 [register]
The get txlin2 command returns the corresponding byte of the LNODCT registers (0x00 to 0x21)
as mapped into memory for LNODCT device number 2. For compatibility reasons with PR2 BR
the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin2
TXLIN2 [0x00]: 0x68 TXLIN2 [0x01]: 0x10 TXLIN2 [0x02]: 0x34
TXLIN2 [0x03]: 0xef TXLIN2 [0x04]: 0xf9 TXLIN2 [0x05]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x06]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x07]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x08]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x09]: 0x63 TXLIN2 [0x0A]: 0x10 TXLIN2 [0x0B]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x0C]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x0D]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x0E]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x0F]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x10]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x11]: 0x1b
TXLIN2 [0x12]: 0x28 TXLIN2 [0x13]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x14]: 0x3a
TXLIN2 [0x15]: 0xbb TXLIN2 [0x16]: 0x53 TXLIN2 [0x17]: 0x80
TXLIN2 [0x18]: 0xa3 TXLIN2 [0x19]: 0x06 TXLIN2 [0x1A]: 0x10
TXLIN2 [0x1B]: 0x38 TXLIN2 [0x1C]: 0x08 TXLIN2 [0x1D]: 0x02
TXLIN2 [0x1E]: 0x0f TXLIN2 [0x1F]: 0xbf TXLIN2 [0x20]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x21]: 0x00

GET TXLIN2_STAT

Syntax:
get txlin2_stat
The get txlin2_stat command returns the operational status of LNODCT number 2. For
compatibility reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin2_stat
Checksum: 32768 (0x8000)
Test Register: 0x80
Clip Detect Bit OFF
Local Osc. Unlocked
I - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
Q - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
IRQ Bit not set
Over Current Detection Bit not set
Old Clip Detection Bit not set
During TX Slot Bit Set (Low Active)
Level Set: 0xbf
Sine Value: 0xca
Cosine Value: 0x00
Cir. Elim. Info: 0x0000
Offset Train. res.: 0x5d26

3 - 64 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

GET TX_FREQ
Syntax:
get tx_freq
The get tx_freq command returns the programmed transmitter frequency for the current BR.

Example:
BRC> get tx_freq
TRANSMIT FREQUENCY is 937.50000MHz

GET TX_IF
Syntax:
get tx_if
The get tx_if command returns the current programmed transmit IF frequency.

Example:
BRC> get tx_if
TRANSMIT INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY is 157.30000 MHz

GET VSWR
Syntax:
get vswr
The get vswr command calculates the current VSWR, as measured by the built-in power meters
of the RF Power Amplifier module. This command should only be used when the transmitter is
keyed to obtain accurate results.

Example:
BRC> get vswr
VSWR is 1.35:1

GET WATTMETER
Syntax:
get wattmeter
The get wattmeter command returns the forward and reverse power readings and calculates the
VSWR from the external wattmeter which is connected to the antenna port. The output power
readings are calibrated and returned in Watts.
This command should only be used when the transmitter is keyed to obtain accurate results.

6866538D01-C 3 - 65
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get wattmeter
FORWARD POWER AT WATTMETER is 27.42 Watts (44.38 dBm)
REFLECTED POWER AT WATTMETER is 1.20 Watts (30.79 dBm)
WATTMETER VSWR is 1.53

HELP

Syntax:
help [commands | autocomplete]
The help command provides some information on using the BRC MMI. It provides the version
of the application running at present and help on options.
help commands displays a list of all the available MMI commands.
To get help on the ‘autocomplete’ feature type ‘help autocomplete’. The display is dependent on
the given access level. This command will return the subset of commands available for field
personnel.

Example:
BRC> help
Version : R05.x2.xx
The BRC MMI is a command line interface.
To execute a command type in the command name, any
parameters, and press return.
To recall previous commands, use the up and down cursor keys.
To get a list of commands that are available type "help
commands"
To get help on a specific command type the command followed
by "?"
There is an autocomplete facility on this MMI. For more help
on this feature.
type "help autocomplete".

Help command Syntax for System Releases prior to D5.2:

help
The help command returns all commands available for the BR software.
The display is dependent on the given access level. This command will return the subset of
commands available for field personnel.

KEY
Syntax:
key
The key command starts the RF transmission of the BR at default TX power.

3 - 66 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
After the command is entered, an indication is printed that the key-up process has started. As soon
as the transmission has started and the default TX power has been reached the command returns
the current output power.

BRC> key
WORKING...
BRC> key TRANSMITTER KEYED: 5.12 watts

KVL

Syntax:
kvl
The kvl command prepares the Base Radio Controller for communication with the Key Variable
Loader device via the front serial port. Since the front serial port is normally used by the MMI,
no MMI commands are accepted until the communication with the Key Variable Loader device
has been terminated or the indicated timeout has been reached.
The success of this operation is indacted at the Key Variable Loader device only. BRC will return
to MMI mode and prompt user for new command.

Example:
BRC> kvl
KVLreset
BRC> session started. You have 60 seconds to connect your
KVL to the serial front port and to do the transfer.
____________________________________________________________
Dimetra Base Radio Controller

RESET

Syntax:
reset
The reset command performs a software reset of the BR. All parameters entered from the service
computer will be lost.

6866538D01-C 3 - 67
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> reset
__________________________________________________________

Dimetra Base Radio Controller

Bootloader Version R01.01.00-BL
Motorola Inc. Copyright (c) 2001, 2002
__________________________________________________________
ROM Image 1 valid, internal version is 0x0000000A
ROM Image 2 valid, internal version is 0x00000009
Starting Image 1

RAM Test: .... passed

Base Radio Controller

Version R07.0404
Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
2000, 2001, 2002
Motorola Inc. All rights reserved.
Ethernet Test: passed
Running from boot code area

Board configuration: 50MHz / 32MByte

To enter configuration mode, hit any key within 10 seconds:
Starting BRC registration
Waiting for Registration

SET ALARM_MASK

Syntax:
set alarm_mask byte data
The set alarm_mask command enables/disables alarms from being acknowledged by the BR.
The input parameters are the byte number (decimal value 0 to 15) and the data (or mask) (hex
value 0x00 to 0xff).

Example:
BRC> set alarm_mask 1 ff
SETTING ALARM MASK: BYTE 1 MASK-VALUE 0xFF
ALARM MASK is set in RAM and EEPROM

3 - 68 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

SET ALARM_REPORTS

Syntax:
set alarm_reports {on | off}
The set alarm_reports command enables/disables asynchronous alarm reporting. Alarms are not
reported to the local terminal if they occur when the alarm reports are disabled.

Example:
BRC>set alarm_reports on
ALARM REPORTS : ENABLED

SET BRC_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set brc_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set brc_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch
pad of the BRC. This space is overwritten whenever the set brc_scratch command is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set brc_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set BRC SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

SET CABINET

Syntax:
set cabinet {1 | 2 | 3| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8}
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
set cabinet parameter must only be set to “1”.
The set cabinet command sets the cabinet number of the BR.

ncorrectly setting these parameters on a remote session may result in a site visit.

6866538D01-C 3 - 69
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:

BRC> set cabinet 1

set CABINET to 1 in RAM and EEPROM

SET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set exciter_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
The set exciter_scaling_factor command changes the multiplier on the corresponding Exciter
module A/D port ( 0 to 11).

The scaling factor values should not be changed; they are set during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> set exciter_scaling_factor 1 1
set EXCITER SCALING FACTOR 1 to 1 in RAM

SET EX_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set ex_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set ex_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad
of the Exciter module. This space is overwritten whenever the set ex_scratch command is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set ex_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set EXCITER SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

SET EX_THRESHOLD

Syntax:
set ex_threshold
The set ex_threshold command updates the value stored in RAM and in the Exciter's EEPROM

3 - 70 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> set ex_threshold 16 40
The thresholds for register 01 of fwd LNODCT are set to:
Threshold Low: 16.0W
Threshold High: 40.0W

SET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor {1.0 .. 1000.0}
The set fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor command changes the linear multiplier used to derive
the forward power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> set fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor 52.00
set FORWARD POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR to 52.00 in RAM

SET K_FACTOR

Syntax:
set k_factor k_factor
The set k_factor command forces the TX Digital Signal Processor (DSP) K-factor. The K-factor
(range -.99 to .99) changes average power.

Example:
BRCBRC> set k_factor 0.6
K_FACTOR: 0.59999990

SET MAX_VSWR

Syntax:
set max_vswr {1.1 .. 4.0}
The set max_vswr command sets the maximum VSWR for the internal BR power monitor. The
power is rolled back if this value is reached. (The Base Radio may shut down if the excessive
VSWR condition still exists after power roll-back).

Example:
BRC> set max_vswr 4
set MAX VSWR to 4 in RAM

6866538D01-C 3 - 71
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR

Syntax:
set max_wattmeter_vswr {1.1 .. 4.0}
The set max_wattmeter_vswr command sets the maximum VSWR for the external wattmeter
located in the RFDS, if applicable. The power is rolled back if this value is reached. (The Base
Radio may shut down if the excessive VSWR condition still exists after power roll-back.)

Example:
BRC>set max_wattmeter_vswr 4.0
set MAX WATTMETER VSWR to 4 in RAM

On Dimetra IP all BR’s on the site may be shut down. Determine the cause of the alarm and re-
enable the site using the brlock command, refer to page 3-16.

SET PA_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set pa_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
The set pa_scaling_factor command changes the multiplier on the corresponding Power
Amplifier module A/D port ( 0 to 11).
The scaling factor values should not be changed; they are set during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> set pa_scaling_factor 1 1
set POWER AMPLIFIER SCALING FACTOR 1 to 1.000000 in RAM

SET PA_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set pa_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set pa_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad
of the Power Amplifier module. This space is overwritten whenever the set pa_scratch command
is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set pa_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set PA SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

3 - 72 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

SET PCTRL

Syntax:
set pctrl {on | off}
The set pctrl command enables/disables the power leveling functionality of the BR. The output
indicates and verifies the changes.

Example:
BRC> set pctrl on
set POWER CONTROL to ENABLED in RAM

SET POSITION

Syntax:
set position {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6}
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set position command programs the position number of where the current BR is mounted
within a selected cabinet. This does not represent the cabinet in which the BR resides.

Incorrectly setting these parameters on a remote session may result in a site visit.

Example:

BRC> set position 2

set POSITION to 2 in RAM and EEPROM

SET REAR_SERIAL

Syntax:
set rear_serial {autotune | diagnostic}
The set rear_serial command switches the rear serial port to either Autotune Mode, where it
communicates with the Autotuner at 9600 baud, or diagnostics mode where it outputs diagnostic
information from the DSP at 115200 baud.

Works only with APP software.

6866538D01-C 3 - 73
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> rear_serial autotune
Rear serial port in Autotune mode
BRC> rear_serial diagnostic
Rear serial port in Diagnostic mode

SET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor {1.0 .. 1000.0}
The set ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor command changes the linear multiplier used to derive the
reflected power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> set ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor 19
set REFLECTED POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR to 19.00 in RAM

SET RX(n)_DELTA

Syntax:
set rx1_delta {>-100.0 .. +100.0 dBm}
set rx2_delta {>-100.0 .. +100.0 dBm}
set rx3_delta {>-100.0 .. +100.0 dBm}
The set rx(n)_delta command defines the contents of the RSSI offset value for a selected receiver
in dBm.

Example:
BRC> set rx1_delta 0.98
set RECEIVER 1 RECEIVE SIGNAL STRENGTH DELTA to 0.98 in RAM

SET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set rx1_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
set rx2_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
set rx3_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
The set rx(n)_scaling_factor command changes the value of the multiplier on the specified A/D
port ( 0 to 11) for a selected receiver.

3 - 74 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

The scaling_factor values should not be changed; they are set during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> set rx1_scaling_factor 1 2
set RECEIVER 1 SCALING FACTOR 1 to 2.0 in RAM

SET RX(n)_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set rx(n)_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set rx(n)_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch
pad of a selected Receiver module. This space is overwritten whenever the rx(n)_scratch
command is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set rx1_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set RECEIVER 1 SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

SET RX_FREQ

Syntax:
set rx_freq {917.000 .. 927.000}
The set rx_freq command programs the receiver frequency in the 917 - 927 MHz band. The
receive frequency for each receiver within a selected BR are programmed at the same time with
this command.
The programmed receiver frequency must be in the range of 917.000 MHz to 927.000 MHz in
6.25 kHz increments.

Example:
BRC>set rx_freq 922.500
set RECEIVE FREQUENCY to 922.500 MHz in RAM

6866538D01-C 3 - 75
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Within the RF subsystem of the Dimetra EBTS, several variations of a given Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) or assembly may exist in which each variation corresponds to a specific frequency
range. Any receive or transmit frequencies assigned to a Base Radio via a command must
conform to any existing hardware constraints.

SET RX_FRU_CONFIG

Syntax:
set rx_fru_config {1 | 2 | 3 | 12 | 13 | 23 | 123}
The set rx_fru_config command sets which receivers should be present in a Base Radio.

Example:
BRC>set rx_fru_config 1
RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 }

BRC>set rx_fru_config 12
RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 RX2 }

BRC>set rx_fru_config 123

RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 RX2 RX3 }

SET RX_INJ

Syntax:
set rx_inj {high | low}
The set rx_inj command sets the current second Local Oscillator (LO) injection setting to achieve
high/low side injection.

Example:
BRC> set rx_inj low
set RECEIVER INJECTION to LOW in RAM

SET RX_MODE

Syntax:
set rx_mode {1 | 2 | 3 | 12 | 13 | 23 | 123}
The set rx_mode command enables any combination of the individual receivers of the current
BR.
If a receiver is not enabled (i.e., disabled) using this command, it is not used in calculations for
BER, RSSI, etc.

3 - 76 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC>set rx_mode 12
set RECEIVER 1 to ENABLED in RAM
set RECEIVER 2 to ENABLED in RAM

SET RX_QSIGN

Syntax:
set rx_qsign {inverted | non-inverted}
The set rx_qsign command sets the Rx q_sign to inverted or non-inverted.

Example:
BRC> set rx_qsign non-inverted
set RECEIVER Q SIGN to NON-INVERTED in RAM

SET SYS_GAIN

Syntax:
set sys_gain {on|off}
The set sgc_gain command enables/disables the system gain factor from being used.

Example:
BRC> set sys_gain on
set SOFTWARE GAIN to ENABLED in RAM

SET TETRA_FORMAT

Syntax:
set tetra_format MCC MNC CC downlink uplink trigger ms_pwr acc_prm

Table 3-1 Set TETRA_Format

Variable (Definition) Setting

MCC (mobile country code) default= 0

MNC (mobile network code) default= 0

6866538D01-C 3 - 77
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Table 3-1 Set TETRA_Format (continued)

Variable (Definition) Setting

CC (colour code) 1 to 63; default= 1

(In the Anritsu 3660 generator, the two least significant bits should
always be 1
Example:
cc=1 => Anritsu cc = 7
cc=3 => Anritsu cc = F)

downlink = 1 (TCH 7.2) (default; also used for reception of

channel type 9 (STCH))
= 4 (TCH 2.4)
= 31 (non-scrambled TCH 7.2 (Anritsu cc= 0))

uplink = 7 (TCH 7.2) (default)

= 8 (SCH/F)
= 10 (TCH 2.4)
= 11 (SCH/HU+SCH/HU)
= 31 (non-scrambled TCH 7.2 (Anritsu cc= 0))

trigger = off – no trigger (default)

= slot – triggers every slot

= mframe – triggers at start of frame 1 of each 18 frames.

(This trigger is specifically designed for the
Anritsu 3660 TETRA generator.)

= frame – triggers at start of frame 1 of each frame

(actual timing includes a 64-symbol pretrigger)
mobile power = 001 15 dBm default (will default to 15 dBm if this field is omitted)

access parameter = 0000 -53 dBm default (will default to -53 dBm if this field is omitted)

The set tetra_format command sets the tetra format of the BR signalling.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> set tetra_format 0 0 1 1 7 mframe
MCC : 0
MNC : 0
CC : 1
Downlink Type : 1
Uplink Type : 7
Trigger : mframe
MS Power: 15 dBm
ACC param: -53 dBm

SET TONE

Syntax:

3 - 78 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

set tone {-18000 .. 18000}

This command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into a dummy load.
The set tone command initialises transmission of a continuous single tone specified in Hertz. The
only way to discontinue this feature is via the dekey command.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> set tone 1000
BRC> set tone 1000
set TONE to 1000.000000 in RAM
set TONE to 1000.000000 in RAM

SET TRACES_OFF
Syntax:
set traces_off
Turns off all active report traces. This includes alarm reports and any other traces that may be
enabled

Example:
In the example, alarm reports has been enabled and then disabled with set traces_off.

BRC> set alarm_reports on

ALARM REPORTS: ENABLED to LOCAL MMI
BRC> set traces_off
Alarm Reports is DISABLED to Local MMI

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

SET TRAINING_INTERVAL

Syntax:
set training_interval num_of_ticks
The set training_interval command sets the period between tranlin training cycles.

Example:
BRC> set training_interval 30000
set TRAINING INTERVAL to 30000 in RAM

6866538D01-C 3 - 79
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET TXDC_I

Syntax:
set txdc_i offset
The set txdc_i command updates the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC i offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_i 0
set TXDC_I to 0

SET TXDC_I_FINAL

Syntax:
set txdc_i_final offset
The set txdc_i_final command updates the value stored in RAM and in the exciter’s EEPROM
for the LNODCT DC i offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_i_final 1
I CHANNEL DC OFFSET is set in exciter board’s EEPROM.
set TXDC_I to 1

SET TXDC_Q

Syntax:
set txdc_q offset
The set txdc_q command updates the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_q 0
set TXDC_Q to 0

3 - 80 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

SET TXDC_Q_FINAL

Syntax:
set txdc_q_final offset
The set txdc_q_final command updates the value stored in RAM and in the exciter’s EEPROM
for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_q_final 1
Q CHANNEL DC OFFSET is set in exciter board’s EEPROM.
set TXDC_Q to 1

SET TXLIN

Syntax:
set txlin register hex_byte
The set txlin command writes one specific hexadecimal byte ( 0x00 to 0x21) to the specified
LNODCT register ( 0x00 to 0x21) and updates the codeplug shadow registers. For compatibility
reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> set txlin 1 08
set TXLIN 0x01 to 0x08 in RAM

SET TXLIN2

Syntax:
set txlin2 register hex_byte
The set txlin2 command writes one specific hexadecimal byte ( 0x00 to 0x21) to the specified
LNODCT register (0x00 to 0x21) and updates the codeplug shadow registers. For compatibility
reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> set txlin 1 08
set TXLIN 0x01 to 0x08 in RAM
bfxbxbvxbvxbv

6866538D01-C 3 - 81
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET TX_FREQ

Syntax:
set tx_freq {932.000 .. 942.000}
The set tx_freq command programs the transmit frequency in the 932 - 942 MHz band. When
this command is entered, the transmitter frequency is programmed into the BRC.
The programmed transmitter frequency must be in the range of 932.000 MHz to 942.000 MHz in
6.25 kHz increments.

Example:
BRC>set tx_freq 932.000
set TRANSMIT FREQUENCY to 932.000 MHz in RAM

Within the RF subsystem of the Dimetra EBTS, several variations of a given Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) or assembly may exist in which each variation corresponds to a specific frequency
range. Any receive or transmit frequencies assigned to a Base Radio via a command must
conform to any existing hardware constraints.

SET TX_IF

Syntax:
set tx_if freq
The set tx_if command sets the transmitter IF frequency in MHz.

Example:

BRC> set tx_if 157.3

set TRANSMIT INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY to 157.30000 MHz in RAM

SET TXIQ_PH

Syntax:
set txiq_ph phase_offset
The set txiq_ph command updates the value stored in RAM for the Exciter IQ phase_offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txiq_ph 10
PA Heatsink temperature: 30.27 --> txiq phase correction =
0.00
Temperature corrected phase offset : 10.0 degrees.
Phase offset without correction : 10.0

3 - 82 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

SET TXIQ_PH_FINAL

Syntax:
set txiq_ph_final phase_offset
The set txiq_ph_final command updates the value stored in RAM and in the Exciter’s EEPROM
for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txiq_ph_final 10
PA Heatsink temperature: 30.27 --> txiq phase correction =
0.00
TXIQ PHASE FACTOR is set in exciter board's EEPROM.
Temperature corrected phase offset : 10.0 degrees.
Phase offset without correction : 10.0

SET TX_TEST_MODE

Syntax:
set tx_test_mode {T1 | T2 | uplink | tones | exit | stop}
The set tx_mode command sets the transmit mode.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> set tx_mode T1
Current tx test mode is T1 test signal.

SET TX_POWER

Syntax:
set tx_power power
This command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into a dummy load.
The set tx_power command keys the transmitter to a specified power (in Watts) without altering
any programmed parameters.
In test mode, the current setting of default transmit mode (default_tx_mode) indicates the mode
of the transmitter.

6866538D01-C 3 - 83
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
A message is returned indicating transmitter activity.

BRC> set tx_power 40

WORKING...
TRANSMITTER KEYED: 40.12 watts

BRC>

STATISTICS
Syntax:
statistics {frag | ula} {slot}
The statistics command returns staistic on received packets.

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
a) Querying fragmentation statistics on slot1.
BRC> statistics frag 1
fragmentation statistics:
received MAC PDUs : 66
clear MAC PDUs : 66
decrypted MAC PDUs : 0
encrypted MAC PDUs buffered : 0
buffered MAC PDUs decrypted : 0
max pending encrypted MAC PDUs : 0
timedout MAC PDUs: : 0
received TMA/TLA indications : 61
unfragmented : 55
started fragmentations : 6
processed TMA/TLA indications : 61
valid : 33
invalid : 27
aborted : 1
timedout : 0

3 - 84 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Interface Commands

b) Querying uplink statistics on slot1.

BRC> statistics ula 1
uplink statistics:
TMV:
total number of indications : 282
indications with low RSSI : 0
indications with CRC fail : 266
TLD:
encrypted TLD indications : 0
failed TLD IND decryptions : 0
TMA/TLA:
total number of MAC PDUs : 16
MAC ACCESS/ MAC DATA : 16
MAC FRAG : 0
MAC_END/ MAC END HU : 0
NULL PDU : 0
BAD PDU : 0
failed late decryptions : 0
missing EL-SSI assignments : 0

VER

Syntax:
ver
The ver command returns the current version of the BR software.

Example:
BRC>ver
BRC SOFTWARE VERSION is RXX.XX.XX

6866538D01-C 3 - 85
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

3 - 86 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 4

4EBTS Site Preparation and

Hardware Installation

Site Preparation

Site Planning
Proper planning helps to prevent potential on-site and off-site interference from other RF systems,
and helps maximise system performance. Site layouts should always be planned to minimise the
cabling lengths between RF equipment.
For full instructions and guidelines please refer to Motorola Standards and Guidelines for
Communications Sites, R56, Document number 68P81089E50.

EBTS Site Survey

The site must be carefully inspected or surveyed using appropriate site survey forms before orders
are placed for the equipment.
A technical representative from both the customer and the site owner should preferably be in
attendance for total concurrence at a single given time.
In order to minimise any misunderstanding which may arise in the future, the survey report must
be countersigned by all attendees at the site survey. The site survey should address all relevant
issues involving the EBTS site installation. All involved parties should be in agreement on all of
the issues before any work commences. The site survey issues are as follows:
• The potential location of the EBTS Cabinet, size of the equipment room, and the doorway
or access into it. Access around EBTS shall include adequate clearance for cabinet front
door opening.
• Verifying the suitability of the existing or proposed Heating-Ventilation-Air Conditioning
(HVAC) and other environmental criteria in relation to the EBTS equipment. (See
“Environmental Considerations” paragraph and Table 4-2, “Typical Power Loads and
Heat Dissipation Values” later in this chapter.)
• The potential location of the power supply equipment.
• The power requirements for the site.
• A check of the history of local voltage and frequency variations together with the
possibility of interruptions of the supply to the site.
• The standby power requirements for the site.
• The location of the mains power distribution.

6866538D01-C 4-1
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

• The location of the Network Terminating Unit (NTU) for the X.21 or E1 leased line.
• The location of telephone and modem connections.
• The location of the building earth and the tower earth.
• Inspection/test of the building and tower earth.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the cable entry point into the equipment
room.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the existing overhead cable tray or ladder
rack.
• The suitability and location of the existing lightning arrestors.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the existing cable tray or ladder rack
between the equipment room and the antenna tower or the antenna system support
structure.
• The space allocated on the tower for the antennas.
• Measurement or length estimation of all cable runs.
• Checking the access route into the equipment room.
• Identifying the type of tower and the type of structure on which the antennas will be
mounted.
• Checking the access route to the site.
• Identifying any special conditions. For example:
• Access impossible in winter
• Access only with a security escort
• Access only by helicopter or all-terrain vehicle
• Identifying the site and equipment room key holder and the procedure to obtain the keys.
• Surveying the route the equipment will need to be taken between the closest point its
delivery truck can reach and its final position in the equipment room.
• Identifying any civil works or changes required to the existing equipment room or the
access to it.
• Identifying any Civil Works or changes required to the existing tower or antenna mounting
structure or the access to it.
• Checking that the working light levels in the equipment room required during the
installation and commissioning are adequate for the equipment, its cabling, and wiring to
be installed and tested.

350 - 500 Lux is the level required in an office environment. If the light level is inadequate, allow
for temporary lighting to be available during the installation and commissioning of the
equipment.

• Establishing any special working conditions. For example:

• Only out of hours working permitted.
• Only 8 daylight hours working permitted.
• Site escort only permitted to work restricted hours.
• Special working conditions or designated holidays which are restricted by local
regulations or statute.
• Verifying that the floor can sustain the weight of the EBTS site equipment.

4-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Site Considerations
The EBTS site building should not contain windows and must be able to resist extreme weather
conditions. It should be designed to meet the requirements of any and all local building codes,
and relevant regulations, applicable to the site location.
The DC Power supply for the EBTS has to be installed in the same building.

Motorola recommends the following considerations when selecting a site:

• For front access only stations allow a minimum of 80 cm for access.
• The minimum ceiling height of 2.4 m (7’11”) above a finished floor is required to allow
enough space for the height of the equipment cabinet and cable access at the top of the
cabinet.
• The ceiling structure should be able to support a cable tray assembly for routing the inter-
cabinet cabling and other site cabling. The cable tray assembly is mounted to the site
ceiling and walls per site plan and should be at least 2.2 m (7’3”) from the site floor to
allow for the height of the equipment cabinet.
• The door dimensions should be at least 91 cm (3’) wide and 2 m (6’8”) high.
• All exterior doors should have tamper proof locks installed for security purposes.
• The operating range of the EBTS is -20 °C to +55 °C and therefore the site interior
temperature must be maintained within these limits. Maintaining a stable, moderate site
temperature is the best approach for long term reliability of the equipment. The equipment
is not approved or intended for outdoor use.
• Proper surge protection is required for all antennas and power inputs to prevent potential
damage to the site equipment.
• The site floor should be true to within 3.2 mm (1/8”) of any equipment footprint and be
able to support the weight of the site equipment. Refer to the floor loading information
provided in this chapter.

Cabinets

Cabinet Dimensions
The Equipment Cabinet dimensions are as follows:
• Width: 60 cm (23.6”)
• Depth: 60 cm (23.6”)
• Height: 1.845 m (72.64”)

6866538D01-C 4-3
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Cabinet Footprint
The equipment cabinet has a footprint as shown in Figure 4-1.

/3 m

55.4 cm (21 13/16")

)
2"
27 c

60 cm (23 5/8")
0 .3
(3 78

M12 (1/2") Anchoring Bolts

typ. (4)

55.4 cm (21 13/16")

2.3 cm (29/32")
60 cm (23 5/8")

TEBTS025
011900JNM

Figure 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Footprint

The equipment cabinet may be installed against adjacent equipment. Figure 4-2 shows the cabinet
layout within a typical site, cabinets 2 and 3 are optional. At least 0.6 m (2’) of free space is
required in front of the cabinet and at least 15 cm (6”) of free space is required behind. Additional
free space is recommended at the back of the cabinet to greatly ease the removal and replacement
of FRUs. Additional free space is also recommended at the front of the cabinet to allow service
personnel easy access to the equipment.

Where there is no possibility to reach connectors at the rear of FRU's, it is possible to remove all
FRU's from the front of the EBTS by pulling the FRU sufficiently forward (after loosening the
retaining screws) to be able to grasp the connectors. In these cases it necessary to support the FRU
while the connectors are tagged and loosened.
The following units have to be removed in pairs:
• Combiner I and II

4-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

HVAC
Optional
0.91m(3')

Service Area 0.80m(2.6')

Power 1.55m(5')
Batteries Supply Cabinet

HVAC
Cabinet Equipment 0.60m(2')

Service Area 15cm(0.5')

Note: Double lines on above units indicate front of equipment.

TEBTS003
101701LHE

Figure 4-2 Typical EBTS Site Layout

Cabinet Floor Loading

Table 4-1 lists typical weight and floor loading information for various configurations of the
Equipment Cabinet.

Table 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading

Weight Floor Loading

Configuration
kg (lbs) kg/m2

4-Channel Cavity Combining RFDS

1 BR 158 (347) 425

2 BRs 195 (428 530
3 BRs 243 (533) 670
4 BRs 277 (607) 800
1. Weight and loading data above assumes the following:
A. Double Site Controller installed
B. Double diversity installed
2. The information in this table is typical and is not a guaranteed specification.

6866538D01-C 4-5
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Special Considerations

Breaker Panel Access

Adhere to local electrical codes and regulations regarding clearance for electrical service access
to all fuse panels, breaker panels, etc. Typically, a minimum clearance of 91 cm (36”) is
recommended. Additionally, all doors to this equipment should be able to open to at least 90°.

Hazardous Materials and Equipment

Compliance with all local and any other regulations concerning the handling and use of hazardous
materials and equipment is the sole responsibility of the customer and associated agents.

Seismic Active Areas

EBTS sites that are in seismic active areas may require additional bracing of the equipment
cabinet. This manual does not contain specific procedures related to seismic bracing.

X.21 Facility Interface

Surge Arrestor
Per any local regulations, a surge arrestor may be required at the X.21 service entrance. The
arrestor should be designed for operation with a X.21 circuit. The arrestor typically is only
installed on the customer side of the X.21 service entrance. It should be wired per manufacturer
instructions.

Service Entrance
A rigid conduit sleeve must be installed to provide the service entrance into the site building. The
conduit should be about 5 cm (2”) in diameter and a PVC elbow should be attached (pointing
down) on the outside end of the conduit. The conduit must be grounded in accordance with the
Motorola Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56, 68P81089E50.

Site Utilities Backboard

A standard receptacle outlet should be installed on or adjacent to the backboard. This outlet can
be used for accessories, such as modems and other AC powered devices. This may also be used
as a general service outlet.

E1 Facility Interface

Surge Arrestor
A surge arrestor must be installed at the E1 service entrance. The arrestor must be designed for
operation with an E1 telephone circuit. The arrestor must only be installed on the customer side
of the E1 service entrance. It should be wired per manufacturer instructions.

4-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Service Entrance
A rigid conduit sleeve must be installed to provide the service entrance into the site building. The
conduit should be about 5 cm in diameter and a PVC elbow should be attached (pointing down)
on the outside end of the conduit. The conduit must be grounded in accordance with the Motorola
Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56.

Site Utilities Backboard

A wall mounted AC grade fire-rated plywood backboard (12.7 mm x 122 cm x 122 cm) must be
provided within the site. Reserve a two-square-foot area on the backboard for dedicated system
use.
An approved AC mains receptacle outlet should be installed on or adjacent to the backboard. This
outlet can be used for accessories, such as modems and other AC powered devices. It may also be
used as a general service outlet.

Environmental Considerations

Temperature Control
The environment in which the EBTS operates is an important consideration. The temperature
should be regulated to ensure trouble-free operation. Excessive temperatures result in generated
heat that may reduce the life-span of electronic equipment, and could cause permanent damage.
To combat temperature problems, a Heating-Ventilation-Air Conditioning (HVAC) system may
need to be used. All HVAC systems should be thermostatically controlled. The specified
operating temperature range for the EBTS equipment is -20 °C to +55 °C. Optimum equipment
operation occurs when the internal temperature of the EBTS site is maintained at 26 °C ±5.5 °C
(78 °F ±10 °F). The environmental equipment must be rated such that it is able to maintain the
environment to meet the equipment heat dissipation values, which are given in kilowatt-hours
(kWh). Refer to Table 4-2 for additional heat dissipation information.
The EBTS equipment operates on a -48 VDC (positive ground) power system which typically
includes batteries. Should AC power be lost, the DC power system continues to supply the EBTS
equipment with the necessary power. Because the EBTS remains operational during loss of AC
power, heat is still generated by the equipment. Unless the site HVAC is on a backup system, the
generated heat will effect the operation of the EBTS equipment. As a protection mechanism,
output power of the BRs is designed to decrease in the event that normal ambient temperature is
exceeded.
For sites containing more than one-hour battery backup, the effect of generated heat should be
considered. The HVAC system design should be evaluated to ensure the proper operating
environment is maintained during loss of the AC power.

Redundant HVAC Systems

A redundant HVAC system may be installed, if necessary. It must be wired on a delayed circuit
to prevent both HVAC systems from starting up simultaneously. The HVAC system should be
capable of automatically switching between the heating and cooling modes in response to the
thermostat. The controls must ensure that both modes never operate simultaneously.

6866538D01-C 4-7
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Existing HVAC Systems

Existing building HVAC systems may be programmed to turn off during non-occupied hours.
This type of HVAC system must be evaluated to ensure that the site temperature is maintained.

Humidity
At 35 °C (95 °F), the relative humidity within the site should be less than 75% non-condensing.
If the operating environment is subjected to large variations in humidity then special
considerations has to be made if the system contains cavity combiners. The auto tune cavity
combiner has a build in fine tune time out feature to compensate for humidity drift. Please refer
to Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)” for the full explanation of this feature.

Corrosive Environments
The equipment should not be directly exposed to corrosive environments. If the equipment site is
located in a coastal environment, proper air filtration for the site should be in place to protect the
equipment from salt mist contamination.

Air Quality
For cabinet-mounted equipment operating in an area which is not environmentally controlled, the
airborne particulates level must not exceed 90 µg/m3.

Electrical Requirements
All electrical wiring for the EBTS site must meet the requirements of any and all applicable local
codes and regulations.

Any device (i.e., power supply) providing isolation between the AC mains and the EBTSs must
provide reinforced insulation to hazardous voltages. the dc power source providing power to the
EBTSs shall comply with requirements specified for a safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV) per
EN60950, 1995.

Applicable Codes and Practices

The following list of codes and practices shall be adhered to when performing the installation:
• UK RPSG Installation Manual, System Quality Standard, specification number 2200, part
no. 68P02200F01.
• UK Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) 16th edition of their Wiring Regulations
(Appendix 12, “Cable Capacities of Conduit and Trunking”).
• Antenna System Installation Practice, issued by The Directorate of Telecommunications
of the UK Home Office.
• Details of Earthing Requirements for Masts, Aerial Feeder Cables and Radio Equipment
Rooms, issued by The Directorate of Telecommunications of the UK Home Office.

4-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

AC Service and Power Supplies

Service Current Rating

The input current rating of the DC power supply equipment shall be considered when selecting
the AC main service. When the facility HVAC is powered from the same panel or sub-panel as
the DC power supply equipment, the total draw (including start-up current) shall also be
accordingly considered.
The DC power system has normal loads and start-up loads, as does the HVAC. Both of these loads
are dependent upon the number of Base Radios in the site and the size and condition of the battery
system. The normal load of a typical power system is provided in Table 4-2 for several common
EBTS configurations using a two hour backup. These loads may differ for customer designed
power systems.

Table 4-2 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values

Configuration (Total BRs on Site +Single

DC Load (kW) Heat (kWh)
Site Controller, RFDS, EAS)

2 Base Radios 1.0 0.95

3 Base Radios 1.4 1.35
4 Base Radios 1.8 1.7
The values contained in this table are to used for planning purposes only. These
values are typical and are not guaranteed equipment specifications.
† kWh values listed in the Heat column are approximate and based on nominal AC
Amps. Includes the heat generated by rectifiers and EBTS equipment.

EBTS DC Current Load

Table 4-3 lists typical power consumption values for various components within the EBTS.

The Base Radio current draw value given below is the steady-state value at full BR transmit
power. Instantaneous start-up current draw can be as high as 230 A, exponentially decaying to
25 A after 10 msec, and then stabilising at the rated current. This dynamic needs to be considered
when selecting a DC power system.

6866538D01-C 4-9
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Table 4-3 Typical Power Consumption of EBTS Components

Component Power Consumption

Base Radio 25 W 8.5 A @ -48 VDC

15 W 5.8 A @ -48 VDC
Site Controller 0.6 A @ -48 VDC
Environmental Alarm System 0.3 A @ -48 VDC
Receiver Multicoupler 0.5 A @ -48 VDC
Auto Tune Combiner Motor on 0.4 A @ -48 VDC
Motor off 0.2 A @ -48 VDC
The values contained in this table are to used for planning purposes only. These
values are typical and are not guaranteed equipment specifications.

Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch

Some sites may contain permanently installed emergency generators, however, most
telecommunications sites are equipped with connections for portable generators. Sites with
permanently installed generators usually have an automatic transfer switch used to transfer the
AC service from the utility power to the generator after the generator has started. Sites with
connections for a portable generator require a manual transfer switch and external connector.
Generators and transfer switches must be capable of supporting the maximum load for the
customer defined service area of the generator. Start-up loads that include the HVAC and rectifiers
must also be taken into consideration when selecting a generator size.
The EBTS site contains an Environmental Alarm System (EAS) that has five assignable dry
contact closures and multiple customer defined inputs. Permanent generator operation may be
monitored by one or more of these inputs, if desired.

Surge Arrestors
Per local regulations, a surge arrestor may be required adjacent to the AC power panel. Very short
wire lengths between the arrestor to the power panel are typically required for proper operation.
For sites using a transfer switch, the arrestor should be installed on the panel side of the transfer
switch. Additional arrestors may also be installed at the customer’s option on the line or generator
side of the switch.

Power Panel
Motorola recommends that all EBTS sites use a standardised power panel including circuit
breaker layout. Vacant space should be left to allow for future requirements.

4 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

– 48 VDC Power System

The EBTS equipment operates on a DC power system that typically includes a -48 VDC battery
system. A readily accessible power disconnect device (e.g., circuit breaker) for the EBTS should
be incorporated into the fixed wiring.
To protect against excessive current, short circuits and earth faults in the -48 VDC power source,
protective devices shall be included as part of the installation. The installation shall meet the
requirements of any and all applicable local codes and regulations.

DC Power Reference
The EBTS equipment operates from positive ground, 48 VDC power. Reference is made
throughout this manual to the -48 VDC and the DC return power leads. The -48 VDC and return
leads are kept isolated from chassis grounds in the equipment.
The positive (+) return lead is grounded at a single point on the rectifier load return bus. Table 4-4
shows the typical colour coding for these wires.

Table 4-4 -48 VDC Power Bus Colour Coding

Description Battery Connection Wire Colour

-48 VDC (nominal) Negative (-) Blue

DC Return Positive (+) Black
The -48 VDC side is negative polarity (-) in the 48 VDC system power bus and
the ground side is positive polarity (+).

Grounding Requirements

The methods and standards cited in the following paragraphs are typical. Local codes, statutes,
regulations, and/or standards shall supersede any information provided herein, as applicable.

Where wire size is specified, the next-larger size wire shall be used where specified wire size is
not available.

The EBTS site must meet certain specifications for adequate protection from lightning induced
transients. Proper ground installation methods are outlined in the Motorola Standards and
Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56. Refer to Quality Standards in Chapter 1 - Manual
Overview for information on obtaining the R56 manual. The references cited earlier in this
chapter shall also be followed.

Tower Grounding
Ground each leg of the antenna tower with a 2.44 m (8’) minimum-length ground rod driven near
each leg. All ground connections to the antenna tower must be exothermically welded. Do not

6866538D01-C 4 - 11
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

weld directly on tower structural members; weld only to provided tower grounding tabs or to
tower feet.

Make sure that welding ground connections to the antenna tower does not void the warranty of
the tower.

Metal monopole towers require a minimum of three 2.44 m (8’) long ground rods to be driven
into the ground, spaced approximately 3 m (10’) apart. These ground rods may be exothermically
welded to the bottom portion of the mast itself, to the monopole footing, or to the provided
grounding connection tabs.

Site Building and Equipment Grounding

At stand-alone site buildings, a PVC (typically 20 mm (3/4”), or equivalent) conduit must be
provided for the interior ground wire to exit the building. For site buildings with floors at ground
level, the conduit must exit a side wall at a 45° angle or less. For buildings with space below the
floors for a ground connection, the conduit may exit through the floor. In both cases, the location
of the opening should be close to the master ground bar inside the building.
Use of metal conduit is discouraged as the conduit provides inductance to a surge, raising the
impedance of the ground. If metal conduit is required by local building codes, both ends of the
conduit must be bonded to the ground wire through the use of grounding clips or other suitable
means to eliminate the inductance of the conduit.

Cabinet Grounding
Within the EBTS site, ground the cabinets with a single dedicated connection between the cabinet
and the site safety grounding system. The EBTS equipment cabinet utilises a Rack Ground Bus
bar (junction panel) to which the cabinet common ground connection to site safety grounding
system is made. The minimum connecting wire size must be at least 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG)
insulated copper wire. Typically, this wire shall use green (with yellow bands) coloured
insulation.
Use two-hole mounting lugs (and split ring lock washers when possible) with an anti-oxidant
grease applied for interior grounding connections and exterior secondary grounding connections.
If lock washers are used, they should be placed between the nut and the lug to ensure the
mechanical integrity of the connection. The washer must not be secured between the lug and the
surface to which it is connected. Painted connections must be scraped clean before applying the
anti-oxidant grease and lug.

Never use a bare or damaged wire for the connection of chassis ground or other electrical wiring.
damage to equipment or potential injury to personnel could result.

The equipment cabinet frame must be connected to the site ground using a single dedicated
ground wire.

The site ground wire should drop into the top of the cabinet and be connected to a single
designated grounding stud. Single hole lugs (13 mm (1/2”) diameter) are used for these grounding
connections.

4 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The EBTS equipment cabinet is classified as a surge producer due to external coaxial cable
connections. Surges from outside the site can enter the site grounding system via the coaxial
cables. To prevent damage to the equipment, the cabinet must be connected to chassis ground
through a minimum wire size of at least 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG). Green (or green-yellow)
insulated wire must be used to identify all ground wiring.

Cable Tray Grounding

The cable tray assembly must be designed and installed so that it does not come into contact with
metal conduits, pipes, or other metal objects. The cable tray assembly must also be connected to
the building earth through the use of a single dedicated wire. The connecting wire shall be a
minimum size of 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG) green (or green-yellow) insulated copper wire.
Any metal-to-metal joints on the cable tray assembly must be bonded together with a wire jumper
to prevent electrical discontinuity, unless the tray connectors are specifically designed to ensure
continuity. Painted surfaces on the cable tray assembly must be scraped clean at the point where
the jumper wire is attached to ensure a good electrical connection. Repaint cable tray assembly
surfaces, if necessary.

Electrical System Grounding

The site electrical system should be connected to the rack ground bar (junction panel provides
RGB function) by a single connection. This should be from the panel/sub-panel in the equipment
room with a 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) stranded insulated wire (typically green, or green-yellow,
insulation). For sites with sub-panels, the utility green Multi-Grounded Neutral (MGN) wire may
not be present. In this situation, an electrician may need to be consulted to extend the MGN from
the service entrance to the sub-panel. If this is done in metal conduit, then grounding clips should
be used at both ends of the conduit to minimise inductance.
If metal conduit is used for the electrical system, all connections must be bonded together through
conduit compression or screw fitting designed for such purposes. The metal conduit system must
not be in contact with other metal on the site including cable ladder or equipment cabinets to
minimise ground loops and sharing of surge energy. Small pieces of rubber or other insulating
material may be used on conduit clamps to eliminate any inadvertent connections.

Ensure a good connection between the electrical system ground and site ground to prevent
excessive voltage potential between the two ground systems during lightning strikes.

Power Supply and Battery Racks

Both the power supply rack and battery system rack should be individually connected to the
internal ground bar. Typically, a 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) insulated grounding wire with a single
hole lug is used to make the connections. Refer to power supply equipment manufacturer’s
manual for specific information regarding power supply equipment grounding.

DC Power System Grounding

The DC power system is grounded only at a single point to prevent return current flow through
ground connections and ground loops. A 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG), or larger, insulated ground
wire (green, or green-yellow) with a double hole lug should be attached in one of the locations on
the DC return bus of the power supply rack. This ground wire is also connected to the Master
Ground Bar.

6866538D01-C 4 - 13
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The return bus on the power supply rack may be supported by red insulators. The colour red in
these insulators has no significance.

Miscellaneous Site Grounding

A 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG) insulated ground wire may be installed within the site to connect the
miscellaneous metal items (such as the door, door frame, or HVAC grills) that are not likely to be
the source of electrical surges. All ground wiring should be routed near the ceiling, if possible.
One end of the ground wire must be connected to the building earth. This connection bonds the
remaining metal (conductive) items in the room with the ground system.

Ground Bars
There are two types of ground bars used in the EBTS site. Both ground bars should be mounted
immediately below the antenna entry plate on both the inside and outside of the shelter wall. The
ground bars must have direct wire connections to the site ground system.

Exterior Ground Bar

The Exterior Ground Bar (EGB) provides a convenient location to terminate coaxial grounding
straps and grounding wires from exterior metal surfaces as they enter the site, including:
• cabling entrance plate
• cable support
• air conditioner housing

Building Earth (Master Earth Connecting Bar)

The building earth should be located inside the equipment room preferably underneath or near the
cable entrance. Various metal structures within the site connect to the building earth, including
the ground wires from:
• EBTS equipment cabinet
• power supply rack
• battery system rack
• DC power system return
• RF surge arrestors
• electrical system
• cable ladder/ceiling support system
• other miscellaneous metal items and structures (door, louvers, etc.)
Motorola recommends the use of 6.35 mm (1/4”) thick copper ground bars (or equivalent) with
hole patterns to accept a minimum of 15 double hole lug connections (10 mm (3/8”) holes on 25.4
mm (1”) centre). The ground lead from the ground bars to the ground rod system should be a
minimum of 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG). Both the internal and external ground bars must be
connected together. This usually occurs when the internal ground wire exits the building and is
tied into the ground rings with the external ground wire.
For sites which are part of an existing building, a connection to the building steel may be made in
lieu of an underground ring. All other aspects of site interior grounding remain the same.

4 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Antenna Installation

Antenna Systems General Installation Requirements

The following is a list of general practices that shall be considered when installing antennas.
1 All site precautions specifications involving aerial rigging must be followed to the letter.
2 Under no circumstances shall the tower be climbed or worked on if thunderstorms are
occurring or even if they are forecast to occur in the general area.
3 Under no circumstances shall the tower be climbed or worked on if the temperature is below
5 °C (41 °F), or if there is ice on the structure of the tower.
4 All work on the tower shall be carried out in daylight.
5 Using a milliohmmeter, check that the tower earth is < 1.0 Ω, then check the building earth. If
either is greater than 1.0 Ω, then inform the site owner and the customer, as this must be
rectified by the site owner/administrator before any equipment can be installed.
6 Install the receive antennas on standoffs at the same recommended height, such that there is
one on each leg of a triangular tower with at least 6 m (19.6’) horizontal distance between
each.
7 Install the Transmit antenna on the top of the tower (where possible).
8 Install the GPS antenna in the agreed position, which may be lower down the tower.
9 Using a Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR), check that each drum of antenna feeder cable
and jumper cable is undamaged.
10 Install the five antenna feeder cables, securing them with a cable clamp or cleat every 1.0 m
(3.28’), then install an earth clamp on each at the top and bottom of the vertical run of cable.
11 Connect each of the earth clamps to the tower earth using the earth cable and ring terminals.
12 Install the five lightning arrestors in the cable entry plate, then install the plate in the
equipment room cable entry point.
13 Using appropriately sized earth cable and ring terminals, connect the bond stud on the cable
entry plate to the building earth in the room.
14 With a milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the cable entry plate and the
building earth in the room is < 1.0 Ω.
15 Install cable connectors on the end of the antenna feeder cables. Then, connect each to one of
the five lightning arrestors on the outside of the cable entry plate.
16 Install an earth clamp on each of the antenna feeder cables within 100 mm of the connector
into the lightning arrestor. Then, using an appropriately sized earth cable and ring terminals,
connect the each clamp to the bond stud on the outside of the cable entry plate.
17 With a milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the cable entry plate and each
earth clamp on the cables is < 1.0 Ω.
18 Install the five jumper cables with their connectors on the inside of the lightning arrestors
inside the equipment room, if the internal cable tray is not installed.
19 Using a TDR, check that each of the five antenna systems has been installed correctly and that
none of the antenna feeder cables have been damaged during their installation.

6866538D01-C 4 - 15
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

20 Make a copy of each TDR test to record the results.

21 Seal all the antenna cable joints against the ingress of dirt and damp with several layers of
suitable sealing tape or compound.
22 Remove all pallets, packing, and cable drums. Clean the area.

Antenna Feed Line Requirements

The transmission line entry for all antennas should be installed with a metal antenna entry plate
external to the site building. All cabling entry ports must be covered to prevent small animals or
objects from entering. Transmission lines must be grounded to the exterior ground bar below the
cabling entry port using manufacturer approved grounding kits.
To reduce interference (intermodulation) problems, connectors on the transmit antenna lines must
be gold plated centre pins and a gold, silver, or ternary Cu-Sn-Zn alloy plated outer conductor.
The plating on the male-female connector combination must match on both connectors. For
example, a male connector containing a gold plated centre pin and silver plated outer conductor
must match the female connector with a gold plated centre pin and silver plated outer conductor.
All connectors at the cabling entrance are Type N. Connector types at the antenna end may vary
depending upon the antenna and jumper combinations selected by the customer.

Antenna Feed Line Identification

All antenna feed lines should be marked appropriately to simplify connections to the proper
EBTS equipment. Coloured vinyl tape is recommended for use in identifying the antenna feed
lines. Use 3M coloured outdoor marking tape or a permanent, colour-fast equivalent.

Antenna Surge Arrestors

All antenna feed lines should typically terminate with a suitable surge arrestor within 30 cm (12”)
inside of the entry window. Each arrestor must connect to the master ground bar located below
the entry plate. It is recommended that the arrestors be mounted to a mounting bracket to simplify
grounding cable and installation.

Site Reference Operation Modes

The ETSI standard allows two modes of operation of adjacent cells: Synchronized and Non-
Synchronized relative to the serving cell. The EBTS uses GPS to synchronize to the same time
reference. For an adjacent cell to be indicated to be synchronized requires that both the serving
EBTS and the adjacent cell are synchronized to GPS.
The EBTS can be configured via BTS Service Software for three different operating
configurations, which control the synchronisation mode:
• Normal Synchronized Configuration (NSC):
This configuration is used to specify that the EBTS should only operate in synchronized mode
relative to GPS. If the GPS reference is lost the EBTS will reset at the expiry of a configurable
free-run timer and will then wait for the GPS to be restored before resuming operation. During
operation the EBTS will however reflect the adjacent cell synchronization mode according to
TETRA standard in the information to the subscribers.
• Automatic Synchronized Configuration (ASC):

4 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

This configuration is used to specify that the EBTS should operate in synchronized mode
relative to GPS; however if the GPS reference is lost, the EBTS will continue to operate in
synchronized mode for a configurable period (free-run time). If the GPS reference is not
recovered in this time period, the EBTS will switch to non-synchronised mode. If an EBTS is
started when no GPS reference is available, it will operate in non-synchronised mode.
Non-synchronized mode will not have optimized handover performance. When operating in
non-synchronised mode all the adjacent cells will be indicated as non-synchronized with the
EBTS. In order to re-synchronise an EBTS that is running non-synchronised it is necessary to
perform a reset when the GPS reference is present. Prolonged operation in non-synchronized
mode will eventually lead to critical alarms and the frequency accuracy of the EBTS will no
longer be guaranteed.
To maintain the frequency accuracy it is necessary that the oscillator within the EBTS is
periodically recalibrated. The periodic recalibration happens automatically when a GPS
reference is present. The critical alarms indicate that re-calibration is due and should be
performed without delay.
• Forced Non-Synchronized Configuration (FNC):
It is not recommended for System Release D5.2. The EBTS will always operate non-
synchronized to GPS. The failure or lack of GPS will not be reported as an alarm. The EBTS
will start up in non-synchronized mode regardless of the presence of a GPS signal. However
if GPS is present the site reference is trained accordingly. Prolonged operation in this
configuration without GPS will eventually lead to critical alarms and the frequency accuracy
of the EBTS will no longer be guaranteed.
To maintain the frequency accuracy it is necessary that the oscillator within the EBTS is
periodically recalibrated. The periodic recalibration happens automatically when a GPS
reference is present. If no GPS reference is present, it will be necessary to perform the
calibration manually. The critical alarms indicate that re-calibration is due and should be
performed without delay.
It is possible to change configuration with BTS Service Software. The new configuration will
only be active after an EBTS reset.

GPS Tracking Criteria

To allow a system to successfully initialise for the first time at a new location, the Position
Dilution Of Position (PDOP) must be less than 10.0 (a low PDOP value indicates a low error
(higher accuracy) in the position calculated by the GPS receiver).
PDOP is an accuracy factor which is a function of the relative positions of the satellites. If the
satellites being tracked by the GPS receiver are within close relative proximity to each other, the
resulting PDOP will be poor. Conversely, if the satellites are relatively far from each other, PDOP
will be improved. Because any error in position results in a timing error in the BR transmission,
the BRs are not allowed to key until the position error is acceptably low. Therefore, a site with a
large PDOP value may incur a delay when the site is first initialised.
For Dimetra IP the position is actively monitored for 24 hours. The position with the best PDOP
value over this period is selected as the final position, and is then permanently stored for future
starts. The stored position will be reset each time Install is run.
Excessive PDOP values may be the result of the GPS antenna(s) not having an adequate “view”
of the sky to initially determine its position. Motorola recommends locating the antenna(s) such
that there is no PDOP values that exceed 10.0 for periods of more than 15 minutes. Once a system
is operating and the site position has been stored, a PDOP of greater than 10.0 will not effect

6866538D01-C 4 - 17
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

performance, as long as at least one satellite is being tracked. However, to maintain a maximum
reliability, three satellites should be tracked at all times.
The system must be capable of the following:
• Tracking a minimum of four satellites during initial start-up
• Tracking three satellites continuously for maximum reliability.

GPS Evaluation Kit

The Motorola GPS evaluation kit can be used to evaluate the site and antenna mounting location
prior to site acceptance. Although many GPS receivers are available, the Motorola GPS
evaluation kit includes the same receiver and antenna used in the EBTS. The data reported by this
kit is the same as that used by the EBTS, if the antennas were installed in the test locations.
The evaluation kit includes software programs and the instructions necessary to collect the
necessary data in order to evaluate the site. The necessary data includes:
• Dilution Of Precision (DOP)
• DOP Type (Position or Horizontal)
• Number of visible satellites
• Number of satellites being tracked

GPS Start Up
The times given below are from applying power to the system to the frequency locked LED
illuminating. GPS start up is the significant contributing factor in determining System Start Up
times
• Initial Start:
This is the first time an EBTS is powered on or after the Almanac or Position information has
been erased from Non Volatile Memory. The site needs to locate 4 satellites and then train the
reference oscillator from an unknown state.
• Warm Start:
The EBTS has been previously powered up and the Non Volatile Memory contains valid
Almanac and Position information and the reference oscillator was trained prior to starting the
site. The times quoted are for a power off restart a software restart will be slightly faster.
• Soft Restart:
This is a BTS restart where power is maintained during the reset, e.g remote BTS restart after
software upgrade. The GPS receiver will continue to track satellites during the BTS restart,
thus eliminating the ‘search for satellites’ phase of start-up.

Table 4-5 GPS Start-up Time

GPS Start-up Times

Initial Start Normal Start Soft Restart

Typical Maximum Typical Maximum Typical Maximum

10 Minutes 30 Minutes 4 Minutes 10 Minutes 90 Seconds 8 Minutes

4 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

If these start-up times are exceeded then follow the procedures for GPS Site Controller fault
indications section

GPS Antenna Requirements

The antenna must be mounted high enough to clear the peak of the EBTS site roof. For systems
in the northern hemisphere, the GPS antenna should be mounted so that a clear view of the
southern sky is maintained.
Isolate the GPS antenna from RF interference by mounting the antenna at least 3.7 m (12’)
horizontally from other transmitting antennas.
Adjacent structures, such as trees or buildings, are obstructions due to their wide, solid profiles.
Mount the GPS antenna to clear these obstructions and provide a clear path. Adjacent antenna
towers at the RF site which protrude into the required view have a minimal effect on GPS satellite
reception and are not obstructions.

The colour coding schemes identified within this manual are a recommendation only. The
purpose for identifying specific colours is an attempt to obtain uniformity between EBTS sites.
Other colour schemes may be used.

GPS antennas are colour-coded yellow. The same identification technique used for RF antennas
is also used to identify the GPS antennas, refer to Table 4-6.

Table 4-6 GPS Antenna Identification

Band Description

One yellow band GPS Antenna 1

Two yellow bands GPS Antenna 2
Note: If an external GPS is being used then use the markings above for the external GPS input

6866538D01-C 4 - 19
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

GPS Antenna Line Loss

The maximum allowable line attenuation between the antenna and the Site Controller GPS
Receiver (GPSR) input is 6 dB. There is an additional 4 dB of attenuation for foliage. In a typical
EBTS installation using 1/2” low density foam coaxial cable (or equivalent), the length of the
cable run should never exceed 46 m (151 ft). This is sufficient for most installations.
When considering the use of longer cables, calculate the cable lengths allowing 4.5 dB of loss at
1.5 GHz (the GPS receiver frequency). The remaining 1.5 dB of attenuation is provided by
interior site cabling and connectors.

Remote GPS (RGPS) Installation Verification

If a remote GPS is installed, the Site Controllers perform the following steps during GPS training
when the TSC Application starts up (Dimetra IP):
• Attempt communication with an internal GPS receiver. If an internal GPS receiver is found
then GPS satellite tracking will commence. The status sri -gps command will report the
GPSR Type as ‘INTERNAL’.
• After approximately ten seconds of attempted communication to the internal receiver power
is applied to the external receiver. The cable delay is measured (a process which takes
approximately 18 seconds) and communication occurs with the external GPS receiver. If
successful the status sri -gps command will report the GPSR Type as ‘EXTERNAL’ and also
display the cable delay.

If neither an internal nor external GPS receiver is found then the search resumes for an internal
GPS receiver. During the search process the status sri -gps command will report the GPSR Type
as ‘UNKNOWN’.

Figure 4-3 Mating View of Remote GPS Receiver

Independently Powered Remote GPS units

On certain EBTS sites an RGPS receiver with an independent power supply may be used (for
example fiber optic connection to the RGPS receiver). When using an RGPS receiver there is a
transmission time delay proportional to the distance of the RGPS receiver to the EBTS. For a
independently powered RGPS receiver with cable length greater than 500 m this time delay

4 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

cannot be automatically calculated by the TSC and needs to be entered manually via the TSC
Application MMI.
During installation of the EBTS the time delay value will be manually measured and should be
known to the user. The time delay is entered via the TSC MMI using the 'rgps_delay' command
which is used as follows: rgps_delay -set xxx (See Chapter “EBTS Interface Commands” for full
description of rgps_delay) where xxx is the time delay measurement in nanoseconds. In order for
the independently powered RGPS receiver to operate correctly a time delay must be entered
otherwise the TSC will assume that a normal GPS receiver is installed.
The TSC must be reset after a new time delay has been set.

Alarm Wiring
Various alarms or sensors are installed within the EBTS site building. All alarm wiring terminates
at the Environmental Alarm System (EAS) located within the Equipment Cabinet. The electrical
contacts for the alarms must be dry contacts and remain normally closed (open on alarm).
Motorola recommends site installation of the following alarms:
• Smoke detector (line powered)
• Intrusion alarm
• High temperature sensor
• Low temperature sensor
The high temperature sensor should be capable of monitoring temperatures above 27 °C (80 °F).
The low temperature sensor should be capable of monitoring temperatures below 21 °C (70 °F).
Temperature sensors should be mounted to the utilities wiring board at a convenient height to
facilitate the setting and inspection of the trigger points.
Local codes may require an additional contact closure to deactivate the HVAC system and prevent
circulation of smoke in the event of a fire. An additional smoke detector may be used to provide
this contact. It can also be configured to trigger an external alarm, if required.
If a second alarm closure is used, it must be completely isolated from the dedicated EBTS smoke
alarm circuit. Parallel connection of the HVAC controller through these contacts may damage the
HVAC and EBTS equipment. This is because the HVAC low voltage controller typically has
5 VDC negative ground, which opposes the -48 VDC EBTS supply.
If specialised automatic fire suppression systems are installed within the site, water flow alarms
or Halon release alarms may also be required. These systems may also have to be remotely
monitored for unattended facilities. Check local codes for additional information and
requirements.

6866538D01-C 4 - 21
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Receipt of Equipment

Equipment Inspection
Inspection of the EBTS equipment must be performed as soon as all equipment is unpacked.

If obvious damage has occurred to the shipping containers before unpacking, contact the shipping
agent and ask that a representative of their company be present while the equipment is unpacked.

Observe guidelines for safe handling of electro-static sensitive devices or equipment to prevent
electro-static damage. An anti-static wrist strap is provided with the EBTS and should always be
worn when handling any electrical component.
Inspect the following upon receipt of the EBTS:
• Check for loose or damaged equipment
• Check all sides of the cabinet for dents, scratches, or other damage
• Check all cabinet wiring to ensure connections are in place
• Check modules and boards for physical damage to controls or connectors
• Verify that ground straps are secure

If any equipment is damaged, contact the shipping company immediately, then your Motorola
representative.

Equipment Inventory
Check the EBTS equipment against the itemised packing list to ensure that all equipment was
received. If available, check the sales order with the packing list to account for all equipment
ordered. Contact your Motorola representative to report missing items and for additional
information.

4 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Hardware Installation

Installation Overview
The procedures described in this chapter assume the field technician or installer has knowledge
of the installation techniques contained in the Motorola Standards and Guidelines for
Communications Sites, R56.

Prior to performing the installation procedures, prepare the site with all associated antennas,
communications lines, and other related site equipment.

Installation procedures provided in this chapter cover the EBTS Equipment Cabinet.
In an EBTS site, the term “cabinet” is a generic term used to refer to Fixed Network Equipment
(FNE) mounted in different types of frames. It does not refer in any way to building electrical
cabinets, outdoor utility cabinets, or some types of equipment shelters commonly known as
cabinets.
The Equipment Cabinet uses a Schroff Eurorack, which is referred to as a “1.9-metre cabinet”.
This cabinet ships standard as an open frame with four corner posts with top and bottom
assemblies to tie the posts together. Actual cabinet height is 1845 mm but also a 50 mm lifting
eye on the top of the cabinet would give a total height of 1895 mm.

Personnel Considerations
The following personnel will typically be required to install an EBTS site:
• A working Installation Supervisor.
• A minimum of two Installers per EBTS site. (Two Installers could include the working
supervisor, provided there is a minimum of two persons on each EBTS site at all times.)
• Two Aerial Riggers to install the antenna system.
• A Commissioning Engineer (attends only during the commissioning stage).

Transportation of the Equipment

It is recommended that to move and locate all the equipment in its final position, or in the case of
securing antenna systems to the base of the tower or structure on which the antenna systems are
to be mounted, a transportation company specialising in the moving of heavy electronic
equipment should be used.

6866538D01-C 4 - 23
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Lifting Equipment Rack

Safety Considerations

Crush hazard could result in death, personal injury or equipment damage. Equipment racks can
weigh up to 545 kg (1,200 lbs.). Follow instructions below for proper lifting procedures.

Equipment racks should only be lifted without the use of lifting equipment when there are
sufficient personnel available to ensure that regulations covering Health and Safety are not
breached.
Motorola recommends the use of appropriate powered mechanical lifting apparatus for moving
and lifting the equipment racks.
In addition to these points, refer to and comply with any local regulations that govern the use of
lifting equipment.

Lifting Equipment racks from Horizontal

In some cases the equipment racks are laid down horizontal to facilitate the shipping process. Use
appropriate lifting apparatus to lift the racks upright complying with all applicable health and
safety regulations and any other regulations applicable to lifting heavy equipment.

Crush hazard could result in death, personal injury or equipment damage. Do NOT use eyenuts
to lift the rack upright from horizontal position. Eyenuts could fail resulting in the equipment
dropping.

Do NOT use the eyenuts mounted on top of the rack to lift the equipment upright from a
horizontal position. The eyenuts are NOT designed to lift in this direction and could fail resulting
in the equipment dropping.

Lifting Equipment Racks Vertically

If it is necessary to lift the equipment rack vertically, four (4) M10 eyenuts are provided mounted
to the top of the rack. Before attempting to use, visually check the eyenuts and associated rack
hardware for damage that may have occurred during transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT
USE; contact Motorola for replacement.

4 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

ALL four (4) eyenuts MUST be used when lifting the equipment rack. When lifting from a center
point, the distance from each eyenut to the lifting point must be minimum 40 inches (1 meter) to
ensure the proper lifting angle is maintained (see Figure 4-4). Using a length shorter than that
specified could cause the eyenuts to fail.
If eyenuts are removed or become loose, they must be properly installed before they are used to
lift the equipment rack. Eyenuts must be aligned to point towards the center lifting point of the
cabinet (see Figure 4-5) and tightened to between 10-13.5 Nm (90-120 in-lbs) torque. This can
be accomplished by hand tightening the eyenut and bolt assembly and tightening the bolt (turning
clockwise) an additional 45 degrees. Correct eyenut tightness and alignment are crucial to ensure
the eyenut assembly will perform to its intended lifting capacity.

Center
Lifting
Point

> 1 m (40 in )

Front View

Figure 4-4 Minimum Distance Eyenut to Lifting Point

Center
Lifting
Point

Eyenut

Figure 4-5 Top View Equipment Rack "Eyenut Alignment"

EBTS Pre-Installation Checklist

The installation shall only be carried out after the following activities have been completed:
• Antenna installation (including GPS antenna)
• New building earth (if required)
• The installation of the X.21 or E1 link (to the control centre) by the telephone line service
provider

6866538D01-C 4 - 25
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

• The installation of the cable tray or ladder rack in the equipment room (if supplied by
others)
• The increase in the capacity of the mains power supply (if required)
• The increase in the capacity of the standby mains power supply (if required)
• The completion of any civil works on the site (for example, new or modified
accommodation, new access road, etc.)
• Reinforcement of site floor to accommodate load of site equipment (if required)
• The position in which each piece of equipment will occupy on the floor has been marked
and agreed
• All the equipment has been delivered to site and placed in their final positions by the
transportation company
For full instructions and guidelines please refer to Motorola Standards and Guidelines for
Communications Sites, R56, Document number 68P81089E50.

Equipment Cabinet Installation

This section provides procedures for permanently mounting the EBTS equipment cabinets within
a site. The Equipment Cabinet Installation section contains the procedures listed in the following
table.

Table 4-7 Equipment Cabinet Installation Procedures

Section Page Description

Cabinet Bracing Considerations 4-26 Describes considerations on properly bracing cabinets

Access Considerations 4-27 Describes considerations for access to cabinets during servicing
Cabinet Position Considerations 4-27 Describes considerations and mounting procedures for cabinets

This section of the installation procedures covers the EBTS equipment cabinet. It does not refer
to the Power Supply rack or battery rack. Refer to the manufacturer’s installation manual for
information relating to these cabinets.

Cabinet Bracing Considerations

The EBTS equipment cabinet is self-supporting. In seismically active areas, additional bracing of
the cabinet may be required to prevent it from tipping. However, the bracing hardware must be
locally procured. There are no specific procedures within this manual for bracing cabinets in
active seismic areas.

Always use appropriate lifting equipment and number of personnel whenever moving an EBTS
equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of tipping. A fully configured EBTS equipment cabinet
weighs approximately 276 kg (608 lbs). tipping can result in serious injury and extensive
equipment damage.

4 - 26 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Access Considerations
Allow at least 0.8 m (2.6’) of floor space in front of and 15 cm (6”) behind the cabinets to permit
access during installation. Although all maintenance, expansion, cabling, and antenna
connections can be performed from the front or top, space is required behind the cabinets for
proper air flow.

HVAC
Optional
0.91m(3')

Service Area 0.80m(2.6')

Power 1.55m(5')
Batteries Supply Cabinet
HVAC

Cabinet Equipment 0.60m(2')

Service Area 15cm(0.5')

Note: Double lines on above units indicate front of equipment.

TEBTS003
101701LHE

Figure 4-6 Typical EBTS Site Layout

Although 15 cm is recommended for space behind the cabinet, this is a minimum requirement. It
is highly recommended that if possible around 60 cm be available to greatly ease the removal and
replacement of FRUs.

Cabinet Position Considerations

The following procedures describe how to mount the equipment cabinet in an EBTS site facility.
Be sure to read all of the procedures carefully.

The equipment cabinet must be secured to the floor for optimum stability.

Perform the following steps to properly install the equipment cabinet within the site facility:
1 Check that each piece of equipment, including the power supply equipment, has been
correctly positioned in the equipment room.
2 If using a HILTI nail gun to secure Equipment Cabinet to floor, secure cabinet as follows:

Follow all manufacturer’s instructions regarding protective gear and usage when using nail gun.

2.1 With the HILTI gun placed over the fixing holes in the base of each cabinet or rack,
shoot the stud through the baseplate hole into the concrete floor of the room. Make sure
that about 15 mm of threaded stud protrudes above the plate for the securing
nut/washer.

6866538D01-C 4 - 27
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

2.2 Start one nut and lock washer. Shoot additional studs into floor.
2.3 Secure remaining mounting locations using nuts and lock washers. Fully tighten all
mounting nuts securing cabinet to floor.
3 If using manually inserted concrete anchors to secure Equipment Cabinet to floor, secure
cabinet as follows:

Follow all manufacturer’s instructions regarding protective gear and usage when using concrete
nails and hammers.

3.1 Measure the mounting location for the first cabinet in the row.
Refer to the cabinet footprint(s) located in “Site Planning” on page 4-1.
3.2 Carefully mark the mounting holes with a pencil, as indicated on the appropriate
cabinet footprint.
3.3 Drill the marked mounting holes to the appropriate depth of the mounting hardware
with a hammer drill and bit.
3.4 Insert an anchor into the drilled hole. If necessary, tap the anchor into place using a
hammer.
3.5 Remove the four screws securing the bottom kick panel to the front and back of the
cabinet. Remove the kick panel and set aside during installation.

Always use the appropriate lifting equipment and numbers of personnel whenever moving an
EBTS equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of tipping. A fully configured EBTS equipment
cabinet weighs approximately 275 kg (600 lbs). tipping can result in serious injury and extensive
equipment damage.

3.6 Carefully move the cabinet into the position indicated by the holes in the floor.
3.7 Adjust and level the cabinet as necessary to position the cabinet mounting holes with
the pre-drilled holes.
3.8 Secure the cabinet to the site floor with the locally procured mounting hardware.
4 Check that none of the cables within the EBTS cabinet and the power supply equipment are
damaged.

Expansion Considerations
Intercabinet cabling between Prime and Expansion cabinets is manufactured to predetermined
lengths. This requires that a Prime cabinet and its complimentary Expansion cabinet be ganged
together using the hardware provided with each Expansion cabinet. Instructions for all
intercabinet cabling is provided in Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling”. Instructions for the
Phasing Harness is provided in Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)”.

4 - 28 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Power Supply Equipment Installation

Power supply equipment and any battery back-up systems are not manufactured by Motorola.
Consult the manufacturer’s instruction manual and other pertinent documentation for installing a
power supply rack and battery systems. Any local regulations shall be adhered to when installing
power supply equipment or battery equipment.

External Cabling Connections

This section describes the external cabling connections that connect to the equipment cabinet. The
individual cabling procedures are listed below.

Table 4-8 External Cabling Connection Procedures

Procedure Page Description

EBTS Junction Panel 4-29 Connection of ground cabling to equipment

Cabinet Ground Connections
-48 VDC Power Connections
Base Radio Antennas
GPS Antennas
Alarm System Cabling
X.21, E1 Cabling
4-30 Connection of ground cabling to equipment
4-31 Connection of -48 VDC power from the power supply
equipment to Equipment Cabinet
4-34 Connection of antennas to Equipment Cabinet
4-34 Connection of GPS antennas to Equipment Cabinet
4-35 Connection of site and power supply equipment alarm
connections to the EAS
4-35 Connection of card interface and settings made on customer
side of demarcation point

The equipment cabinet is shipped with all cabling within the cabinet factory-installed. If
necessary, refer to Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling”, for cabling within the cabinet.

EBTS Junction Panel

(See Figure 4-7.) Various cabling from the equipment cabinet to external assets is made via the
EBTS Junction Panel located at the top-rear of the equipment cabinet. The Junction Panel is
accessed from the front or rear of the cabinet.

Depending on system configuration, not all connector locations on Junction Panel are populated.

6866538D01-C 4 - 29
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

TEBTS080
101701LHE

Figure 4-7 Junction Panel (Top View)

Cabinet Ground Connections

Cabinet grounding wires may have been installed prior to cabinet installation. If so, follow the
instructions below. If grounding wires have not yet been installed, refer to the “Grounding
Requirements” on page 4-11.
Single-point ground method (where each cabinet or rack is grounded to master ground using its
own ground wire) shall be used. Equipment cabinet shall use green (or green-yellow) insulated
wire with a minimum size of 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) for ground wire.

Where specified wire size is not available, next-larger available wire size shall be used.

During installation of cabinet ground wires, be sure to check any factory-installed internal ground
connections for tightness.

Equipment Cabinet Grounding

On the Equipment Cabinet, site ground connects to the M10 stud located on the Rack Ground Bus
bar (junction panel). The internal ground bus bar is attached to the mounting brackets of each
equipment within the cabinet; as such it provides the equipment a low-impedance common
ground that is free from ground loops.
The internal ground bus bar is located on the inside left-side (as viewed from the rear) of the
equipment cabinet. Throughout the length of the internal ground bus bar, M6 threaded holes are
available for ground connections.
Perform the following steps to ground the equipment cabinet to the site Master Ground Bus bar.
1 Strip the end of the wire to be connected to the cabinet Rack Ground Bus bar (junction panel).
2 Using an appropriate tool, attach a crimp lug onto the cabinet ground wire. Make certain lug
is securely fastened to wire.
3 Using the M10 nut provided, secure the cabinet ground wire to the M10 stud located on the
Rack Ground Bus bar (junction panel).
4 Make sure that the other end of the cabinet ground wire is routed to the Master Ground Bus
Bar.
5 Strip the end of the wire for connection to the site Master Ground Bus bar.

4 - 30 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

6 Using an appropriate tool, attach a dual-hole crimp lug onto the wire. Make certain lug is
securely fastened to wire.
7 Secure the ground wire lug to the site Master Ground Bus bar using the appropriate tools and
hardware.

Power Supply Equipment Grounding

Ground the power supply equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and any
applicable local regulations.

Battery System Grounding

Ground the battery cabinet (if used) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and any
applicable local regulations.

Ground Connections Check

Perform the following procedure to ensure adequacy of cabinet-to-facility ground (earth)
connections:
1 Install the earth cable between the building earth and the earth bond stud on the EBTS cabinet.
2 With a Milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the EBTS Cabinet and the
building earth in the room is < 1.0 Ω.
3 In accordance with power supply equipment manufacturer’s instructions, install the earth
cable between the building earth and the earth bond stud on the 230 VAC/-48 VDC power
supply equipment chassis.
4 With a Milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the power supply equipment
chassis and the building earth in the room is < 1.0 Ω.

-48 VDC Power Connections

All -48 VDC power supply connections are made between the power supply equipment and the
equipment cabinet. A readily accessible power disconnect device (e.g., circuit breaker) for the
EBTS should be incorporated into the fixed wiring.
The Equipment Cabinet requires two power feeds to provide the operating power. Two -48 VDC
wires from the A and B sides of the -48 VDC Equipment Cabinet breaker panel are typically
connected to individual breakers on the power supply. Similarly, two DC return wires from the A
and B sides of the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel RETURN connections are connected to the
power supply. This provides two separate power feeds to the Equipment Cabinet. Figure 4-8
shows a rear view of the Power Distribution Panel.

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1&RFS2 BR3&BR4 BR1&BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

TEBTS005
111998LLN

Figure 4-8 Equipment Cabinet Power Distribution Panel (Rear View)

6866538D01-C 4 - 31
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The equipment cabinet distributes the -48 VDC through individual power circuits for each
module in the cabinet. These circuits are wired from the circuit breaker panel in the cabinet.
Power wiring for circuit breakers in the equipment cabinet is accessed from the rear of the cabinet
on the breaker panel. The A-side is on the left and the B-side is on the right, when viewed from
the front.

Determining Power Connection Wire Size

Wire size recommendations contained herein reflect Motorola engineering requirements for
proper system operation. Local regulations shall be adhered to in any case and shall supersede any
other specifications in this manual, where applicable.

Table 4-9 lists the required wire sizes for various installations. The “loop length” refers to the
combined length of the -48 VDC lead and the DC return lead. For example, a cabinet which needs
4.87 m (16’) of wire between the power supply equipment and equipment cabinets has a total loop
length of 9.75 m (32’).
For a standard installation, the equipment cabinet is located adjacent to the power supply
equipment with a cable loop length less than 10.67 m (35’).

Table 4-9 Power Connections Wire Size

Loop Length Wire Size

15.2 m (50’) or less 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG)

15.2 - 24.8 m (50 - 80’) 25 mm2 CSA (#4 AWG)
24.8 - 36.6 m (80 - 120’) 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG)

Wire used shall not be smaller than 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG). Cable loop voltage drop shall not
exceed 500 mV for cabling of the -48 VDC and DC return leads.
Blue is the colour recommended for -48 VDC wires. However, if the wire is not colour-coded,
mark these leads with a coloured tracer on each end.

Equipment Cabinet -48 VDC Power Connections

Perform -48 VDC power source-to-equipment cabinet wiring as follows:

Make sure all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel.

1 Using appropriate-gauge wire, route two runs of bulk wiring between -48 VDC A and B side
connections on Equipment Cabinet and power supply -48 VDC connections.
Make certain the wire runs are properly routed through cabinets and cable tray assembly,
allowing adequate slack.

4 - 32 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

2 Connect the wires to power supply -48 VDC output in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and any applicable local regulations.
3 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to
Breaker 1A into A-side terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using the
circuit breaker captive screw.
4 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to
Breaker 1B into B-side terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using the
circuit breaker captive screw.

DC Return Connections
The equipment cabinet requires two wires for the DC return leads. Perform equipment cabinet
DC return wiring as follows:

Make sure all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel.

1 Using appropriate-gauge wire, route two runs of bulk wiring between A and B side RETURN
connections on equipment cabinet and power supply return connections.
Make certain the wire runs are properly routed through cabinets and cable tray assembly,
allowing adequate slack.
2 Connect the wires to power supply -48 VDC return in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and any applicable local regulations.
3 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to A-side
return into the A-side RETURN terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using
the circuit breaker captive screw.
4 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to B-side
return into the B-side RETURN terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using
the circuit breaker captive screw.

Replacement of the Fuse Trip panel (Breaker Panel)

To replace the Breaker Panel through the front door do the following:
1 Turn off the external power supply.

Make sure all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel.

2 Remove the top of the cabinet and disconnect all cables from the rear of the breaker panel.
3 Remove the breaker panel.

6866538D01-C 4 - 33
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Base Radio Antennas

The following procedures describe connecting Base Radio antennas to the equipment cabinet RF
Distribution System (RFDS). The antenna leads should be dropped above the EBTS equipment
cabinet as per the site plan. The following procedures assume the Base Radio antennas have been
installed and that the Equipment Cabinet RFDS is properly configured. (If required, refer to
Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling” for cabling diagrams for RF cabling between the
Equipment Cabinet modules, and RFDS cabling.)
Make sure the antenna cables are properly marked. Observe the direction of corresponding
antennas while correlating the azimuth to the tagged antenna cable. Be sure to document this
information for future use.

The equipment cabinet uses female N-type connectors on the antenna ports. These connectors
have gold- plated centre conductors and trimetal-plated outer shells. It is recommended that
mating antenna feed connectors use correspondingly matching metal plating.

4 Channel Cavity Combining RFDS Sites

(See Figure 4-9) Identify and tag all antenna cables designated for connection to the equipment
cabinet. Note that for duplexed antenna configurations, the transmit antenna is also used as a
receive antenna giving one antenna and antenna cable less in the system.
For EBTS systems with expansion racks, there are two antennas that are both used for
transmitting and receiving.
All antenna cabling must enter through the top of the cabinets. Extension cables for the antenna
feedlines must be locally procured. Superflex™ 1/2” cable is the recommended extension cable.

RX1 DIVERSITY RECEIVE

ANTENNA CABLE

RX2 DIVERSITY RECEIVE

TX ANTENNA CABLES ANTENNA CABLE

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

TEBTS022B

Figure 4-9 RFDS Connections

GPS Antennas
The Site Controller uses an internal GPS receiver to be used to provide synchronisation and
timing signals.
The GPS interface on the controller is connected to the GPS port of the junction panel via a
factory installed cable assembly.

4 - 34 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

GPS extension cables (if required) are not provided and must be locally procured. A SuperflexTM
1/2” cable assembly is recommended.

Alarm System Cabling

The Environmental Alarm System (EAS) handles all alarms for the site. Site alarm wiring enters
from the top of the equipment cabinet via the junction panel. The User Alarm/Control circuits and
System Alarm/Control wiring circuits to respective 50-pin, connectors P9 User Alarm/Control
and P10 System Alarm/Control.
Only P9 User Alarm/Control is connected to the Junction Panel at the top of the cabinet. Various
system (internal) alarm circuits are interfaced to the EAS via connectors P5 through P8. The EAS
rear panel connectors are shown in Figure 4-10.
Five sets of change-over relay contacts are provided for controlling external equipment. The
relays are rated 50 VDC @ 250 mA. (If switching requirement exceeds rating, the relay contact
can be used to actuate a suitable power relay.)
Any device connected to the EBTS shall comply with requirements specified for SELV circuits
per EN60950.

P9 P5 P6 P10

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
RF2 RF3
Tanapa No.: CLN1685

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

P1 P3 P7 P8

Figure 4-10 EAS Rear Panel Connectors

The USER ALARM/CONTROL (P9) and SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL (P10) connectors are
typically connected to the site alarm wiring using a punchblock.
The site alarm wiring should have been accomplished during pre-installation.
The EAS connector pinouts and functions is described in “EAS Alarm/Control Connector
Pinouts” on page 9-6.

X.21, E1 Cabling
The X.21 interface connects to a cabinet “transition cable” (P/N 3083751X06) that converts and
extends the connector on the TSC to the 15-pin D-type connector used for the site X.21/V11
communications. For the E1 120Ω Site Controller, an extension cable (P/N 3082468Y02) is
connected to the TSC.
The opposite ends of these cables are mounted to the junction panel.
Connect the X.21 transition cable to the site Network Terminating Unit.

6866538D01-C 4 - 35
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The Network Termination Unit shall provide the necessary isolation between the X.21/E1
interface and the network, and should be approved for use by the appropriate agency in the end
user country.

Table 4-10 E1 Connector on Junction Panel

Pin No. Function

1 Transmit
9
3 Receive
11

Table 4-11 X.21 Connector

Signal Pin No. Function

R 4 Receive Data
11
T 2 Transmit Data
9
C 3 Control
10
I 5 Indication
12
S 6 Timing
(Signal Element)
13
GND 8 Ground

If the cable is not terminated to the Network Terminating Unit, do not remove the supplied caplug
and retaining bag from the D-type connector on the X.21 cable or 120 Ω cable. The caplug is
required on the connector if it is not terminated to comply with the requirements of EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC.

4 - 36 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Final Checkout

Final Checkout Setup

The following procedures should be performed after installation of the EBTS is complete. This
Final Checkout procedure ensures the proper operation of the EBTS.
1 (See Figure 4-11). On the Equipment Cabinet, set all circuit breakers to the OFF position.
2 On the power supply equipment, set all circuit breakers to the OFF position in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.

BR1 BR3 RFS1 RFS3 CTRL A BR2 BR4 RFS2 EAS/IMU CTRL B

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

25A 25A 3A 3A 7.5A 25A 25A 3A 7.5A 7.5A

TEBTS004
120496JNM

Figure 4-11 Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel

Equipment Power-Up
Perform procedures in specified sequence. Procedures are arranged to prevent successive
equipment damage in the case of an equipment or installation defect.
Make certain all switches on the EBTS Equipment Modules are set to OFF before proceeding.
Turn switches to on only when directed in following procedures.

Powering the Power Supply Equipment

Use this procedure to apply power to the power supply equipment.
1 Check connections at power supply equipment. Verify that all connections are secure and
make good contact. Make any necessary adjustments.
2 Power-up the power supply equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM), verify a voltage level between -44 VDC and -60 VDC at the
-48 VDC (hot) terminals and return terminals of the power supply equipment.
4 Adjust in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions as required.
5 As applicable, set the battery disconnect switch (or equivalent) on the power supply
equipment to CONNECT.
6 The batteries should begin charging.
7 Proceed to "Powering the Equipment Cabinet" instructions.

6866538D01-C 4 - 37
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Powering the Equipment Cabinet

1 In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, set the power supply equipment circuit
breakers that supply power to the Equipment Cabinet to the ON position.
This supplies power to the A and B sides of the Equipment Cabinet.
2 Verify a voltage level between -44 VDC and -60 VDC across DC return and the -48 VDC (hot)
terminals A and B on the power distribution panel in the Equipment Cabinet.
3 Verify a voltage of less than 1.0 V between the DC return and chassis ground of the Equipment
Cabinet.
4 Proceed to "Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breakers" instructions.

Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breakers

Breaker panels are always shipped fully configured regardless of whether the equipment for the
controlling circuit breaker is installed. This procedure requires all breakers to be sequentially set
to the ON position, in the order specified, to prevent the triggering of the breaker alarm indication.
All steps must be performed in this procedure to prevent unwanted alarm indications.

EAS/Site Controller Circuit Breakers

1 (See Figure 4-12). On the Environmental Alarm System (EAS), set POWER switch to ON.
2 (See Figure 4-11). On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the EAS/IMU breaker to ON.
Verify that the Power On LED on the EAS module is lit.
3 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the CTRL A circuit breaker to ON.

ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM SYSTEM

te

ct t
e
er

A pu
ra

A ut
iv

iv
w

ct
pe

ut
Po

In
O

O
Power

iSC402_EAS2

Figure 4-12 EAS Front Panel

Base Radio/Receiver Multicoupler Circuit Breakers

1 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the BR1 circuit breaker to ON.
2 Repeat above step for additional base radios BR2 through BR4, as applicable.
3 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the RFS1 breaker to ON.
4 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the RFS2 breaker to ON.

4 - 38 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Site Controller Power-Up

1 Verify that the CTRL A circuit breaker is set to ON.
2 Set the front panel Power breaker/switch on Site Controller A to the ON position.
3 On Site Controller front panel, verify normal indication status of the indicators listed in Table
8-2 and shown in Figure 8-1.
4 Proceed to Chapter 6, “Configuration and Testing”.

Redundant Site Controller Power-Up

The support for redundant site controller is a system release feature. Please check in you system
release documentation whether or not the feature is supported. The redundant SC MUST be
switched OFF and remain switched OFF during operation with software releases that do not
support the redundant TSC feature. Using a redundant SC without supporting software will cause
BR's to communicate/register with the incorrect SC and will also cause site link problems.

For system releases that supports the redundant Site Controller follow the following procedure.
1 Verify that the CTRL B circuit breaker is set to ON.
2 Set the front panel Power breaker/switch on Site Controller B to the ON position.
3 On Site Controller front panel, verify normal indication status of the indicators listed in Table
8-2 and shown in Figure 8-1.
4 Proceed to Chapter 6, “Configuration and Testing”.

6866538D01-C 4 - 39
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Auto Tune Combiner Power-Up

1 (See Figure 4-13). On the Equipment Cabinet, set the RFS3 circuit breaker to ON.

CAVITY COMBINER

CAVITY COMBINER

TEBTS081
091299JNM

Figure 4-13 Cavity Combiner Front Panel

4 - 40 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Planned Maintenance Information

In order to reduce the probability of failure of the EBTS, a number of items require periodic
maintenance. For further information see Appendix D.
• Fans in Power Supply and Power Amplifier:
Should be replaced if noisy. Please contact your Motorola Service Representative.
• Fans in TSC:
Should be replaced if noisy, but if the EBTS is operated in high ambient temperature (45 °C
or above) fans should be replaced every 4-5 years. Please contact your Motorola Service
Representative.
• TSC Backup Battery:
Should be replaced every 8 years. Please contact your Motorola Service Representative.

6866538D01-C 4 - 41
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

4 - 42 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 5

5Interconnection and Cabling

Receiver Cabling
Receiver cabling refers to the receive cable connections between the RF Distribution System
(RFDS) and the Base Radios receivers.
Table 5-1 and Figure 5-1 represent 4-channel, diversity configuration.
.

Table 5-1 Receiver Cabling (Cavity Combining RFDS)

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082571Y05 Junction Panel RX In Adapter SMA/SMA For prime racks only.

(underside) Cable from RX 3 In is reserved for CMU.
1A 5809585Y01 For prime racks only.
Adapter SMA/SMA.
1B 3082571Y04 Adapter SMA/SMA Input connector on Receiver For prime racks only.
Multicoupler
2 3013943A38 Output connectors on RX connector on BR 3 and BR 4 Unused output ports on Receiver
Receiver Multicoupler Multicoupler are terminated with 50 Ω
load.
3 3013943A41 Output connectors on RX connector on BR 1 and BR 2 Unused output ports on Receiver
Receiver Multicouplers Multicoupler are terminated with 50 Ω
load.
5 3082571Y05 RX In on Junction Panel Input connector on Receiver For expansion racks only.
Multicoupler
6 3082571Y02 EX connector on Receiver RX Out on Junction Panel For prime racks only.
Multicoupler
7 3013942M38 RX Out on Junction Panel RX Out on Junction Panel of For expansion racks only.
of prime racks expansion racks

6866538D01-C 5-1
February 2005
 TO JUNCTION PANEL
OF EXPANSION RACK

5-2
7 RX1 IN
7 RX2 IN
RX3 IN In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In
1
Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

5 RX2 IN 1 RX2 IN Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out

/RX1-In
Tx2 Out
/RX2-In
Alarm RF2

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

5 RX1 IN 1 RX1 IN
LOCATED ON TOP OF PRIME RACK
ON JUNCTION PANEL 6 RX2 OUT
OF EXPANSION RACK
6 RX1 OUT
Interconnection and Cabling

ON JUNCTION PANEL
OF PRIME RACK
STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

1A 1A

1B 1B

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
TO BR4, RX1 -48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
2 GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
2 TO BR4, RX1 BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

2 TO BR3, RX1
RX 3

2 TO BR3, RX1
GROUN AC

TO BR2, RX1 RX 2
3
DC

3 TO BR2, RX1 RX 1 RE
BLACK

TO BR1, RX1 BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED

3 EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

3 TO BR1, RX1 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC

2 TO BR4, RX2 RX 2

2 TO BR4, RX2 DC

Figure 5-1 Receiver Cabling Diagram

RX 1 RE
BLACK
TO BR3, RX2 BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
2 EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

2 TO BR3, RX2
5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

3 TO BR2, RX2
3 TO BR2, RX2
3 TO BR1, RX2
RX 3
3 TO BR1, RX2
GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

FOR EXPANSION RACKS FOR PRIMARY RACKS
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS026B

February 2005
6866538D01-C
 Interconnection and Cabling

Transmit Power Out Cabling

Transmit power output cabling refers to the cables that route the Base Radio RF output to the
transmit input of the RF Distribution System (RFDS) and transmit cabling from the RFDS to the
Junction Panel TX OUT connector. It also includes any transmit cables that are not included under
the RFDS part number.
Table 5-2 identifies and Figure 5-2 shows the transmit power out cabling for a 4-channel cavity
combining RFDS.

Power monitor cabling is not shown in the following diagrams. Refer to Cabinet Alarm Harness
Connections paragraph for power monitor cabling.

Table 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling (4-Channel Cavity Combining RFDS)

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3013942C18 Base Radio 1 PA Out Index 1A

1A 3082118X10 Index 1 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH1)
2 3013942C18 Base Radio 2 PA Out Index 2A
2A 3082118X10 Index 2 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH2)
3 3013942C18 Base Radio 3 PA Out Index 3A
3A 3082118X11 Index 3 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH3)
4 3013942C18 Base Radio 4 PA Out Index 4A
4A 3082118X11 Index 4 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH4)
6 3082118X22 Cavity Combiner Master/Slave Ant APM 1 In port For prime racks only.
port
7 0102705U11 Cavity Combiner Master Ant port Cavity Combiner Slave Ant port Interconnection harness
8 3082118X24 APM 2 Out Junction Panel TX Out 2
(underside)
9 3082118X24 APM 1 Out Junction Panel TX Out 1
(underside)
10 3082118X08 ATCC Ant port of expansion rack APM 2 In For expansion racks only.

6866538D01-C 5-3
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

FROM
EXPANSION RACK
ATCC
9
STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

10

4A

6 -48V RTN
Motorola
CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
PARALLEL PARALLEL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL USER ALARM/CONTROL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

In Out Out In
2A -48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3

SITE REF OUT

2 1
X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

APM 2 APM 1 RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

1A 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

4
3A RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

3
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

2
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS102B

Figure 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling Diagram

5-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

Chassis Grounding
Chassis grounding refers to the ground strap connections between the equipment modules within
the equipment cabinet and the cabinet frame.
Table 5-3 identifies and Figure 5-3 shows the ground straps.

Table 5-3 Ground Straps

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on EAS Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
2 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on Site Controller Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
3 3082000X05 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on Base Radio Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
4 3082000X08 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on LNA RX Tray Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
5 3082000X24 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on Junction Panel Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
6 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud inside the Cavity Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet Combiner and lockwasher.
7 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
Reserved for Filter Tray or CMU.
Ground bus bar P/N 3182602Y03
Nut M6 for Ground P/N 0212022A04

6866538D01-C 5-5
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

5 B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

TO GROUND STUD 7
6
INSIDE THE ATCC

4
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

1
Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
BA
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
RTN
GPS
GPS

2
T
SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

2 GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX 1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT

EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX 1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT

EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX
RX 1
1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT

EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX 1
1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT

EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS031B

Figure 5-3 Chassis Grounding Diagram

5-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

DC Power Connections
DC power connections refer to power cabling between the Equipment Cabinet Power Distribution
Panel and the modules within the cabinet. Table 5-4 identifies and Figure 5-4 shows the DC power
connections.

Table 5-4 DC Power Connections

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082082X06 RFS3 connector on Power Mate-N-Lok power connectors on

Distribution Panel ATCC Logic Controller
2A 3082129X10 RFS1& RFS2 connector on Mate-N-Lok power connectors on For prime racks only.
Power Distribution Panel LNA I/O Board. See Detail A in Figure 5-4.
Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly.
One leg of cable is reserved for
CMU/Duplexer connection.
2B 3082129X07 RFS1& RFS2 connector on Mate-N-Lok power connectors on For expansion racks only.
Power Distribution Panel LNA I/O Board See Detail A in Figure 5-4.
3 3083609X04 CTRL A/EAS IMU Mate-N-Lok power connector on Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
connector on Power EAS and Mate-N-Lok power
Distribution Panel connector on Site Controller A
4 3082082X05 CTRL B connector on Power Mate-N-Lok power connector on
Distribution Panel Site Controller A
5 3083803X06 BR3&BR4 connector on DC connectors on BR 3 and BR 4 Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
Power Distribution Panel
6 3083803X07 BR1&BR2 connector on DC connectors on BR 1 and BR 2 Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
Power Distribution Panel

6866538D01-C 5-7
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

2A
2B

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3

FS RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

3 2A
4

2A
2B

LOCATED IN FRONT OF CABINET

6
-48V RTN
Motorola
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685
USER ALARM/CONTROL
CONTROLLER A
PARALLEL
CONTROLLER B
PARALLEL
CONTROL

RF2
RF1

RF3
SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL A
INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE

2A BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT

EX
BLACK
RED
EX

2B ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A PA IN

(REF)
ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

A RX 1
DC

RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

(-48V INPUT)
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

I/O BOARD (TOP VIEW)

TEBTS034B

Figure 5-4 DC Power Connections Diagram

5-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

5 MHz/1 PPS and GPS Antenna

Cabling
Table 5-5 identifies and Figure 5-5 shows the 5 MHz/1 PPS cabling and GPS antenna feed
cabling.

Table 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 5882741Y02 50 Ω termination.
2 3082363Y07 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS Out 1 Base Radio 1 5MHz/1PPS connector For prime racks only.
connector (underside) Terminate with 50 Ω loads if no
expansion at the Junction Panel.
3 3013943N29 BR-to-BR 5MHz/1PPS link (via BNC Y-adapters) Full BR complement shown.
Index 3 and Y-adapters are
secured to side rail for empty
rack positions. Place ESD Cap
(p/n 3883441X02).
4 3013943N29 Base Radio 4 5MHz/1PPS Site Ref Out 1 connector on Site
connector (via BNC Y-adapter) Controller A (via BNC Y-adapter)
5 3013943N29 Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC A Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC B
(via BNC Y-adapter) (via BNC Y-adapter)
6 3082363Y07 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS In 1 Base Radio 1 5MHz/1PPS connector For expansion racks only.
connector (underside)
7 3013943N45 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS Out 1 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS In 1 of For expansion racks only.
of prime rack expansion rack
11 3012028P31 Junction Panel GPS A GPS connector on Site Controller A
12 3012028P31 Junction Panel GPS B GPS connector on Site Controller B Redundant Site Controller
All cable-to-cable connections use BNC Y-adapters (P/N 5882669Y01), which are connected to the module
connectors or cables, as shown.

Each 5MHz/1PPS line of the TSC supports up to 12 Base Radios. At the beginning and the end of each line,
50 Ω terminations are needed.

6866538D01-C 5-9
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

1 In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1 5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2 Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2
/RX1-In /RX2-In /RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3 User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2 STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

6
12

11

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL RF#3
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

5
SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3 RX 3

4
GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

RX 1 RE 1 DC

RX 1
1 RE
DC

BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

3 3
GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

3 3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

RX 3 RX 3

3 3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX

ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

PRIME EXPANSION
TEBTS032B

Figure 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling Diagram

5 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

Ethernet Cabling
Table 5-6 identifies and Figure 5-6 shows the Ethernet cabling.

Table 5-6 Ethernet Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 5882741Y02 50 Ω termination.
2 3082363Y07 Junction Panel Ethernet Base Radio 1 Ethernet connector For prime racks only.
(Grounded) connector (underside) (via BNC Y-adapter) Terminate with 50 Ω loads if no
expansion at the Junction Panel.
3 3013943N29 BR-to-BR Ethernet link (via BNC Y-adapters) Full BR complement shown. Index
3 and Y-adapters are secured to
side rail for empty rack positions.
Place ESD Cap (p/n 3883441X02).
4 3013943N29 Base Radio 4 Ethernet connector 10B2-1 connector on Site
(via BNC Y-adapter) Controller A (via BNC Y-adapter)
5 3013943N29 10B2-1 connector on TSC A (via 10B2-1 connector on TSC B (via
BNC Y-adapter) BNC Y-adapter)
6 3082363Y07 Junction Panel Ethernet Isolated Base Radio 1 Ethernet connector For expansion racks only.
Ground In connector (underside) (via BNC Y-adapter)
7 3013943N45 Junction Panel Ethernet Junction Panel Ethernet Isolated For expansion racks only.
(Grounded) connector on prime Ground In connector on expansion
rack rack
All cable-to-cable connections use BNC Y-adapters (P/N 5882669Y01), which are connected to the module
connectors or cables, as shown.

6866538D01-C 5 - 11
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

1
In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1 5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2 Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2
/RX1-In /RX2-In /RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3 User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2 STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

2 6

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3

SITE REF OUT

2 1
4 X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

5
T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3 RX 3

RX 2
GROUN AC
RX 2
GROUN AC

1
1
DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

RX 3
3 RX 3
3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT OUT

RX 3
3 RX 3
3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT OUT

RX 3
3 RX 3
3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT OUT

PRIME EXPANSION
TEBTS033B

Figure 5-6 Ethernet Cabling Diagram

5 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

Site Controller/EAS Intercabling

Site Controller/EAS intercabling refers to the cabling between the Site Controller and the EAS
rear panel connectors. Table 5-7 identifies and Figure 5-7 shows the intercabling.

Table 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Intercabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3083499X03 Parallel connector on TSC A Controller A Parallel connector on

EAS
2 3083499X03 Parallel connector on TSC B Controller B Parallel connector on
EAS
4 3013943N29 Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC A Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC B
5 3013943N29 10B2-1 connector on TSC A 10B2-1 connector on TSC B
6 3082505Y12 10/100B-T connector on TSC A 10/100B-T connector on TSC B
7 3013943N29 Redundant connector on TSC A Redundant connector on TSC B
8 3084225N48 T1/E1-1 connector on Site T1/E1-1 connector on Site E1 cabling.
Controller A Controller B
9 5882669Y01 BNC 50 Ω Y-Adapter
10 5882741Y02 50 Ω termination.

1
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
MOTOROLA PARALLEL PARALLEL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
USER ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM RF2 RF3
Tanapa No.: CLN1685

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

5
-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1

X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
6
4
GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

8 7

10 9 TEBTS035_EAS2

Figure 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 13
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

E1 and X.21 Cabling

Table 5-8 identifies and Figure 5-8 shows the E1 and X.21 cabling.

Table 5-8 E1/X.21 cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082468Y02 T1/E1-1 connector on Site E1-120/X.21 A connector on the E1 cabling.

Controller A Junction Panel
2 5882449V01 E1 cabling.
T-Adapter modular, 8-pin, 2-jack to 1-
plug.
3 3084225N48 T1/E1-1 connector on Site T1/E1-1 connector on Site Controller E1 cabling.
Controller B A Redundant Site Controller.
4 3083751X06 X.21 connector on Site E1-120/X.21 B connector on X.21 cabling.
Controller A and X.21 Junction Panel Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly.
connector on Site Controller B

5 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

1 4

2
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1

3
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS-32_E1_X21

Figure 5-8 E1/X.21 Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 15
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections

The cabinet alarm connections use multi-connector wiring harness assembly (P/N 3083813X05)
that provides for daisy-chain connection of the various modules to the EAS. Table 5-9 identifies
and Figure 5-9 shows the harness connecting points.

Table 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections

Part Number3083813X05
Index Notes
Connecting Point

1 Alarm connector on Base Radio 1

2 Alarm connector on Base Radio 2
3 Alarm connector on Base Radio 3
4 Alarm connector on Base Radio 4
5 Alarm connector on ATTC
6 LNA power monitor DB-9 connector on RMC
7 DB-9 Connector on APM 1 In prime racks only connected to APM 1.
In expansion racks the APM 1 leg is connected to the cable
with P/N 3082467Y03 and strapped to the rack accessible
from the left side.
8 DB-9 Connector on APM 2 In prime racks the APM 2 leg is strapped close to APM 2
but not connected.
In expansion racks the APM 2 leg is strapped to the rack.

5 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

APM 2 APM 1
5

8 7

LOCATED IN FRONT OF CABINET

A
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
3
GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1
4

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

B 5MHZ/1 PPS A

4
A
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

(RFDS POWER) 5MHZ/1 PPS B

B
5MHZ/1 PPS A
5MHZ/1 PPS A

3
ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC

6
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

2
B 5MHZ/1 PPS A

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

B 5MHZ/1 PPS A

I/O BOARD (TOP VIEW)

TEBTS036B

Figure 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 17
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

Site Alarm Cabling

Table 5-10 identifies and Figure 5-10 shows the site alarm cabling.

Table 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082477Y03 Status connector on Power Alarm RF1 connector on Junction For prime racks only.
Distribution Panel Panel and LNA Alarm Expansion Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
RJ45 connector on I/O Board
2 3084225N02 LNA Standard Alarm RJ45 RF1 connector on EAS For prime racks only
connector on I/O Board
3 3082733X02 Shorting plug connects to Control Caution: If plug is not used, false alarms
connector on EAS will result.
4 3083892X05 User Alarm/Control connector User Alarm/Control connector on For prime racks only
on EAS Junction Panel
5 3082733X04 Shorting plug connects to RF2 and Caution: If plug is not used, false alarms
RF3 connectors on EAS and will result.
Alarm RF1 connector on Junction
Panel, if it is not used for alarms.
10 3084225N43 Alarm RF1 connector on LNA Standard Alarm RJ45 For expansion racks only
Junction Panel connector on I/O Board
11 3082129X03 Status connector on Power LNA Alarm Expansion RJ45 For expansion racks only
Distribution Panel connector on I/O Board
12 3082467Y03 For expansion racks only
The cable extends the APM 1 leg of the
Cabinet Alarm Harness, so it can be fed to
prime APM 2 (see Table 5-9, “Cabinet
Alarm Harness Connections,” on page 5-
16, Index 7).
13 3084225N43 Alarm RF1 connector on Alarm RF1 connector on Junction For expansion racks only
Junction Panel on prime racks Panel on expansion racks

5 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

13

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1 5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2 Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2
/RX1-In /RX2-In /RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

5 User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2 STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

12
10

11
1
4

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3

SITE REF OUT

2 1
X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
2
GPS

-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3

SITE REF OUT

2 1
5 X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3 RX 3

GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RE RX 1 RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

PRIME EXPANSION
TEBTS090B

Figure 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 19
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

RS-232 Cabling
The RS-232 Cabling described applies only to the Auto Tune Cavity Combiner. Table 5-11
identifies and Figure 5-11 shows the RS-232 cabling.

Table 5-11 RS-232 Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082467Y01 RS-232 connector on ATCC RS-232 connector on Base Radio 1

Control Board

5 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

LOCATED IN FRONT OF CABINET

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

1 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS089B

Figure 5-11 RS-232 Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 21
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

5 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 6

6Configuration and Testing

Setup and Testing Overview

The setup and testing procedures covered in this manual are intended to be used in conjunction
with the information provided in Chapter 7, “EBTS System Troubleshooting” and Chapter 3,
“EBTS Interface Commands”. Together, the troubleshooting solutions and testing procedures,
provide the necessary information to isolate failures to a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) or
Replaceable Part. This helps to keep system down-time to a minimum by quickly returning the
site to normal operation.

All suspected faulty FRUs should be shipped to a Motorola depot facility for servicing or repair.

MMI Commands

You must be familiar with Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands and their usage prior to
performing procedures in this chapter. Improperly applying MMI commands can result in
equipment damage.

Chapter 3, “EBTS Interface Commands” serves as a tutorial and reference for using the software
commands. If you are not totally familiar with using the commands, read Chapter 3, “EBTS
Interface Commands” before proceeding.

Service technicians can communicate with the EBTS through the use of MMI commands and a
service computer. MMI commands provide testing capabilities with access to alarm log files and
various diagnostic tests. MMI commands also provide a means to configure the Site Controller
and Base Radio(s) for intended operation, and to enable various system tests.
Two different command sets, Site Controller and Base Radio (BR), allow testing of the EBTS via
the MMI.
A select number of MMI commands are used in the procedures within this chapter. The complete
set of MMI commands, including both Site Controller and BR commands, are defined in Chapter
3, “EBTS Interface Commands”.

6866538D01-C 6-1
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Setup and Testing Procedures

The setup and test procedures in this manual are used to test the functionality of the EBTS and
help isolate failures to the module level. If a failure cannot be isolated after performing these tests,
refer to the tables in Chapter 11, “Backplane” for additional information.
The setup and testing procedures are divided into the following chapters:
• Site Controller Setup and Verification
• Equipment Cabinet Setup/Verification
• Conformance Testing
For Site Controller Indicators please refer to Table 8-2 on page 8-3.

6-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Site Controller Setup and Verification

The Site Controller setup and checkout procedures specify steps that verify operation within the
Site Controller. The Site Controller Verification consists of:

Section Page Description

Site Controller Test 6-3 Identifies all recommended test equipment for the Site
Equipment Controller Verification
Service Terminal Setup 6-4 Describes how to connect a service terminal
Site Controller Setup 6-4 Describes how to connect a service computer, and also how to
decompress and download the application code
E1 Connection Test 6-6 Describes how to perform X.21 loopback to test X.21 interface
and cabling
E1 Connection Test 6-6 Describes how to perform E1 loopback to test E1 interface and
cabling
EAS Alarm Checkout 6-7 Describes how to check for proper alarm system functioning
Site Reference Check 6-8 Describes how to check for proper SRI functioning
Optional Modem 6-10 Optionally, a modem may be connected to the Site Controller
Configuration serial port.

Site Controller Test Equipment

Table 6-1 lists the recommended Site Controller test equipment.

Table 6-1 Test Equipment for Site Controller Testing

Equipment Model/Type Supplier Description

Service Terminal VT100 or compatible† Locally procured Local service terminal

RS-232 Cable Locally procured Straight-through serial cable with
DB-9 connector that mates with
Site Controller “service access”
front panel connector
† A personal computer (PC) with VT100 emulation software may be used instead.

6866538D01-C 6-3
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Service Terminal Setup

This procedure assumes power is applied to the EBTS system but the Site Controller has not yet
been switched on. If power is not applied, perform the procedures in Chapter 4 - Final Checkout.
In the following procedures, whenever you are instructed to enter software commands they will
be presented in bold lettering. Enter all commands exactly as they appear. The command prompt
will precede the command, as in the following example.
Example: SC> help
1 Connect an RS-232 cable from the serial port on the service terminal to the serial port on the
front of the Site Controller.
2 Apply power to the service terminal.
After the service computer initialises, the screen will normally be blank.
3 Configure the service terminal’s RS-232 port with the parameters listed in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 RS-232 Port Configuration

Description Setting

Baud Rate 19200

Parity Bit none
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1

Site Controller Setup

If an EBTS or TSC is moved, it is important to clear the site location memory to force the first
restart at the new location to be a cold start.
To clear the site location enter the following command on the TSC terminal whilst the EBTS is
running in application mode:
site_location -reset
Then restart the site controller to allow calculation of it’s new location to commence
(site survey)

1 Start-up the service terminal.

2 Power up the Site Controller.
3 After the self-test is complete, verify that messages similar to the following appear on the
service terminal:

6-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Dimetra Site Controller

Firmware version axx.xx.xx
Software Part No. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
(C) Copyright 2001 Motorola LTd. All rights reserved
Unauthorised access prohibited

To enter configuration mode, ‘Return’ within 10 seconds:

4 Press the ‘Return’ key within 10 seconds. When prompted, enter your name and the proper
password.
5 The default password is motorola .
6 The SC> prompt is displayed on the service terminal once the correct password has been
entered.
7 At the SC> prompt, type: ver -h.
This returns version information of the Site Controller hardware and software.

Typing help will list all available commands in the Site Controller command set, prior to
downloading.

8 At the SC> prompt, type: test -all This tests that all of the peripheral components are present
and have been initialised correctly.
9 The following display should appear:

SC> test -all

X21 device driver successfully initialised
EAS detected O.K.
Ethernet device driver successfully initialised
Flash Filing System device driver successfully initialised
SRI/GPS device driver successfully initialised

The output will reflect the status of the currently selected site link driver, i.e. X.21 or E1.

If any device drivers are reported as “failed to initialise” or the EAS is “not detected”, then this
indicates a problem with that peripheral.
However, successful initialisation of a device does not guarantee that it is fully functional; further
tests are necessary to ensure this.
With the exception of the EAS test, the above tests are carried out upon power-up or reset. The
command simply reports the last status of the test. To actually re-run the tests, it is necessary to
reset the Site Controller.
10 Further Site Controller commands are available as described in Chapter 3, “EBTS Interface
Commands”. These may also be listed by typing help at the SC> prompt.

6866538D01-C 6-5
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

This procedure may be halted and re-started at any time by pressing the RESET pushbutton for
at least 2 seconds on the Site Controller front panel.

E1 Connection Test
The E1 connection test requires that the site controller is connected to an active E1 line.
The E1 tests the connection between the TSC and the CNE core router.
1 At the SC> prompt, type: loop -test
This will initiate the sending of packets to the core router, and the monitoring of the returned data.

Dual APM Test

The following procedure insures the correct configuration of the dual APM feature and BR to
APM mapping.
This test requires that dummy loads are connected to the antenna feeds.
1 With BRs de-keyed connect dummy load to each antenna output.
2 Reduce output power of BRs accordingly for dummy load.
3 Remove dummy load from one antenna, and insure correct BRs dekeyed.

Starting The Application Software

Within the Application mode, the EAS and SRI statuses are checked. Start the Application
software as follows:
1 Ensure that all Base Radios are powered off.
2 At the SC> prompt, type run
3 When prompted, enter your name and the proper password. (The default password is motorola.)
The SC) prompt is displayed (instead of the SC> prompt) on the service computer once the correct
password has been entered.

If an EBTS or TSC is moved, it is important to clear the site location memory to force the first
restart at the new location to be a cold start. To clear the site location enter the following command
on the TSC terminal whilst the EBTS is running in application mode:
site_location -reset
Then restart the site controller to allow calculation of it’s new location to commence (site survey.)

6-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

EAS Alarm Checkout

The following procedure verifies correct wiring of the alarms monitored by the Environmental
Alarm System.

Perform this procedure only after the Starting the Application Software procedure has been
performed. Service terminal must currently be displaying the SC) prompt in order to perform the
following procedure.

1 At the SC) prompt, type: status eas -Pn (where pN is the EAS plug number in the range P5-P10)
Information similar to the following is displayed on the service computer:

SC)status eas

Plug P9 Status
INPUT REF. DESCRIPTION STATE
4 Fire Alarm OK
6 Power Failure OK
7 Battery backup 1 failure OK
8 Battery backup 2 failure OK

OUTPUT REF. DESCRIPTION STATE

23 RFDS o/p 1 OFF
25 RFDS o/p 2 OFF

2 To verify a particular alarm, perform the proper action to trigger it.

For example, the following describes this verification.
2.1 Open the site entry door.
2.2 Type: status eas
The status of the Site Entry alarm changes to the alarm state.
2.3 Close the site door.
2.4 Type: status eas
The Site Entry alarm returns the OK condition.
3 Verify other alarms for proper wiring by triggering them as described above.

Some actions can trigger more than one alarm, such as switching off the main breaker to the Site
Controller. Other alarms are site-specific and may or may not be wired. These are generally more
difficult to trigger on a manual basis.

6866538D01-C 6-7
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Site Reference Check

Verify the GPS Receiver status as follows:

Perform this procedure only after Starting the Application Software. The service terminal must
currently be displaying the SC> prompt in order to perform the following procedure.

1 At the SC> prompt, type: status sri

Verify that:
• the GPS Training State is “Closely Trained.”
• the Free Run state is “False.”
The GPS LED will flash satellite tracking commences and will be fully on once GPS is fully
trained.
If satellite tracking is NOT ADEQUATE, make sure:
• the GPS receiver has been allowed enough time to locate the satellites (in extreme cases
this may take up to 2 hours)
• the GPS antenna cable is properly connected. If it is not, reconnect the cable properly and
then reset the Site Controller. If cable is found to be properly connected, the GPS antenna
is possibly faulty.
Refer to Chapter 7, “EBTS System Troubleshooting” for more information on troubleshooting
GPS

Do not attempt to make a resistance check of the GPS antenna. Damage to the active devices
within the antenna element may result.

Redundant Site Controller Check

This procedure verifies that the any redundant TSC in an EBTS is correctly configured and should
be able to take-over in the event of the active TSC failing.
In an EBTS with a redundant TSC either TSC A (upper TSC) or TSC B (lower TSC) may take
the role of the active TSC at power-up.

Configuration Mode Checks

1 Verify using TESS that both TSC's are configured with the same TSC and BRC code and
configuration files.
2 Verify using the MMI command 'id' that the uppermost TSC has identity 'A' and the lowermost
TSC has identity 'B'. These identities are used in reporting faults to the CNE and to then ensure
correct TSC identification. This command can also be used to configure the TSC identity if
required.
3 Verify using the 'force_active' command on the standby TSC (TSC with active LED off) that
the standby TSC can take control. The active LED should now illuminate. This check verifies
operation of the TSC interlock mechanism and interlock cable.

6-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

This check should be performed with both TSC’s in configuration mode.

4 Repeat the previous process with the other Site Controller

Application Mode Checks

1 From the Application mode MMI use the command 'status peer'. This command will verify
inter-TSC communication and provides a further check on the TSC configuration. The
expected output of this command is as follows:

Peer Status
Peer Health: Peer TSC responding and configured
Peer SC ID: B

2 Switch-over to the standby TSC can be verified by switching off the active TSC or using the
MMI reset command on the active TSC. This check should only be performed if loss of
operational service is acceptable.

Redundant BR Checks
In Dimetra IP systems the TSC may be configured to control a redundant BR to either provide
back-up Base Radio operation, in the event of a Base Radio failing, If configured this Base Radio
can also be switched in by the CNE to provide extra capacity. This feature is configured by the
EBTS Service Software (TESS). The redundant BR feature requires either an Auto Tune Cavity
Combiner (ATCC) or a hybrid combiner to operate, as the standby BR must be able to configure
itself to the radio frequency used by a failed BR. In systems with multiple ATCC's, minimum
channel separation must not only be maintained between channels on each ATCC, but also
between channels of all ATCC's. This allows the redundant BR to be able to replace any failed
BR and allows the redundant BR's ATCC to maintain correct channel separation. Note that, only
the last BR (highest position number) in the EBTS may be configured for redundant BR
operation.

Verification Checks
Switch-over to the standby BR may be precipitated by turning off one of the active operational
BRs.

This operation should only be performed if some loss of operational service is acceptable.

The status of each BR at the site may be obtained using one of the applications mode MMI
command 'status sc -all' or 'status br', e.g. to determine if any BR has failed.
Note that, a failed BR will remain replaced by the standby BR until the either the ZM requests a
reset of the standby BR position or the 'reset -br' MMI command is used to reset the standby BR
position.

6866538D01-C 6-9
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Optional Modem Configuration

Optionally, a modem may be connected to the Site Controller rear SERIAL port. In order to be
able to dial the modem and communicate with the Site Controller, the following configuration
must be performed. The commands shown are for the Motorola 3265 Fast modem. This
configuration need only be performed once and is stored as the default configuration in the
modem in case the modem is reset. The modem should be temporarily disconnected from the Site
Controller and connected to the serial port of the service computer via an RS-232 cable to perform
the configuration.
Configure the modem as follows:
1 Connect modem to the service computer using an RS-232 cable.

The RS-232 cable should be 25 pin male D-type for connection to the modem and 9 or 25 pin
female D-type for connection to the service computer. The cable should be straight through
(DCE-DTE) with at least the following lines connected: TX, RX, RTS, CTS, DSR, Signal
Ground, DCD, DTR.

2 Start-up the service terminal.

3 Type AT, then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the modem. If
no response is received, check that the modem has power connected, and that the modem is
correctly connected to the service terminal.
4 Type AT& F1 key, then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the
modem.
5 Type AT&D0E0Q2S0=1 (NB. This is specific to the Motorola Fast modem.) then press Enter
and verify that the “OK” response is received from the modem.
6 Type AT&W0 then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the modem.
7 Type AT&Y0, then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the
modem.
8 Reconnect the modem to the Site Controller rear SERIAL port and attempt to dial the modem
from a remote station.
9 The remote station should be able to communicate with the Site Controller, display the MMI
prompt, and display the output of commands entered.
The meanings of the above AT commands are shown below. If not using the recommended
modem, check your modem manual for the corresponding settings.

Table 6-3 AT Commands

AT Command Meaning

&F1 Load “factory Default” profile number (hardware handshaking)

E0 Echo off
&D0 Modem ignores DTR
Q2 Modem only displays result codes in Originate Mode. If the modem does
S0=1 Answer incoming calls after 1 ring

6 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Table 6-3 AT Commands (continued)

AT Command Meaning

&W0 Copy the current profile to Stored Profile 0

Y0 Use Stored Profile 0 as the power-up default

6866538D01-C 6 - 11
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Equipment Cabinet
Setup/Verification
The Equipment Cabinet setup and checkout procedures verify the operation of the Equipment
Cabinet and Base Radios. The Equipment Cabinet Verification consists of:

Section Page Description

Equipment Cabinet Test
Equipment
Base Radio Start-up Sequence
Selecting Base Radio Position
and Receivers
Displaying Base Radio
Alarms
Setting RX and TX
Frequencies
Checking Transmit Operation
Checking Receive Operation
Viewing the Transmit
Spectrum (optional)
6-12 Identifies all recommended test equipment for the
Equipment Cabinet Verification
6-13 Describes how to connect the service computer and start-up
the Base Radio
6-14 Describes how to select a Base Radio and its receivers using
MMI commands
6-15 Describes how to verify the alarm conditions of the Base
Radio
6-16 Describes how to program the Base Radio with the desired
receive and transmit frequencies
6-17 Describes how to verify proper transmit operation of the
Base Radio in a 2-4 channel system
6-20 Describes how to verify proper receive operation of the Base
Radio in a 2-4 channel system
6-24 Describes how to verify transmit operation through the use
of a spectrum display analyser. This is an optional procedure
in the Equipment Cabinet Verification.

Equipment Cabinet Test Equipment

Table 6-4 lists the recommended test equipment for the Equipment Cabinet procedures.
Equivalent equipment is acceptable.

Table 6-4 Test Equipment for Equipment Cabinet Testing

Equipment Model/Type Manufacturer Description

Service Terminal † VT100 Locally Procured Used to access and interface with
Site Controller and BR MMI
RS-232 Cable 0102611X03 Motorola Straight-through connecting cable
with DB-9 connector for BRC port
Coaxial Directional Coupler 3041-20 Narda Used for receive test signal injection
into duplex Tx/Rx antenna port
Circulator, 917-942 MHz 9C30-41 Ferrocom
Load 375 BNM Narda

6 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Table 6-4 Test Equipment for Equipment Cabinet Testing (continued)

Equipment Model/Type Manufacturer Description

RF Attenuator, 250 W, 10 dB 0180301E72 Motorola Used to attenuate receive signals for

testing
Rubidium Frequency PRFS Ball/Efratom Used as a frequency standard for
Standard (or 2008) (UCT) receive test
Signal Generator 3660 Anritsu (HP) Used for checking receive operation
(or ESG
w/UN4)
Spectrum Analyser Locally Procured Observing transmit signal and filter
bandwidth and power
Miscellaneous Cabling and Locally Procured Used to connect the signal generator
Connectors to the antenna ports
†Computer running suitable terminal emulation software (e.g., Procomm or equivalent) may be used in
place of VT100.

Base Radio Start-up Sequence

The following procedure assumes that test software resident in the BRC flash memory is being
used.
1 Connect the RS-232 port on the service computer to the SERVICE ACCESS port located on
the front of BRC.
2 Apply power to the BR and observe the service computer for memory self-test indication.
When the BR requests any key to be pressed, press “X” then return.
3 On the BRC, verify the condition of the LEDs (see Figure 6-1) for each Base Radio, as listed
in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 Base Radio LED Indications

LED Colour Normal Indication

BR Green Flashing
PS Red Off
EX Red Off
PA Red Off
CTL Red Off
R1 Red Off
R2 Red Off
R3 Red Off
Refer to the Controls and Indicators section in the Chapter 11, “Base Radio” for
conditions relating to the LEDs listed above.

6866538D01-C 6 - 13
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

SERVICE ACCESS B R P S E X P A C T L R 1 R 2 R 3 RESET CONTROL

EBTS316
022800JNM

Figure 6-1 BRC Indicators

4 Verify the following LED conditions on the Base Radio Controller:

• All BRC LEDs flash 3 times upon initial power-up.
• BR LED flashes quickly when BR is waiting for code to be downloaded from Site
Controller.
• All BRC LEDs scroll during code downloading process.
• BR LED flashes slowly when BR is de-keyed.
• BR LED is solid when BR is keyed.
5 On the Power Supply module of the Base Radio, verify that the green LED is lit.

Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers

During equipment cabinet setup, MMI is used to:
• Set the position of the Base Radios within the equipment cabinet.
• Select a particular Base Radio. This is required when assigning transmit and receive
frequencies to a particular Base Radio.
• Select a receiver complement within a Base Radio.
These operations are described below. Refer to Chapter 3, “EBTS Interface Commands” for
detailed information on using the MMI commands.

Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position

The set position command programs the position number where a Base Radio is mounted within
a selected cabinet.
The set cabinet command programs the cabinet number where the Base Radio is mounted. For
single cabinet EBTS, this is set to “1”. For multiple cabinet EBTS, the Base Radios in the first
cabinet are set to “1”; the Base Radios in the second cabinet are set to “2”, etc.
Base Radio designation starts from the bottom of the cabinet, with the lowest Base Radio
designated as “1”. For example, a cabinet with four Base Radios would have the lowest Base
Radio being designated as “1”, and the highest being designated as “4”.
This command would also be used in accessing a particular Base Radio within the cabinet.

6 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Table 6-6 Example: 8 Base Radio Omni-EBTS

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2

Cabinet = 1, Position = 4 Cabinet = 2, Position = 4

Cabinet = 1, Position = 3 Cabinet = 2, Position = 3
Cabinet = 1, Position = 2 Cabinet = 2, Position = 2
Cabinet = 1, Position = 1 Cabinet = 2, Position = 1

Selecting a Receiver Complement for a Base Radio

The set rx_fru_config command sets which receivers should be present in a selected Base Radio.
The command has provision for all possible complements of three receivers.
The set rx_mode command selectively enables any combination of individual receivers within a
selected Base radio, while disabling any receiver that was not specifically selected.

Displaying Base Radio Alarms

In the Site Controller procedures, the Base Radios were connected to the Site Controller and
received downloaded test software via the BR-Site Controller Ethernet link. If necessary, reset the
Base Radio to obtain the password prompt, or enter the configuration mode of the BR.
1 When prompted, type the proper password.
After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola .

Enter login password:

BRC>

Motorola recommends changing the default password once proper operation of the equipment has
been verified.

2 At the BRC> prompt, type: set alarm_reports off

This command disables synchronous alarm reporting.

BRC> set alarm_reports off

set ALARM REPORTS TRACE to OFF in RAM

3 Type: get alarms

6866538D01-C 6 - 15
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

This command displays any outstanding alarm conditions. Alarms are handled as in the
following examples.
If any alarms are detected, they would be displayed on the service computer, for example:

BRC> get alarms

[brc fru warning]
[gps failure]

If no alarms are present during normal operation, this message is displayed:

BRC> get alarms

NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED

Setting RX and TX Frequencies

Base Radio frequencies are factory set to a default receive and transmit frequencies. In some
instances, the Base Radio(s) may be configured to other frequencies per customer request.

Do not transmit to an antenna under any circumstance unless those frequencies are licensed.

Within the RF subsystem of the Dimetra EBTS, several variations of a given Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) may exist in which each variation corresponds to a specific frequency range. Any
receive or transmit frequencies assigned to a Base Radio via a command must conform to any
existing hardware constraints.

Perform the following procedure if you know the actual frequencies required. Otherwise, use the
default frequencies.

Any frequencies selected using these commands will be over written by the frequencies in the
configuration file held in the Site Controller upon reset of the Base Radio.

1 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey

This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

2 Type: set rx_freq XXX.XXXXX to set the receive frequency.

XXX.XXXXX represents the desired frequency in MHz.

6 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Example:

BRC> set rx_freq 917.0125

set RECEIVE FREQUENCY to 917.0125 MHz in RAM

Type: set tx_freq XXX.XXXXX to set the transmit frequency.

XXX.XXXXX represents the desired frequency in MHz
Example

BRC> set tx_freq 932.0125

set TRANSMIT FREQUENCY to 932.0125 MHz in RAM

Checking Transmit Operation

The following procedures verify the transmission from antennas for a cavity combining RF
Distribution System.

Do not transmit to an antenna under any circumstance unless those frequencies are licensed.
Do not key any base radio with the Signal Generator directly connected to a Tx antenna port.
Damage to the generator will result.

Prior to performing the procedure for cavity combining transmit operation, perform the cavity
tuning procedure. This procedure is described in Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)”.

1 Connect the service computer into the local service port of the bottom Base Radio (BR1)
within the Equipment Cabinet and log on.
2 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

The following command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on
licensed frequencies or into a dummy load.

3 At the BRC> prompt, type:

set tx_power 80
This command sets the transmitter output to maximum rated output.

BRC> set tx_power xx

WORKING...
TRANSMITTER KEYED:49.92 watts

6866538D01-C 6 - 17
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

The following three commands will only give an indication of the link from the BR to the isolator
on the input of the Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC).

Use the ATC GET CAV_STATUS n command instead.

4 At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwr

This command returns the value of forward power as measured from the RF Power Amplifier.
Verify that the returned value meets the specifications of Table 6-7.

BRC> get fwd_pwr

FORWARD POWER is 39 watts [48.69 dbm]

5 At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwr

This command returns the value of reflected power as measured from the RF Power Amplifier.
Verify that the returned value meets the specifications of Table 6-7.

BRC> get ref_pwr

REFLECTED POWER is 2 watts [31.9 dbm]

6 At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswr

This command returns the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF Power
Amplifier. Verify that the returned value meets the specifications of Table 6-7.

BRC> get vswr

VSWR is 1.4:1

The reported VSWR should always be good, due to the isolator on the input of the ATCC. If the
reported VSWR is too high, this would indicate a faulty ATCC isolator.

7 At the BRC> prompt, type: get wattmeter

This command returns the forward and reverse power readings, and calculates the VSWR
from the power monitor located in the RFDS. Verify that the returned value meets the
specifications of Table 6-7.

This command is functional only on the bottom BR.

6 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

BRC> get wattmeter

FORWARD POWER AT WATTMETER is 26.3 watts
REFLECTED POWER AT WATTMETER is 0 watts
WATTMETER VSWR is 1.1:1

Table 6-7 Transmit Level Specifications

Function Tolerance 80 Watt PA

Forward Power Greater than 67 Watts

Reflected Power Less than 7 Watts
VSWR Less than 2.4:1 ratio
Wattmeter Forward Power Greater than 17.8 Watts
Wattmeter Reflected Power Less than 4.5 Watts

Refer to Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)” for figuring the transmit path loss when
using multiple channels in a single Equipment Cabinet.

8 At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarms

This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.

BRC> get alarms

NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED

If the get alarms condition displays alarms, refer to Chapter 7, “EBTS System Troubleshooting”
for corrective actions.

9 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey

This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

10 Proceed to the “Checking Receive Operation” procedure.

6866538D01-C 6 - 19
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Checking Receive Operation

Receive operation test procedures must be performed on each Base Radio. Perform sensitivity
and Bit Error Rate (BER) floor measurements for each receiver within the Base Radios. Perform
the test as follows:

Prior to performing the procedure for cavity combining receive operation, perform the receiver
equalisation procedure. This procedure is described in Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System
(RFDS)”.

1 Connect the service computer to the local service port of the bottom Base Radio (BR1) and
log on.
The service port connector is located on the front of the Base Radio Controller module. The
default password is motorola .

Motorola recommends changing the default password once proper operation of the equipment has
been verified.

2 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey

This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

RF energy hazard. Be sure the dekey command has been issued to all Base Radios in the cabinet
to prevent injury while disconnecting and connecting antennas.

Do not key any base radio with the Signal Generator directly connected to a Tx antenna port.
Damage to generator will result.

3 Set Signal Generator to OFF.

Steps 4 through 6 assume signal generator used is as specified in Table 6-4. If alternate equivalent
equipment is used, perform steps 4 through 6, as applicable.

4 Connect Frequency Standard 10 MHz OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.

5 Connect other end of the attenuator to the 10 MHz REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT
connector on the Signal Generator.
6 Set the Signal Generator to EXT REF mode.
7 Set Signal Generator to ON.
8 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx_freq

6 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

This command displays the receive frequency for the current Base Radio. The message
appears as:

BRC> get rx_freq

RECEIVE FREQUENCY is 917.0125 MHz

9 Set the Signal Generator as follows:

9.1 Set generator frequency to the receive frequency determined in the previous step.
9.2 If using type-T1 (TETRA format) signal, configure the generator for the uplink
channel type to be tested (i.e., 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11). (Types 7 through 11 are available at
the BR.)
All receivers within a Base Radio have the same receive frequency and channel type.

If required, a TTL-level trigger signal for use by the generator is available on pin 9 of the BRC
DB-9 service port.

10 Disconnect the antenna cable connected to RX1 connector on Junction Panel. Connect the
Signal Generator output to RX1 connector.
Antenna connections are accessed from the top rear of the RF Distribution System as shown
in Figure 6-2.

RX1 DIVERSITY RECEIVE

ANTENNA CABLE

RX2 DIVERSITY RECEIVE

TX ANTENNA CABLES ANTENNA CABLE

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2

/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

TEBTS022B

Figure 6-2 Antenna Connections

11 At the BRC> prompt, type: set rx_mode 1

This command enables only antenna/receiver 1 while disabling the remaining
antenna/receivers. Repeat this step for all Base Radios within the cabinet.

BRC>set rx_mode 1
set RECEIVER 1 to ENABLED in RAM

12 Disconnect antenna connection at Junction Panel TX OUT connector. Connect a 250 Watt
dummy load to TX OUT connector.
13 At the BRC> prompt, configure set tetra_format nnnnnn for the configuration to be tested.

6866538D01-C 6 - 21
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Refer to the “Configuring Test Signal Types” section earlier in this chapter for instructions on
using the set tetra_format command.

Sensitivity Measurement
For the following tests, make sure the Signal Generator is set to the same frequency as displayed
by the get rx_freq command.
1 With the receiver set up for the test as above, set the Signal Generator to generate the test
signal at an output level of -115 dBm at the RX1 connector. (This must take into account the
cable loss (dB) between the Signal Generator and the EBTS.)
2 At the BRC> prompt, type: key
Observe that the BR is producing full power.
3 At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_test_mode T1
4 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rssi 2 100
This command performs a Bit Error Rate test on the received signal from the Signal Generator.
The example shown below illustrates sample values. Verify that the tolerance levels are within
the specifications listed.
To pass the receive sensitivity test, the BER must be less than 3% (3.0e+00%) on each line of
the displayed results.

BRC> get rssi 2 100

Starting RSSI monitor for 2 repetitions averaged each 100
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER SyncMiss

dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- --------- ---------
100 -115.5 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -127.0 1.826e+00 0.000e+00
200 -115.5 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -127.0 1.701e+00 0.000e+00

BER Floor Measurement

1 With the receiver set up for the test above, set the Signal Generator to generate the test signal
at an output level of -85 dBm, taking into account the cable loss (dB) between the Signal
Generator and the EBTS.
2 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rssi 1 1000
This command performs a Bit Error Rate test on the received signal from the Signal Generator.
The example shown below illustrates sample values. Verify that the tolerance levels are within
the specifications listed.

6 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

To pass the BER floor test, the Bit Error Rate must be less than 0.01% (1.0e-02%) on each
line of the displayed results.

BRC> get rssi 1 1000

Starting RSSI monitor for 2 repetitions averaged each 1000
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER SyncMiss

dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- --------- ---------
1000 -85.0 -127.0 -127.0 12.4 -127.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00

3 Move the service computer to the next Base Radio and repeat the steps listed in the
“Sensitivity Measurement” and “BER Floor Measurement” procedures for each Base Radio
in the cabinet. Remember to verify the correct receive frequency for each Base Radio.
4 Disconnect generator from RX1 connector on Junction Panel. Reconnect antenna to RX1
connector on Junction Panel.

Checking BER of Receiver 2

The following procedure describes enabling receiver 2 for sensitivity and BER floor testing. This
procedure applies to both two branch and three branch diversity sites.
1 Disconnect the antenna connection from the RX2 connector on Junction Panel. Connect the
Signal Generator output to RX2 connector on Junction Panel.
2 Move the service computer to the bottom Base Radio (BR1).
3 At the BRC> prompt, type: set rx_mode 2
This command enables only antenna/receiver 2 while disabling the remaining
antenna/receivers. Repeat this step for all Base Radios within the cabinet.

BRC>set rx_mode 2
set RECEIVER 2 to ENABLED in RAM

4 Repeat the steps listed in the “Sensitivity Measurement” and “BER Floor Measurement”
procedures for each Base Radio in the cabinet, substituting RX2 for RX1.
5 Move the service computer to the bottom Base Radio (BR1).
6 At the BRC> prompt, type: set rx_mode 12
This command enables all antennas/receivers in the Base Radio.

BRC>set rx_mode 12
set RECEIVER 1 to ENABLED in RAM
set RECEIVER 2 to ENABLED in RAM

7 Move the service computer to the next Base Radio and repeat step 6 for each Base Radio in
the cabinet.
8 When procedure for all Base Radios has been completed, at the BRC> prompt, type: dekey

6866538D01-C 6 - 23
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

9 Disconnect the service computer from the last Base Radio when complete.
10 Disconnect generator from RX2 connector on Junction Panel. Reconnect antenna cable to
Junction Panel RX2 connector.
11 Disconnect dummy load from Junction Panel TX OUT connector. Reconnect antenna cable
to TX OUT connector.

Viewing the Transmit Spectrum (optional)

The transmit spectrum can be viewed on the Spectrum Analyser. Perform the following procedure
to view the transmitted signal spectrum.
1 Connect a suitable test cable between the Spectrum Analyser input and the monitor port on
the isolator/load of the desired cavity. (Monitor port is BNC connector labelled “O/P”.)

The following command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on
licensed frequencies or into a dummy load.

2 At the BRC> prompt, type:

• set tx_power 80
This command sets the transmitter output to maximum rated output.

BRC> set tx_power 50

WORKING...
TRANSMITTER KEYED:49.92 watts

BRC>

Figure 6-3 shows the transmitted signal on the Spectrum Analyser.

6 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

0.0

-10.0

-20.0

-30.0

-40.0

-50.0

dB
-60.0

-70.0

-80.0

-90.0

-100.0

-110.0

-120.0

932.950

932.962

932.975

932.987

933.000

933.012

933.025

933.037

933.050
Frequency, MHz
RBW = 300 Hz Span = 0.10 MHz

TEBTS062B

Figure 6-3 Spectrum Analyser Display of Transmitted Signal

3 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey

This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

4 Repeat this procedure for each Base Radio.

VSWR Alarm Setting

The BR should de-key once the measured VSWR is above a specified alarm threshold.

Choose an Appropriate Value

The value used should be 0.5 greater than the value read for normal operation. To find the correct
value of VSWR use the following BR MMI command:

BRC> get w

If the resulting value is greater than 2.4 then consult the troubleshooting section of this manual.
To set the value of the external wattmeter VSWR alarm threshold refer to page 3-72.

6866538D01-C 6 - 25
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Conformance Testing
This section describes a number of MMI commands essential to the operation of a Dimetra EBTS
for ETSI Conformance testing and general field testing as well as troubleshooting. A short
description of each command is given as well as two examples of how the commands are to be
used. Other sections in this manual contain specific test procedures; this section is intended as a
tutorial and to provide a background into MMI operation.

Site Controller Operation (RF Conformance Testing)

This section describes setting up the Site Controller to serve as a frequency reference to the Base
Radio(s) for purposes of RF Conformance Testing. For purposes of RF Conformance Testing, the
Site Controller host microprocessor will run a version of application software that will be
configured to track and lock onto Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites. The Site Controller
will discipline a 5 MHz frequency source to GPS, as well as recover a 1 Pulse-Per-Second (PPS)
timing signal. The 5 MHz and 1 PPS signals are multiplexed onto a single coaxial cable and
distributed to each BR of the EBTS.
The 5 MHz and 1 PPS signals are the frequency reference for all EBTS signal processing and
system timing. If the Site Controller is not set up as described below, all RF transmissions and
receptions will be as much as 2 kHz off frequency. Therefore, it is imperative to configure the Site
Controller for proper GPS reception before any further RF tests are performed. The procedures
described below assume that Site Controller Application Software has been properly loaded into
the Site Controller.
The Site Controller has an MMI available through the front panel “Service Access” DB-9
connector using a null modem cable. A communications package such as Procomm or Smartcom
is required to be running on the service computer. The BAUD rate is 19200. For the purposes of
establishing proper GPS operation, no user actions within the Site Controller MMI are required
to configure the Site Controller. The MMI “Service Access” connector is available for observing
the GPS receiver activity, and observing that the receiver has acquired and locked onto the GPS
satellites. The 5 MHz monitor port (“Mon”) on the Site Controller front panel is available for
externally monitoring and measuring the 5 MHz frequency reference.
Perform the following steps to bring the Site Controller GPS on line:
1 Make certain GPS antenna(s) are properly connected and installed as described in Chapter 4,
“EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation”.
2 Have the service computer connected to the Site Controller MMI.

Make certain that the Site Controller is the first module to be powered-up. Base Radio(s) Power
switches should be OFF at this point.

3 On the Site Controller, set the Power switch to ON.

4 Observe on the service computer that several self-tests are completed.
5 Execute the status sri command and observe that the GPS receiver is actively tracking several
satellites.

6 - 26 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Upon initial start-up of the GPS receiver, it may take as much as 25 minutes for the system to
completely acquire and lock the Site Controller to GPS.

6 On the Site Controller, observe that the “GPS” green LED indicate that the Site Controller
GPS receiver has successfully acquired and locked onto GPS.
7 When acquire/lock is verified, proceed to the “Base Radio MMI Access” procedure.

Base Radio MMI Access

The BR MMI is accessed using a service computer connected to the BRC front panel DB-9
connector (service port) via a null modem cable. A communications package such as Procomm
or Smartcom is required to be running on the service computer. The Baud rate is 19200; frame is
no parity, 8 bits, 1 stop bit.

Configuration Mode Access

Upon power up or reset, the BR will go through some memory tests and then prompt the user to
press any key within 10 seconds to get into the test mode.

When prompted, pressing a key within 10 seconds must be done in order to perform the various
tests described in this chapter.

1 Connect the RS-232 port on the service computer to the STATUS connector located on the
front of BRC.
2 Apply power to the BR and observe the service computer for memory self-test indication.
3 When the BR requests any key to be pressed, press return.
The service computer display shown below appears during the 10-second period waiting for
test mode entry.

Base Radio Controller

Version R07.00.18
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
1999, 2000, 2001, 2002
Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.

Ethernet Test: passed

Running from boot code area

To enter configuration mode, hit any key within 10 seconds:

After 10 seconds, the BR will display the following:

6866538D01-C 6 - 27
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Starting BRC Registration

Waiting for Registration

If the 10-second period passes without pressing any key, the BR will display an indication that it
is waiting for a download of application code. If this happens, press the Reset button on the BR
to get back to the 10-second opportunity to go into test mode.

Upon entering the test mode, the BR will continue with some self-tests for several seconds and
then display a password prompt, as shown below. Entering motorola as the password will result
in the BRC> prompt being displayed, at which point Base Radio MMI commands can be
executed.

Entering help at the prompt will list all available commands.

Base Radio Controller

Version R07.00.18–TETRA-BRC-ROM
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
1999, 2000, 2001, 2002
Motorola, Inc. Unauthorized Access Prohibited
Unauthorized Access Prohibited
DSP bootloader complete
Enter login password: motorola
LOGIN: <FIELD>
BRC>
BRC>

Transmit and Receive Frequency Setting

Commands
BR frequencies are configured with the set tx_freq nnn.nnnn and set rx_freq nnn.nnnn
commands, where nnn.nnnn is the desired frequency in MHz. These frequency settings are stored
in non-volatile memory.

Keying Base Radios and Setting Power Levels

Some commands executed during Conformance Testing will bypass normally available alarms
and protection associated with normal EBTS operation.
Therefore, it is imperative to adhere to all cautionary information and follow instructions exactly
as written in the following procedure.

6 - 28 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

There are two MMI commands required to key a BR to a desired power level: set
default_tx_power nn and key.
The key command sets the BR to use a default_tx_power parameter for its target power. This
default level may be modified using the set default_tx_power nn command, where nn may range
from 5 to 80Watts. This default power level is stored in non-volatile memory in the BRC until
changed using the set default_tx_power command. The BR will come from the factory set for the
highest available power (80 Watts).
Execution of the dekey command stops all RF transmissions and sets the tx_test_mode to stop.

Set default_tx_power nn bypasses all internal checks and alarms. The BR where the command is
executed shall be connected to a dummy load and not an antenna.
You must check and ensure that no existing alarm conditions exist prior to executing this
command.

Two wattmeters are available in the Dimetra EBTS for diagnostics purposes. The first wattmeter
is located within the PA at its output. It is accessed using the get fwd_pwr command. This
command reports the measured power at the output of the PA. Generally, an output of 80 Watts is
required at this point to achieve 25 Watts at the antenna port of the EBTS. The second wattmeter
uses the power monitor located in the RFDS. It is accessed with the get wattmeter command. This
wattmeter is only available on the bottom BR (number one) of the EBTS. The power levels
reported with the get wattmeter command consist of the composite power from all keyed Base
Radios in the EBTS; one keyed BR will report approximately 25 Watts, while four keyed radios
will report approximately 100 Watts.The actual power level of the APM is the output power of
the antenna plus 1 db power loss in the duplex filter.

Configuring Test Signal Types

The Dimetra BR is capable of transmitting and receiving several different types of test signals.
Several MMI commands are available to configure the BR for these test signals. The first
command, set tetra_format, configures the BR to transmit and receive signals per the ETS300-
394 TETRA standard. The set tetra_format command is defined as:
set tetra_format MCC MNC CC downlink uplink trigger ms_pwr acc_prm
The set tetra_format variables and their definitions are listed in Table 6-8. Default settings are also
listed.

Table 6-8 set tetra_format variables

Variable (Definition) Setting

MCC (mobile country code) default= 0

MNC (mobile network code)
CC (colour code)
default= 0
1 to 63; default= 1
(In the Anritsu 3660 generator, the two least significant bits should
always be 1)
Example:
cc=1 => Anritsu cc = 7
cc=3 => Anritsu cc = F

6866538D01-C 6 - 29
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Table 6-8 set tetra_format variables (continued)

Variable (Definition) Setting

downlink = 1 (TCH 7.2) (default; also used for reception of

channel type 9 (STCH))
= 4 (TCH 2.4)
= 31 (non-scrambled TCH 7.2 (Anritsu cc= 0))
uplink = 7 (TCH 7.2) (default)
= 8 (SCH/F)
= 10 (TCH 2.4)
= 11 (SCH/HU+SCH/HU)
= 31 (non-scrambled TCH 7.2 (Anritsu cc= 0))
trigger = off – no trigger (default)

= slot – triggers every slot

= mframe – triggers at start of frame 1 of each 18 frames.

(This trigger is specifically designed for the
Anritsu 3660 TETRA generator.)

= frame – triggers at start of frame 1 of each frame

(actual timing includes a 64-symbol pretrigger)
mobile power = 001 15 dBm default (will default to 15 dBm if this field is
omitted)
access parameter = 0000 -53 dBm default (will default to -53 dBm if this field is
omitted)

Example:
set tetra_format 0 0 1 1 7 mframe
This command configures the BR to:
• scramble using a colour code of 1
• transmit a Type 1 TCH 7.2 downlink
• receive a Type 7 TCH 7.2 uplink
• put a multi-frame trigger on external trigger pin 9 of the service connector of the BRC
• set mobile power to 15 dBm
• set the access parameter to -53 dBm

Once the format has been set, the key command may be issued. When the transmitter has achieved
the default power level the set tx_test_mode command may be issued to set the transmitter and
receiver to T1 format. The T1 format configuration is set with the set tetra_format command. The
set tx_test_mode command is defined as:
set tx_test_mode <T1 stop exit>

6 - 30 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

The set tx_test_mode variables are listed below.

Table 6-9 set tx_test_mode variables

Variable Setting

T1 (Tetra framed) Tetra Framed

When set, places TX path from DSP to downlink. (If tetra_framed was not sent
before tx_test_mode, station defaults to:
downlink= 1
uplink= 7
trigger= off
colour code= 1)
RX path to DSP defaults to uplink= Null

tetra_format needs only be sent once; the BRC will

“remember” for all following tx_test_mode commands.

stop no samples to the Tranlin from the DSP

exit samples with zero amplitude to the Tranlin from the DSP

If the DC power to the station is cycled or a reset is executed, any setup using the tetra_format
and tx_test_mode commands will be lost. These commands will then revert back to their default
conditions.

Receiver Testing Methods

The BR will only properly receive a TETRA formatted signal if the tetra_format command has
been set, the tx test mode has been set to T1, and the uplink signal that is to be received is correctly
timed per ETS300-394. (The T1 mode does not require that the transmitter be keyed to test the
receiver, although it may be keyed if desired.) Timing is required such that the uplink slot is
received precisely 2 slots after the corresponding downlink slot has been transmitted.
Receiver testing is achieved in two ways, as follows:
• Once the BR is in T1 mode, the TETRA receiver is functioning per the ETS300-394
standard. Recovered data is available on the DB-9 RS-232 test connector located on the
rear of the BR being tested. This data may be analysed for BER and MER performance
using a ETSI-compliant TETRA test connector analyser.
• A second means which does not require ETSI-compliant analyser is available via the
MMI. When a get rssi command is issued, recovered data will be analysed by the
microprocessor within the BR. BER and MER will be reported to the service computer
along with the receive signal level for each active diversity receiver. When the get rssi
command is issued, the ETSI test connector activity is suspended until the get rssi action
has completed its report.

6866538D01-C 6 - 31
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

The get rssi command is defined as follows:

get rssi reports samples

Table 6-10 get rssi command

Variable Definition

reports reports = the desired number of reports that is to be displayed to the service computer.
Range is 1 to 10000.
samples samples = the number of frames worth of data to be averaged into each report. One
frame of data is 2040 bits. Range is 1 to 1000.

When channel types 8 (SCH/F), 9 (STCH), and 10 (SCH/HU) are tested, MER is actually
reported even though the get rssi command will return a display as “BER”.

Example Test Setups Using Commercially Available Generators

Test Setup for T1 Test Signal

The following procedure verifies receive hardware functionality and downlink/uplink using a
generator configured to produce a TETRA uplink type 7 TCH7.2 signal with scrambling. The
generator is configured as follows:
• country colour code/scrambling code= 1
• triggering= frame triggering
• delay= 128 bits (64 symbol BR pretrigger)
• output level= -85 dBm

In this example, the EBTS is a four-channel cavity combined system. BR #1 is already set for
940.0125 MHz TX frequency and 925.0125 MHz Rx frequency. Default power setting of 80W is
used.
1 Terminate Junction Panel TX ANT port with a 250 W load.
2 Connect signal generator RF output to Junction Panel RX1 port.
3 Using a suitable test connector, make breakout leads for pin 9 of the DB-9 connector on the
front panel of the BRC and ground. These will be connected to the Signal Generator trigger
input.
4 Execute sys_gain and set to on.
5 Execute set tetra_format and set variables as follows:
set tetra_format 0 0 1 1 7 frame
This results in the BR transmitting a Type 1 TCH7.2 downlink with a scrambling code of 1
and uplink information on the control slot (Frame 18 slot 1) set for Type 7 TCH7.2 uplink with
a colour code of 1. The BR receiver will be set to receive a Type 7 TCH7.2 uplink with a
colour code of 1, and frame triggering will be output on pin 9 of the BRC DB-9 connector.
6 Key the BR using the key command.

6 - 32 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

7 Observe the following:

BRC> key
WORKING...
TRANSMITTER KEYED: 79.72 watts

BRC>

8 Observe output of the BR using the get fwd_pwr command. The output should be
approximately 80 W.
9 Observe approximately 25 Watts at the output of the EBTS with either the external wattmeter,
the get wattmeter command, or a commercially available powermeter.
The set tx_test_mode T1 command changes both the transmitter and receiver over such that
TETRA framed signals are being transmitted and the receiver is configured to process a
TETRA uplink as defined with the set tetra_format command. The trigger is also functioning
as set with the tetra_format command.
Assuming the signal generator trigger is timed properly, the recovered data will be appearing at
the output of the ETSI-compliant test connector at the rear of the BR. Execution of get rssi 10 1
will result in BER being computed within the BRC and displayed on the service computer as
follows:

BRC> get rssi 10 1

Starting RSSI monitor for 10 repetitions averaged each 1
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER SyncMiss

dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- --------- ---------
1 -85.4 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
2 -85.3 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
3 -84.7 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
4 -84.7 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
5 -84.6 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
6 -84.2 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
7 -84.3 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
8 -84.5 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
9 -84.6 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
10 -84.7 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00

6866538D01-C 6 - 33
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

2040 bits are tested per report. Executing a get rssi 2 100 results in 2 reports with 204000 bits
being tested per report:

BRC> get rssi 2 100

Starting RSSI monitor for 2 repetitions averaged each 100
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER SyncMiss

dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- --------- ---------
100 -84.5 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
200 -84.5 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -85.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00

6 - 34 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Upgrading TSC Software and

Configuration Files
This section gives detailed instructions on how to upgrade the Site Controller software and
configuration files on a site with dual (redundant) Site Controllers.
The procedure differs according to whether the original software is version TSC_PR3_APP-
x05.31.64 or later. The six digits in the version label are compared from left to right; for example,
a label ending with 05.32.01 is later than 05.31.64.
Separate procedures are also given below for performing the upgrade using
• the Software Download Manager (SWDLM) remotely, or
• the BTS Service Software locally at the site.

In this section the following terms are used

“Download” means:
• download and
• set the file(s) to be used next after reset.

It is not possible to successfully remotely upgrade the configuration files only, without upgrading
the associated application to version TSC_PR3_APP-x05.31.64 or later.

Upgrade - Case 1
From a TSC Software Version
• Pre TSC_PR3_APP-x05.31.64
to
• TSC_PR3_APP-x05.31.64 or Later.

Using SWDLM

Assumptions:
The site has a TSC A and a TSC B.

The SWDLM can only download/reset the currently active TSC, so the distinction between the
two TSCs is arbitrary.

6866538D01-C 6 - 35
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Procedure 6-1 How to Upgrade TSCs Using SWDLM

Active TSC at start of Standby TSC at start of

Step Notes
procedure procedure

1 Download new application

only.

2 Reset To switch to other TSC.

3 Download new
application.
Download any new
config files.

4 Reset To switch to other TSC.

5 Download any new config

files.

6 Reset Only required if

downloading config
files.
To switch to other TSC.

Using BTS Service Software

Assumptions:
• The site has a TSC A and a TSC B.
• TSC A is currently active and TSC B is currently standby.

Procedure 6-2 How to Upgrade TSCs Using BTS Service Software

Step TSC A TSC B Notes

1 Reset TSC B will activate

2 Interrupt start-up and enter

ROM Mode.

3 Download new application

only.

4 Reset To start TSC A’s

application which will
enter standby.

5 Reset

6 Interrupt start-up and enter

ROM Mode.

6 - 36 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Configuration and Testing

Procedure 6-2 How to Upgrade TSCs Using BTS Service Software

Step TSC A TSC B Notes

7 Download new
application.
Download any new config
files.

8 Reset To start TSC B’s

application which will
enter standby.

9 Reset

10 Interrupt start-up and enter

ROM Mode.

11 Download any new config

files.

12 Reset TSC B will activate.

Upgrade - Case 2
From a TSC Software Version
• TSC_PR3_APP-x05.31.64 or Later

Using SWDLM

It is also possible to use BTS Service Software with TSC in Application Mode for System Release
D5.2 or above instead of SWDLM.

Assumptions:
• The site has a TSC A and a TSC B.
• TSC A is currently active and TSC B is currently standby.

Procedure 6-3 How to Upgrade TSCs Using SWDLM

Active TSC at start of Standby TSC at start of

Step Notes
procedure procedure

1 Download any new

application.
Download any new
configuration files.

6866538D01-C 6 - 37
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Procedure 6-3 How to Upgrade TSCs Using SWDLM (continued)

2 Reset To switch to other TSC.

3 Download any new

application.
Download any new
configuration files.

4 Reset To switch to other TSC.

Using BTS Service Software

Assumptions:
• The site has TSC A and TSC B.
• TSC A is currently active and TSC B is currently standby.

Procedure 6-4 How to Upgrade TSCs Using BTS Service Software

TSC A TSC B Notes

1 Reset TSC B will activate

2 Interrupt start-up and enter

ROM Mode.

3 Download any new

application.
Download any new
configuration files.

4 Reset TSC B will activate and

TSC A’s application will
start.

5 Reset TSC A will activate

6 Interrupt start-up and

enter ROM Mode.

7 Download any new

application.
Download any new
configuration files.

8 Reset TSC A will activate.

9 Reset TSC B will activate.

6 - 38 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 7

7EBTS System Troubleshooting

Site Controller Troubleshooting

Site Controller Fault Indications

The built-in system troubleshooting intelligence is mainly accessed through the Site Controller
and Base Radio(s) LED and Man-Machine Interface (MMI) status and fault indications.
This chapter provides fault indications for the Site Controller which has been configured for use
in a Dimetra IP system.
Some indications list several possible failures along with corresponding corrective actions. If a
failure is isolated to the Site Controller, the suspected unit should be replaced with a new one.
This restores the system to normal operation as quickly as possible.
Suspected Site Controllers should be shipped to the appropriate Motorola repair depot for repair.
Fault indications should be considered in the order shown in table below.

6866538D01-C 7-1
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

LED Fault Indications

Table 7-1 LED Fault Indications

Indication Possible Failure Corrective Action

Power LED is OFF No power to TSC • See “Troubleshooting Power”

GPS LED is OFF GPS is not locked • See “GPS Receiver Detailed
Troubleshooting”
• See “Troubleshooting GPS Training and
Site Reference Faults”
• See “Check TSC config file”

GPS LED is GPS Training or Free run • See “Troubleshooting GPS Training and
FLASHING Site Reference Faults”

NET LED is ON Loss of communication • See “Troubleshooting Site Link Faults”

(LOCAL LED is ON) with Zone Controller
(CNE). Check site link

NET LED is ON Site link failed, but not in • Use display config command to check if
(LOCAL LED is OFF) Local Site Trunking mode LST ENABLE FLAG is disabled then see
“Troubleshooting Site Link Faults”
• Check each BRC. See “Base Radio fault
indications” section
• See “Troubleshooting BRC config files”
• See “Troubleshooting BRC code file”

7-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Flow Chart

Start

See "Troubleshooting"
Check Off power section
Power
LED

On

Replace faulty SC.

Yes
Are LEDs SC boot software fails
Stuck ON to execute and turn
software controlled
LEDs off.

No

Check MMI cable, and

No terminal set-up.
Is MMI
See "Configuration
Available?
and Testing" Section.

Yes

Check/reinstall SC
Application mode No Application using
MMI available ie*? TESS

Yes

See "Troubleshooting:
General"
See "LED Fault
Indication" section

Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart

Troubleshooting: Power
• Check TSC is switched on at the Breaker panel
• Check TSC is switched on at the front panel
• Check for EBTS PSU failure
• Verify power (voltage and polarity) on rear connector. If power is present and correct then
replace the TSC. Otherwise check for TSC power supply cabling fault

6866538D01-C 7-3
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting: General
This section details usage of the Application mode MMI command 'status sc' for general
troubleshooting and to determine the site controller status. This command enhancement is only
available on System Releases supporting the redundant TSC.
Use the 'status sc' command. Check the returned status and proceed as detailed in Table 7-2.
This section details usage of the Application mode MMI command status sc for general
troubleshooting and to determine the site controller status.

This command enhancement is only available on System Releases supporting the redundant TSC.

Use the status sc command. Observe the “Overall Status” field of the resulting output and
proceed as follows.
• If Overall Status = Initialising – waiting for TSC configuration file load, the configuration
file may be corrupt or is not present. See “Troubleshooting: TSC Config File” on page 7-5.
• If Overall Status = Attempting to Activate – waiting for BRs, the TSC may be unable to
communicate with the BRs. See “LED Fault Indications” on page 7-2.
• If Overall Status = Active – <state> / <reason>, this is an indication that the TSC is currently
active, together with the site reference state and the reason for that state. These states and
reasons are explained in Table 7-2 and Table 7-3.

Table 7-2 Site Reference Reasons

Site Reference Reason Explanation

NO REASON Normal operation - no explanation needed

1PPS LOST The 1PPS timing source from the GPS is not present.
FREE_RUN_TIMER_EXPIRY The SR has been free running for longer than the time configured
during installation.
UHSO_AGING The UHSO is approaching end of life and will need replacing soon.
SITE_REF_ALARM An unspecified site reference condition has occurred.
FREQ_CALIB_TIMER_EXPIRY The SR has been free running without GPS for over 350 days - GPS
calibration is required to ensure RF frequency stability &
compliance.
GPS_OK The GPS receiver is supplying a valid 1PPS timing source.

Table 7-3 Site Reference States

Site Reference State Explanation

UNKNOWN The site reference is initializing - this is a transient state that may
persist for a few minutes at start up.
ENABLED_SYNC The site reference is fully trained to GPS - This is the highest level
of functionality.
DISABLED The site reference is not working.
FREE_RUN_SYNC This is the first level of fallback - The site reference will continue to
provide its highest level of service in this state until the free run
timer expires.

7-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Table 7-3 Site Reference States (continued)

Site Reference State Explanation

NON_SYNC This is the second level fallback - The site reference is providing
service however any feature that needs sites to be synchronized may
be impaired.
NON_SYNC_ADJ_REQ The site has been operating in its 2nd level fallback mode for too
long (> 350 days) and should be disabled by the operator.
ENABLED_NON_SYNC The site has been configured to operate in its 2nd level fallback mode
(FNC) to enable start-up without GPS.

Troubleshooting: TSC Config File

The TSC will not boot or operate correctly and GPS will not start training unless a valid
Configuration File is stored in its Flash Filing System. Use the method described in General
Check of a TSC File to ensure that either tsc.cf.1 or tsc.cf.2 is selected as the current file, and is
shown as valid.

Troubleshooting: BRC Config Files

The BRC will not boot or operate correctly unless a valid Configuration File is stored in the TSC’s
Flash Filing System. Use the method described in General Check of a TSC File to ensure that the
file shown in the following table is valid for the BR of interest.¯

Config files will only normally be present for installed BRCs.

Table 7-4 BRC Config File Troubleshooting

BR Cabinet BR Position Filename

1 1 brc01.cf
1 2 brc02.cf
1 3 brc03.cf
1 4 brc04.cf
2 1 brc05.cf
2 2 brc06.cf
2 3 brc07.cf
2 4 brc08.cf

Troubleshooting: BRC Code File

The BRC will not boot or operate correctly unless a valid Code File is stored in the TSC’s Flash
Filing System. Use the method described in General Check of a TSC File to ensure that either
brc.code.1 or brc.code.2 is selected as the current file, and is valid for the BR of interest.

6866538D01-C 7-5
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting: General Check of a TSC File

To check the validity of a particular file in the TSC’s Flash Filing System it is necessary to use
both the dir command and the attrib command as follows.
This example will look at the TSC’s configuration file, tsc.cf.

Using the dir command first ensures that the information shared between dir and attrib is
synchronised.

1 Use the dir -all command to produce a listing of all files on the TSC. There is no wildcard
option with dir. Check the files of interest do not have any warning after their details. This
shows only a small part of the typical output.
reg.dat.bk1 0 - not set- 000000 00000000 (bad header)
tsc.cf.1.bk1 11635 - not set- 000000 2dbb8018
tsc.cf.2.bk1 0 - not set- 000000 00000000 (bad header)
In this example tsc.cf.1 looks like a valid file, whilst tsc.cf.2 has a bad header warning so it can’t
be valid. The ‘.bk1’ indicates that the file is back-up copy 1.
2 Use command ‘attrib tsc.cf*’ to produce a listing of the TSC’s configuration files attributes.
SC: attrib tsc.cf*
ATTRIB NAME VERSION DATE
----------------------------------------------------
----r- tsc.cf pr3swdl 20/02/2001_18:39:33
cn--r- tsc.cf.1 pr3swdl 20/02/2001_18:39:33
---w-a tsc.cf.2 - -
SC
Note which file has the ‘c’ (Current) attribute and ensure that:
• It also has the ‘r’ (read) attribute. If the file has the w (write) attribute, it is not valid.
• Also check the generic file title (‘tsc.cf’ in this case) shares the same version and date
information.
If there is no valid file then this should be downloaded to the TSC again, using either EBTS
Service Software (TESS) or Software Download (SWDL.)

7-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

MMI Fault Indications

Diagnosis of fault conditions are divided into diagnosis of the GPS/site reference and the site link.

Troubleshooting GPS Training and Site Reference Faults (Prior to Release D5.2)
The status sri command provides the capability to diagnose GPS and Site Reference faults. The
status sri command output is in the following form (GPS fully trained.)

SC: status sri

GPS Training State: CLOSELY TRAINED
RAIM Protection is Active
Good PDOP No
PDOP: -2
Strict Tracked SATS: 7
Free Run: FALSE Free Run Expiry Timer Setting: 240 min.
Time Frequency Reference: ON LINE Alarm Status: OK
1 PPS: Available Satellite Tracking: ADEQUATE

GPS Receiver Status = 0x08, Satellite Tracked = 7

SatID Mode Flags Carrier to Noise Density Ratio (db/Hz)
------- ------- ------- ---------------------------------------
30 8 0xa2 49
6 8 0xa2 48
25 8 0xa2 51
5 0 0x20 0
1 8 0xa2 49
22 8 0xa2 51
24 8 0xa2 47
17 8 0xa2 52
Latitude: N 51 deg 14 min 42.505 sec
Longitude: W 1 deg 6 min 2.124 sec
Altitude: 174.00 metres (571 Feet) above GPS Ellipsoid
Date/Time: 05/03/2001 10:56:47 GMT

SC:

The following fields are of particular relevance during fault diagnosis:

GPS Training: The GPS Training status will be returned as ‘WAITING’ whilst searching for
sufficient and adequate satellites. When satellites have been located the state will go to
‘LOCKING’. When the Site Reference has locked to GPS the status will be shown as
‘CLOSELY TRAINED’.
Free Run: This should be set to FALSE. A status of ‘TRUE’ indicates that the timing
reference is free running.
Number of adequate satellites. In the example above there are seven satellites that have
given full positional information (mode 8), as indicated by the ‘Strict Tracked SATS’ field.
Alarm Status: This should be OK.
The other fields in this display are primarily for Motorola engineering use.
If the status sri MMI command indicates that there are no satellites available. Then there may
be a possible hardware fault. Refer to Section GPS Receiver Detailed Troubleshooting for
further details.

6866538D01-C 7-7
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting: GPS Training and Site Reference Faults (Release D5.2 and later)
The timing subsystem within the EBTS consists of 2 major components:
• A GPS receiver and
• the Site Reference.
The status sri command and its sub commands provide the capability to diagnose GPS and Site
Reference faults. An output similar to the one shown below will be obtained for a fully functional
system:

SC) status sri

Site Reference Operating OK : YES
Site Reference State : MAINTAIN PHASE LOCK
Site Reference Configuration : ASC
Site Reference 1 PPS Input Status : VALID
GPS Operating OK : YES
GPS State : POSITION HOLD
GPS Satellites Tracked : 8
Sync Free Run Available (Minutes) : 60
Unsync Free Run Available (Days Hours Mins) : 349 3 17
Last Calibration Date Time : Thu Jul 22 18:33:59 2004
Calibration Due Date Time : Fri Jul 8 18:33:59 2005
GPS Time : Sat Jul 24 15:15:12 2004
UTC Time : Sat Jul 24 15:16:13 2004
Local Time : Sat Jul 24 16:16:13 2004
UTC Time Mode : Precise
Tetra Slot : H15580 M37 F5 S4
Synchronised : YES

The following fields are of particular relevance during fault diagnosis:

• Site Reference Operating OK
YES: This indicates that the site reference is providing timing services to the TSC.
NO: The site reference is not operating, therefore the EBTS will not be able to provide any
service. Examining the state of items below will indicate the reason for this condition.
• Site Reference State
Site Reference State = START UP: The site controller is starting up and the site reference
has not been fully initialized yet. The site reference and the EBTS will not be operational at
this point. This is a normal transitory state.
Site Reference State = ACQUIRE FREQUENCY LOCK: The site reference is in the
process of locking to the reference signal provided by the GPS receiver. This process may take
several minutes. The EBTS will not be able to provide any service until this process
completes.
Site Reference State = MAINTAIN PHASE LOCK: This is a normal operational mode of
the site reference. The EBTS will be synchronized with any other EBTS that has attained this
state, this means that type 1 handovers and any other feature that require sites to be fully
synchronized will be available.
Site Reference State = SYNCHRONISED FREE RUN: This is a fallback state which
indicates that the EBTS is not tracking sufficient GPS satellites to provide a timing reference
to the site. The EBTS is capable of operating with no loss of performance for up to 12 hours.
(Dependant on configuration). If this condition occurs frequently or persists, the health of the
GPS system should be assessed. See GPS Tracking criteria and GPS Antenna evaluation in
section 4 of this manual

7-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Site Reference State = UNSYNCHRONISED FREE RUN: This is a fallback state for an
ASC configured EBTS and the normal operating state for FNC configured EBTS. When
configured for ASC, the site will enter this state if adequate GPS tracking is not achieved
before the configured GPS start up timer expires or after the expiry of free run timer if the site
was previously synchronized. The site is capable of operating in this mode for up to 12
months. In this state the EBTS is capable of providing all services except those that require
synchronization between adjacent sites, e.g. type 1 handovers.
Site Reference State = MAINTAIN FREQUENCY LOCK: If an adequate GPS signal
becomes available whilst operating in UNSYNCHRONISED FREE RUN the EBTS will enter
this state where the site reference calibration data will be updated, thus prolonging the amount
of time where service can be maintained.
Site Reference State = DISABLED: The site reference has detected an error and is unable
to provide any service. The EBTS will not be able to provide any service whilst the site
reference is in this state. The cause of this state is dependant on the configured operating mode
of the EBTS:
• NSC: The EBTS has been in the SYNCHRONISED FREE RUN state for longer than the
configured free run time.
• FNC / ASC: The EBTS does not have any calibration data - The EBTS needs to be run
initially with GPS before FNC operation without GPS is possible.
This condition may also be due to hardware failure within the site controller.
• Site Reference Configuration
Site Reference Configuration = ASC, NSC or FNC: This is the installation selected
configuration of the site reference subsystem. See “Site Reference Operation Modes” on page
4-16 for details.
During start-up, the configuration will be reported as NSC regardless of the actual configured
mode.

• Site Reference 1 PPS Input Status

Site Reference 1 PPS Input Status = OK or NOT OK: This indicates whether a valid signal
is being received by the site reference system.
• GPS Operating OK
GPS Operating OK = YES or NO: This indicates whether the GPS receiver is tracking
sufficient satellites to provide a timing reference input to the site reference. This parameter
needs to be ‘YES’ for NSC operation and should be YES for ASC operation. Detailed
information on the GPS receiver may be obtained from the status sri -t and status sri -gps
commands. See the following section for details.
• GPS State
GPS State = NOT TRACKING: The GPS receiver is not tracking any satellites. This
condition may persist for some minutes after start-up. Detailed information on the GPS
receiver may be obtained from the status sri -t and status sri -gps commands. See the
following section for details.
GPS State = POSITION HOLD: This is the normal operating state of the GPS receiver.

6866538D01-C 7-9
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

GPS State = SITE SURVEY: The GPS receiver will operate in this state for several hours
after a EBTS is started in a new location for the first time. The GPS receiver is attempting to
determine accurate coordinates to enable operation in position hold.
• GPS Satellites Tracked
GPS Satellites Tracked = <0 .. 12>: This is the number of satellites tracked that are available
for timing.
• Sync Free Run Available
Sync Free Run Available (Minutes): This is the number of minutes that the EBTS will
operate without any degradation of service if the GPS receiver stops working and the site
reference is configured for ASC or NSC operation. If the site reference is already in the free
run state, the time shown will be the balance of free run time before the EBTS stops operating
or switches to a lower level of service.
Unsync Free Run Available (Days Hours Mins): This shows the amount of time the sites
2nd level fallback (Unsynchronised free run) is capable of operating for. If the site reference
is already in Unsynchronized free run the time shown will be the amount of time the EBTS is
capable of operating for before calibration is required.
• Last Calibration Date Time
Last Calibration Date Time: The site reference will be periodically calibrated whenever an
adequate GPS signal is available. The EBTS is capable of providing service for up to 12
months without GPS after each calibration. This parameter shows the date and time of the last
calibration snapshot.
• Calibration Due Date Time
Calibration Due Date Time: This shows the date where the EBTS will need calibration if the
GPS receiver was to fail at this time.
• GPS Time
• UTC Time
• Local Time
• UTC Time Mode
UTC Time Mode = Not Precise or Precise: When the timing for the site reference is being
derived from the GPS receiver the UTC mode will be precise.
• Synchronised
Synchronised = YES or NO: This indicates whether this EBTS is capable of operating
synchronously with any neighboring EBTS.

7 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting: GPS Receiver

The status sri -gps command provides detailed information on the GPS receiver’s operating state.
This includes a detailed satellite tracking report. The output below is from a fully functional
internal 8 channel receiver.

SC) status sri -gps

GPSR Type : INTERNAL
Self Test Status : AVAILABLE
GPSR Model : UT+
Software Ver : 03
Manufacture Date : 1H23
GPSR Antenna Status : Properly connected.
GPS Satellite Tracking : OK
GPS State : POSITION HOLD
GPSR Status : 0x08
GPS Satellites Visible : 9
GPS Satellites Tracked : 8
GPS Date & Time : Sat Jul 24 15:18:14 2004
PDOP Status : N/A - Pos'n Hold
PDOP Value : N/A [-2]
RAIM Protection is : Active
Latitude : N 51 deg 14 min 43.500 sec
Longitude : W 1 deg 6 min 3.400 sec
Altitude (Meters above GPS Ellipsoid) : 285.00
Detailed Satellite Status :

SatID Mode Flags C/N Ratio (dB-Hz)

:-----------------------------------------
26 8 0xa2 48
18 8 0xa2 46
21 8 0xa2 49
29 8 0xa2 45
8 8 0xa2 39
28 8 0xa2 48
9 8 0xa2 46
10 8 0xa2 46
SC)

6866538D01-C 7 - 11
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Check GPS self test status by using the command status sri -t as shown below.

SC) status sri -t

GPS Receiver ID:

================
SOFTWARE VER # 03 SOFTWARE REV # 01 SOFTWARE DATE May
28 1999
MODEL # R5122U11K4 SERIAL # R0BYZH
OPTION LIST MANUFACTURE DATE 1H23

GPS Receiver Status:

====================
RTC Comm & Time: PASS, Temperature Sensor: PASS
RAM Test: PASS, ROM Checksum: PASS
1 KHz Presence: PASS

Antenna Status: Properly connected.

Almanac Data: Valid
Location Data: Valid

Channel 1 Correlation: PASS, Channel 2 Correlation: PASS

Channel 3 Correlation: PASS, Channel 4 Correlation: PASS
Channel 5 Correlation: PASS, Channel 6 Correlation: PASS
Channel 7 Correlation: PASS, Channel 8 Correlation: PASS

Raim: Enabled
SC)

• If any of the self test items display a status of ‘FAIL’ the GPS receiver is faulty and the Site
Controller should be replaced.
• If the Antenna status field displays open or short circuit, check the integrity of the antenna
cabling or replace the antenna.

GPS antenna must be connected before the site is powered up for this status to be returned
correctly.

• If the site is being powered up in a new location for the first time, the Almanac Data and the
Location data fields should display a status of Invalid. Use the site_location -reset and
invalidate gps nvram commands to ensure that the Almanac and Location data are cleared.
The Site Controller must then be reset for these commands to take effect.
• Check Antenna, cabling and surge arrestors.
• Check Antenna placement; refer to “GPS Antennas” on page 4-34.
• Evaluate GPS signal strengths using the GPS evaluation kit as described within chapter 3 of
this document.
• The RAIM (Receiver Automatic Integrity Monitor) facility should be enabled to allow
detection and correction of GPS errors. Refer to the EBTS service software manual (TESS)
for details.
• If no other fault replace the Site Controller

7 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Site Link Faults

The status bsl command provides the capability to diagnose Site Link. Output from this
command for a correctly operating system, using an X.21 Site Link Interface, will be in the
following form:
SC) status bsl
Site Link State: UP

X21 Statistics:
===============
Number of good frames transmitted : 127690
Number of transmit underruns : 0
Number of transmitted frames where Control lost during signaling:0
Number of good frames received : 87034
Number of receive overruns : 0
Number of receive CRC/framing errors : 0
Number of received frames where no buffers where available : 0
Number of receive buffer overflows : 0
Number of receive aborts : 0
Number of received frames where Indication lost during signaling : 0
Number of received frames not divisible by eight : 0

Number of Clock Loss events : 0

Number of I Line Off events : 0

Current I Line state : On

Current C Line state : On

Current Clock state : OK

SC)
• The Site Link State should be shown as ‘UP’, the number of good frames transmitted and
received should be non-zero and incrementing indicating site link traffic. The presence of non-
zero data in numeric fields may indicate a possible Site Link Problem.
• Verify that the ‘Current I Line and C Line states’ are shown as ‘ON’ and that the ‘Current
Clock state’ is shown as ‘OK’.

Other Site Controller Symptoms

Table 7-5 Other Site Controller Symptoms

Symptom Possible Failure Corrective Action

Initial power up self test fails Site Controller Replace Site Controller
Service terminal unable to Incorrect cable Verify cable
communicate with Controller Incorrect setup parameters Check terminal configuration
Controller cannot Cabling problem Check Ethernet cable and 50-ohm
communicate over Ethernet terminators on all Ethernet terminations
Site Controller Replace Site Controller
Site Controller functions Controller overheating / fan Check fan operations, make sure fan is not
normally at first then fails failure obstructed or blocked. Replace if required
after a period of time

6866538D01-C 7 - 13
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Base Radio / RFDS / EAS /

Miscellaneous Troubleshooting

Base Radio Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Overview
This section serves as a guide to isolate Base Radio failures to the FRU level. It contains
procedures for:
• Troubleshooting
• Verification/Station Operation

Recommended Test Equipment

Table 7-6 lists the recommended test equipment to perform the Base Radio
troubleshooting/station operation procedures.

Table 7-6 Recommended Test Equipment

Test Equipment Model Number Use

TETRA Signal Generator
TETRA Analyser
Dummy Load (50 Ω, 250 W)
Service Terminal (NOTE)
Power Meter
RF Attenuator, 250 W, 40 dB
RF Attenuator, 10 dB
A personal computer (PC) with VT100 emulation software may be used instead.
Anritsu 3660
HP89441A
Weinschel 453033
VT100 or compatible
HP 437B
Weinschel 404043
Motorola 0180301E72
Used for checking receive and
transmit operation.
Used to terminate output
Local service terminal
Used to measure reflected and
forward power
Protection for HP89441A
Protection for HP89441A

Troubleshooting Procedures
The Base Radio is computer-controlled and employs state-of-the-art digital signal processing
techniques. Many of the troubleshooting and station operation procedures require Man-Machine
Interface (MMI) commands. These commands are used to communicate station level commands
to the Base Radio via the RS-232 communications port located on the front of the BRC.
The field maintenance philosophy for the Base Radio is to repair by replacement. The station is
comprised of self-contained Field Replaceable Units (FRU). A defective FRU is replaced with a

7 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

non-defective module. This method of troubleshooting limits down-time and quickly restores the
Base Radio back to normal operation.
Ship defective modules to a Motorola repair depot for repair.
This manual provides two troubleshooting procedures for the Base Radio. Each procedure is
designed to quickly identify faulty modules.

Routine Checkout
Procedure 1 is a quick, non-intrusive test performed during a routine site visit. Use this procedure
to verify proper station operation without taking the station out of service. Figure 7-2 shows the
Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart.

ROUTINE
SITE VISIT
PROCEDURE 1

OBSERVE LED
INDICATORS
Refer to
Controls and Indicators
for LED Definitions

Yes
Module Suspected Go to Troubleshooting
of Being Faulty? Procedure 2 Flow Chart

No

CHECK CURRENT
ALARM STATUS
Use MMI command
get alarms
to check alarm status

Yes
Module Suspected Go to Troubleshooting
of Being Faulty? Procedure 2 Flow Chart

No

DONE

EBTS021
071895JNM

Figure 7-2 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart

6866538D01-C 7 - 15
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Reported/Suspected Problem
Use Procedure 2 to troubleshoot reported or suspected equipment malfunctions. Perform this
procedure with equipment in service (non-intrusive) and with equipment taken temporarily out of
service (intrusive).

PROBLEM
REPORTED OR SUSPECTED
PROCEDURE 2

OBSERVE LED
INDICATORS
Refer to
Controls and Indicators
for LED Definitions

Yes
Module Suspected Go to Module Replacement
of Being Faulty? Procedures Section

No

CHECK CURRENT
ALARM STATUS
Use MMI command
get alarms
to check alarm status

Module Suspected Yes

Go to Module Replacement
of Being Faulty? Procedures Section

No

PERFORM
VERIFICATION TESTS
Use MMI commands to
perform tests as specified in
station verification procedure.

Module Suspected Yes

Go to Module Replacement
of Being Faulty? Procedures Section

No

DONE
Clear Problem Report

EBTS022
071895JNM

Figure 7-3 Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

BR FRU Replacement
Replace suspected FRUs within the BR with known non-defective FRUs to restore the station to
proper operation. The following procedures provide FRU replacement instructions and post-
replacement adjustments and/or verification instructions.

7 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers

When the Base Radio Controller (BRC) FRU is replaced, the BRC will need to be reassigned to
the Base Radio location within the Equipment Cabinet. Also, reassignment of the receiver
complement is required. These reassignments are accomplished through the service terminal
hookup and Man-Machine Interface (MMI) described in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6.
In brief, MMI is used to:
• Set the cabinet (1 to 6) and the position of the Base Radios within the equipment cabinet.
• Select a particular Base Radio. This is required when assigning transmit and receive
frequencies to a particular Base Radio.
• Select a receiver complement within a Base Radio
These operations are described below. Use Chapter 3, “EBTS Interface Commands” for detailed
information on using the MMI commands.

Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position

The set position command programs the position number of where a Base Radio is mounted
within a selected cabinet.
Base Radio designation starts from the bottom of the cabinet, with the lowest Base Radio
designated as “1”. For example, a cabinet with four Base Radios would have the lowest Base
Radio being designated as “1”, and the highest being designated as “4”.
This command would also be used in accessing a particular Base Radio within the cabinet.
Accessing a particular Base Radio is required, for example, when assigning the transmit
frequency to a Base Radio.

Selecting a Receiver Complement For a Base Radio

The set rx_fru_config command sets which receivers should be present in a selected Base Radio.
The command has provision for all possible complements of three receivers.
The set rx_mode command selectively enables any combination of individual receivers within a
selected Base Radio, while disabling any receiver that was not specifically selected.

Anti-Static Precaution
The Base Radio circuitry contains many CMOS and other static-sensitive devices. Take
precautionary measures to prevent damage of Base Radio modules by static discharge when
servicing the equipment.
Observe the following additional precautions:
• Wear a wrist strap (Motorola Part No. 4280385A59 or equivalent) at all times when
servicing the Base Radio to minimise static build-up.
• A grounding clip is provided with each EBTS cabinet. If not available, use another
appropriate grounding point.
• DO NOT insert or remove modules with power applied to the Base Radio. ALWAYS turn
the power OFF with the Power Supply breaker switch. This switch is located on the front
panel of the module.
• Keep spare modules in factory packaging for transporting. When shipping modules,
always pack in original packaging.

6866538D01-C 7 - 17
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Replacement Procedure
Perform the following steps to remove any of the FRUs from the Base Radio chassis:
1 Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply ON/OFF switch to the OFF
position. This switch is located behind the front panel of the Power Supply.
2 Remove the TORX screws securing the faulty module to the chassis; these are located on each
side of the faulty module. Save screws for reuse.
3 Pull out the module.
4 Insert the non-defective replacement module by aligning the module side rails with the
appropriate rail guides inside the Base Radio chassis.
5 Gently push the replacement module completely into the Base Radio chassis assembly using
the module handle(s).

DO NOT slam or force the module into the chassis assembly. This will damage the connectors
or backplane.
6 Secure the replacement module using two TORX screws removed during module removal.
Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.65 Nm (5 in-lbs).
7 Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the ON
position.
8 Proceed to Station Verification Procedures.

Base Radio Replacement

Perform Base Radio (BR) replacement as described in the following paragraphs.

The BR removal and installation procedures are included for reference. Field maintenance of BRs
typically consists of replacement of FRUs within the BR.

Removal
Remove BR from Equipment Cabinet as follows:
1 Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply ON/OFF switch to the OFF
position reached through the front panel grill.
2 Set the appropriate breaker switch on the Breaker Panel to OFF.
3 Tag and disconnect the cabling from the BR rear panel connectors (Disconnect ground cable
last).
4 Remove the four M6 TORX screws which secure the BR front panel to the Equipment Cabinet
mounting rails.

BR weight exceeds 27 kg (60 lbs). First remove the PA and PSU (and any other modules as
necessary) then lift out the BR from the cabinet, make certain BR is fully supported when br is
free from mounting rails.

7 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Two persons are required to replace a Base Radio. Alternatively, if only one person is available, the heavy
base radio modules (Power Amplifier and Power Supply) shall be removed first and later the chassis can be
removed easily.

5 While supporting the BR, carefully remove the BR from the Equipment Cabinet by sliding the
BR from the front of cabinet.

Installation
Install BR in Equipment Cabinet as follows:
1 If adding a BR, install side rails in the appropriate BR mounting position in the rack.

BR weight exceeds 27 kg (60 lbs). Remove PA and PSU (and any other modules as necessary)
before lifting the BR into the equipment cabinet. make certain BR is fully supported until br is
fully placed in mounting position.

Two persons are required to replace a Base Radio. Alternatively, if only one person is available, the heavy
base radio modules (Power Amplifier and Power Supply) shall be removed first and later the chassis can be
removed easily.

2 While supporting the BR, carefully lift and slide the BR in the Equipment Cabinet mounting
position.
3 Secure the BR to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using four M6 TORX screws. Tighten
the screws to 4.5 Nm (40 in-lb).
4 Connect the cabling to the BR rear panel connectors as tagged during the BR removal. If
adding a BR, perform the required cabling in accordance with the cabling diagrams (Attach
ground cable first).
5 Perform BR activation as follows:
• If the BR is replacing an existing BR, perform the BR verification in accordance with
Station Verification Procedures.

Station Verification Procedures

Station Verification Procedures cover methods to verify transmit and receive operations after a
module has been replaced. Each section contains the equipment set-up and the procedure.

Replacement FRUs Verification

All module specific information is programmed in the factory prior to shipment. Base Radio
specific parameters (e.g., receive and transmit frequencies) is down loaded to the Base Radio
from the network/site controller.
Replacement FRU alignment is not required for the Base Radio. However, after a module is
replaced, station operation should be verified.

6866538D01-C 7 - 19
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Base Repeater FRU Hardware Revision Verification

The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service. Unless the Base Radio is
currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.
This minimises or eliminates disruption of service to system users.

1 Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.

2 Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port, located on the front panel of
the BRC.
3 Using the field password, login to the BR.
4 Collect revision numbers from the station by typing the following commands:
>dekey
>get brc_rev_no
>get rx1_rev_no
>get pa_rev_no
>get ex_rev_no
5 If all modules return revision numbers of the format "R03.xx.xx", then all revision numbers
are present and no further action is required. Log out and repeat steps 1 through 4 for each
additional BR.
If revision numbers were returned as blank or not in the format "R03.xx.xx", then contact your
local Motorola representative or Technical Support.
6 When all BRs have been checked, log out.

Transmitter Verification
The transmitter verification procedure verifies the transmitter operation and the integrity of the
transmit path. This verification procedure is recommended after replacing an Exciter, Power
Amplifier, BRC, or Power Supply module.

The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service. Unless the Base Radio is
currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.
This minimises or eliminates disruption of service to system users.

Equipment Set-Up
To set up the equipment, use the following procedure:
1 Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the OFF
position.
2 Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
3 Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the front panel of
the BRC.
4 Disconnect the existing cable from the Base Radio PA OUT connector.
5 Connect a test cable to the Base Radio PA OUT connector. Connect 40 dB attenuator to
opposite end of cable.

7 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

6 From the attenuator, connect a cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the TETRA Analyser.
7 Remove power from the TETRA Analyser. Connect the Rubidium Frequency Standard to a
10 dB attenuator.
8 Connect opposite end of 10 dB attenuator to the 10 MHz REFERENCE OSCILLATOR
IN/OUT connector on TETRA Analyser.
9 Set the TETRA Analyser to the EXT REF mode. Set TETRA Analyser to ON.
10 Set the TETRA Analyser to perform modulation tests using the "TETRA Personality".
11 Proceed to the Transmitter Verification Procedure.

Transmitter Verification Procedure

This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the transmit path
for the Power Amplifier.
1 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command verifies that there is no RF power being transmitted.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

The following command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on
licensed frequencies or into an RF load.

2 At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_power 80

This command sets the transmitter output to 80 Watts.

BRC> set tx_power 80

setting transmitter power to 80 watts

WORKING...
TRANSMITTER KEYED: 79.92 watts

BRC>

After keying the Base Radio, verify the forward and reflected powers of the station along with
the station VSWR with the parameters listed in Table 7-7.

Table 7-7 80 Watt PA Transmitter Parameters

Parameter Value or Range

Forward Power Greater than 71 Watts

Reflected Power Less than 4.0 Watts
VSWR Less than 2:1

6866538D01-C 7 - 21
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

3 At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwr

This command returns the current value of forward power from the RF Power Amplifier.

BRC> get fwd_pwr

FORWARD POWER is 79.3 watts [48.7 dbm]

At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwr

This command returns the current value of reflected power from the RF Power Amplifier.

BRC> get ref_pwr

REFLECTED POWER is 2 watts [31.9 dbm]

At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswr

This command calculates the current Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF
Power Amplifier.

BRC> get vswr

VSWR is 1.4:1

4 At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarms

This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.

BRC> get alarms

NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED

If the get alarms condition displays alarms, refer to MMI Fault Indications in this chapter for
corrective actions.

5 View the spectrum of the transmitted signal on the Spectrum Analyser. Figure 7-4 shows a
sample of the spectrum.

7 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

0.0

-10.0

-20.0

-30.0

-40.0

-50.0

dB
-60.0

-70.0

-80.0

-90.0

-100.0

-110.0

-120.0
932.950

932.962

932.975

932.987

933.000

933.012

933.025

933.037

933.050
Frequency, MHz
RBW = 300 Hz Span = 0.10 MHz

TEBTS062B

Figure 7-4 Transmitted Signal Spectrum (Typical)

6 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey

This command stops all transmitter activity.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

Equipment Disconnection
1 Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the OFF
position.
2 Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.
3 Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector located on the front
panel of the BRC.
4 Disconnect the Spectrum Analyser test setup from BR PA OUT connector. Reconnect
appropriate RFDS cable to BR PA OUT connector.
5 Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the ON
position.
If necessary, continue with the Receiver Verification procedure.

6866538D01-C 7 - 23
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Receiver Verification
The receiver verification procedure sends a known test signal to the Base Radio to verify the
receive path. This verification procedure is recommended after replacing a Receiver, BRC, or
Power Supply module.

The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service. Unless the Base Radio is
currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak hours.
This minimises or eliminates disruption of service to system users.

Equipment Set-Up
To set up the equipment, use the following procedure.
1 Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the OFF
position.
2 Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the service computer.
3 Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the STATUS port located on the front panel of
the BRC.
4 Disconnect the existing cable from the Base Radio RX1 connector (or the connector
corresponding to the receiver under test).
5 Connect a test cable to the RX 1 connector.
6 Connect the other end of the test cable to the RF output on a TETRA Signal Generator.

Steps 7 through 10 assume signal generator used is as specified in Table 7-6. If alternate
equivalent equipment is used, perform steps 7 through 10, as applicable.

7 Connect Frequency Standard 10 MHz OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.

8 Connect other end of the attenuator to the 10 MHz REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT
connector on the TETRA Signal Generator.
9 Set the TETRA Signal Generator to EXT REF mode.
10 Set TETRA Signal Generator to ON.
11 Set the TETRA Signal Generator to the receive frequency of the Base Radio under test. (All
receivers within a single Base Radio have the same receive frequency.)
12 Configure generator for a type T2 unframed Π/4DQPSK signal (external triggering is not
required).
13 Set the TETRA Signal Generator to generate the test signal at an output level of -85 dBm.

Receiver Verification Procedure

This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the Base Radio
receive path.
The Bit Error Rate (BER) measurement meets specifications at less than 0.01% (1.0e-02%) to
pass the process.

7 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Before you begin the verification procedure, put the Base Radio into the test mode of operation
to take it out of service. Enable the desired receiver under test and disable the other receiver(s).
(In this case the receiver under test is receiver #1.)
In the following procedures, enter the software commands as they appear after the prompt. These
commands are in bold letters.
For example, BRC> get rx_freq
1 Apply power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the ON
position.
The following message displays on the service computer during power-up.

Dimetra Base Radio Controller

Bootloader Version R01.01.00-BL
Motorola Inc. Copyright (c) 2001, 2002
______________________________________________________________
ROM Image 1 valid, internal version is 0x0000000A
ROM Image 2 valid, internal version is 0x00000009
Starting Image 1

RAM Test: .... passed

Base Radio Controller

Version E07.04.xxxx
Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
2000, 2001, 2002
Motorola Inc. All rights reserved.
Ethernet Test: passed
Running from boot code area

Board configuration: 50MHz / 32MByte

To enter configuration mode, hit any key within 10 seconds:
Starting BRC registration
Waiting for Registration

Enter the proper password. After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is
displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola

Motorola recommends that you change the default password once proper operation of the
equipment is verified.

2 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx_freq

This command displays the receive frequency for the current Base Radio. The message
appears as:

6866538D01-C 7 - 25
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

BRC> get rx_freq

RECEIVE FREQUENCY is 917.0125 MHz

Verify that the TETRA Signal Generator frequency is set to the frequency determined in the
previous step.
3 At the BRC> prompt, type: set rx_mode 1
This command is used to enable the antenna/receiver under test.

BRC>set rx_mode 1
set RECEIVER 1 to ENABLED in RAM

4 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rssi 1 1000

This commands returns the receive signal strength indication. To pass the BER floor test, the
Bit Error Rate must be less than 0.01% (1.0e-02%) for the displayed results.

BRC> get rssi 1 1000

Starting RSSI monitor for 1 repetition averaged each 1000
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER SyncMiss

dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- --------- ---------
1 -85.0 -127.0 -127.0 2.4 -127.00.000e+00 0.000e+00

At the BRC > prompt, type: get alarms

This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.

BRC> get alarms

NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED

5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for receiver 2 and receiver 3.

If the get alarms command displays alarms, refer to MMI Fault Indications in this chapter.

Equipment Disconnection
1 Remove power from the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the OFF
position.
2 Disconnect the RS-232 cable from the connector on the service computer.
3 Disconnect the other end of the RS-232 cable from the RS-232 connector located on the front
panel of the BRC.

7 - 26 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

4 Disconnect the test cable from the Base Radio RX 1 connector. Connect the standard
equipment cable to the RX 1 connector.
5 Disconnect the cable to the TETRA Signal Generator.
6 Restore power to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply breaker switch to the ON
position.
This completes the Receiver Verification Procedure.

Base Radio Fault Indications

Table 7-8 Base Radio Fault Indications

Indication Possible Failure Corrective Action

BR LED (green) Base Radio Power • Set power switch to on position

is not lit Supply module
power switch is off
No power to BR • Verify appropriate breaker is on
• Verify Power Supply switch is on
• Verify power cabling from breaker panel to BR
• Verify power (voltage and polarity) to BR
• Check if Power Amp fans are on
• Check if other LEDs are lit
• Check LEDs on Power Supply
• Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Replace Power Supply module
BR waiting for • Verify Ethernet cabling to Site Controller
registration • Verify Ethernet properly terminated
• Verify Site Controller successfully downloaded
• Verify proper Ethernet address by executing get enet_id
MMI command
• Verify proper cabinet and position settings by executing
get_cabinet and get_position MMI command
• Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Reset BR
• Replace BRC module
BRC/ display • Verify communication through local port
board failure • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Reset BR and verify if LEDs initially blink 3 times
• Check ribbon cable between display board and BRC board
• Replace BRC module
BR out of service • Check if other LEDs are lit
• Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Correct service affecting problem

6866538D01-C 7 - 27
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Table 7-8 Base Radio Fault Indications (continued)

Indication Possible Failure Corrective Action

PS LED (red) is lit Major Power • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms BR
Supply alarm MMI command
• Verify stability and presence of input power
• Verify 28.6 VDC by executing get ps_ad0 MMI command
• Verify 14.2 VDC by executing get ps_ad1 MMI command
• Verify 5.1 VDC by executing get ps_ad2 MMI command
• Replace Power Supply module
BRC / display • Verify communication through local port
board failure • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Reset BR and verify all LEDs flash 3 times upon power-up
• Check ribbon cable between display board and BRC board
• Replace BRC module
Short circuit on • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
another module MMI command
• Isolate short circuit by removing other FRUs
• Replace faulty FRU
PS LED (red) is Minor Power • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
flashing Supply alarm command
• Verify stability and presence of input power
• Replace Power Supply module, as required
EX LED (red) is Major Exciter • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
lit alarm command
• Verify proper 5 MHz/1 PPS cabling
• Verify 5 MHz/1 PPS properly terminated
• Verify correct transmit frequency by executing get tx_freq
MMI command
• Verify proper Exciter / PA feedback cabling
• Replace Exciter module
BRC / display • Verify communication through local port
board failure • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Reset BR and verify if LEDs initially blink 3 times
• Check ribbon cable between display board and BRC board
• Check BR DSP by executing get dsp_sanity MMI
command
• Replace BRC module
Receiver module(s) • Check if other LEDs are lit
failure • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Verify correct receive frequency by executing get rx_freq
MMI command
• Replace Receiver module
Power Amplifier • Remove PA and turn on BR
failure • Check for other (non-PA) alarm conditions
• Replace Power Amplifier module
SRI failure • Verify proper 5 MHz/1 PPS cabling
• Verify 5 MHz/1 PPS is properly terminated

7 - 28 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Table 7-8 Base Radio Fault Indications (continued)

Indication Possible Failure Corrective Action

EX LED (red) is Minor Exciter • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
flashing alarm command
• Reset the BR
• Replace Exciter module, as required
PA LED (red) is lit Major Power • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
Amplifier alarm command
• Verify output is properly terminated
• Verify all PA fans are operational
• Verify output cabling integrity
• Replace Power Amplifier module
BRC / display • Verify communication through local port
board failure • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Reset BR and verify if LEDs initially blink 3 times
• Check ribbon cable between display board and BRC board
• Replace BRC module
PA LED (red) is Minor Power • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
flashing Amplifier alarm command
• PA is in a rollback condition
• Verify proper site environmental conditions
• Verify proper air flow to PA module
• Reset the BR
• Replace the PA, as required
CTL LED (red) is Major BRC alarm • Verify communication through local port
lit • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarmsget
alarms MMI command
• Verify all external station connections
• Reset the BR and view self test results
• Replace BRC module
BRC / display • Verify communication through local port
board failure • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Reset BR and verify if LEDs initially blink 3 times
• Check ribbon cable between display board and BRC board
• Replace BRC module

6866538D01-C 7 - 29
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

Table 7-8 Base Radio Fault Indications (continued)

Indication Possible Failure Corrective Action

CTL LED (red) is Minor BRC alarm • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
flashing command
• Verify all external station connections
• Verify all external station cabling integrity
• Verify 5 MHz/1 PPS properly terminated
• Verify presence of 5 MHz/1 PPS
• Replace BRC module, as required
R1, R2, or R3 Major Receiver • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
LED (red) is lit alarm command
• Verify proper 5 MHz/1 PPS cabling
• Verify 5 MHz/1 PPS properly terminated
• Verify correct receive frequency by executing get rx_freq
MMI command
• Verify proper antenna cabling to receiver
• Verify input antenna cabling integrity
• Verify antenna integrity
• Verify RFDS breakers are ON
• Check for RFDS alarms by executing status_eas MMI
command
• Reset RFDS fuse(s)
• Replace Receiver module
BRC / display • Verify communication through local port
board failure • Check for other alarm conditions by executing get alarms
MMI command
• Reset BR and verify if LEDs initially blink 3 times
• Check ribbon cable between display board and BRC board
• Check BR DSP by executing get rx_sanity MMI
command
• Replace BRC module
R1, R2, or R3 Minor Receiver • Identify alarm condition by executing get alarms MMI
LED (red) is alarm command
flashing • Reset the BR
• Replace the Receiver module, as required

7 - 30 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

RF Distribution System Fault Indications

Table 7-9 RFDS Fault Indications

Indication Possible Failure Corrective Action

RFS1 or RFS2 circuit Breaker tripped or in • Verify that ALL breakers are in the ON position
breaker alarm MMI OFF position • Identify any tripped breakers and replace faulty
alarm(s) FRU, if necessary
• Verify correct breaker panel cabling
Faulty alarm cable • Identify other RFDS alarms by executing
status_eas MMI command
• Verify correct alarm cabling
• Verify cabling integrity
• Replace alarm cable, if appropriate
No power to affected • Verify power cabling to the breaker panel
breaker(s) • Verify power (voltage and polarity) to breaker
panel
Receiver No power to RFDS • Verify that both breakers for RFS are ON
Multicoupler • Verify either LED on RFDS Power Supply FRU is
amplifier MMI alarm lit
• Verify power cabling to RFDS
Faulty alarm cable • Identify other RFDS alarms by executing
status_eas MMI command
• Verify correct alarm cabling
• Verify cabling integrity
• Replace alarm cable, as required
Receiver RFDS Power Supply • Verify that both breakers for RFS are ON
Multicoupler power FRU failure • Verify if Power Supply green LED is lit and red
supply MMI alarm LED is not lit
• Verify that the resettable fuse is not tripped
• Replace RFDS Power Supply FRU
No power to RFDS • Verify that both breakers for RFS are ON
• Verify either LED on RFDS Power Supply FRU is
lit
• Verify power cabling to RFDS
Tripped or faulty • Check the resettable fuse, reset if necessary
resettable fuse • Replace RFDS, if appropriate

6866538D01-C 7 - 31
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting
Environmental Alarm System Fault Indications
Table 7-10 EAS Fault Indications
Indication Possible Failure
EAS/IMU breaker on No power connected to EAS
Cabinet breaker is on, but
Cabling failure
Power On LED (green) on
EAS is not lit.
Wrong response to status Damaged or miswired modular
eas command cable
AC fail MMI alarm AC input, or an open or
disconnected alarm lead
High temperature alarm AC input to air conditioner
Site air conditioner
Alarm sensor improperly set or
wires shorted
Alarm sensor located in a hot spot
Low temperature alarm Air conditioner does not shut off
Thermostat is too low
Cold air blowing on alarm sensor
7 - 32
Corrective Action
Check power source.
Check power cabling to EAS; replace
cable if necessary.
Check EAS modular cabling.
Verify AC input, check for open or
disconnected alarm leads.
Verify AC input.
Call for service on air conditioner
Check and adjust alarm sensor
Check and adjust alarm sensor
Repair HVAC
Set thermostat to 25 °C (78 °F)
Shield or relocate alarm sensor
6866538D01-C
February 2005
 EBTS System Troubleshooting

Miscellaneous Troubleshooting

Table 7-11 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Items

Indication Possible Failure Corrective Action

No over-the-air Open Ethernet cable, or missing
communication termination of Ethernet cable
Open or damaged BR antenna,
lead in or surge arrestor
No internal site Open Ethernet cable, missing
communication termination of Ethernet cable
(Ethernet)
Transmissions bad or Open or damaged BR antenna,
unusable lead in or surge arrestor
Bad VSWR reported Open or damaged BR antenna,
lead in or surge arrestor
Entire site off air after AC Power failure
several hours
Verify no open or damage to Ethernet cable,
or missing termination.
Verify no open or damage to BR antenna,
lead-in or surge arrestor.
Verify no open or damage to Ethernet cable,
or missing termination.
• Verify no open or damage to BR antenna,
lead-in or surge arrestor.
• Possible intermodulation desensitising,
carrier interference, X.21/ E1 link defect.
Verify no open or damage to BR antenna,
lead-in or surge arrestor.
Verify AC input.

6866538D01-C 7 - 33
February 2005
EBTS System Troubleshooting

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

7 - 34 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 8

8TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Controller Description
The TETRA Site Controller interfaces communication between the Network Infrastructure and
the EBTS via an X.21/E1 link in the Dimetra IP system. An Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN)
provides a communication link between the Controller and the Base Radios.
The Site Controller supports the following I/O:
• One 10/100baseT Ethernet port
• One 10Base2 Ethernet ports
• Four E1 connections
• One X.21 connection
• One IEEE 1284 port for Environmental Alarm System connection
• One front panel RS232 MMI
• Three time / frequency reference outputs
• GPS (internal receiver)
• RJ45 Serial port
• RJ45 Redundancy port

6866538D01-C 8-1
February 2005
TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Figures 8-1 and 8-2 show the Controller.

er

e
2 1

tiv

PS
w
4 3 2 1

Po

Ac

G
DCE Net Eqp

Net Eqp Power

O
LO F

Ye

AI

FE

BP

Lo
et
O

ca
llo
Service Access Sel/ Abort/

/C
S/

V/
Mon Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp

l
R

PD
Loop Reset

C
Figure 8-1 Site Controller (front view)

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2 10/100B-T

Figure 8-2 Site Controller (rear view)

Performance Specifications
Table 8-1 lists the Controller performance specifications.

Table 8-1 Controller Performance Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Input supply voltage range -41 to -60 VDC

Power Consumption 30 W typical;

50 W maximum

Operating temperature -30 to 60 °C (-22 to 140 °F)

Storage temperature -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)

Humidity 75% R.H. at 55 °C

8-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Indicators

Front Panel Indicators

The Front Panel Display provides a means for monitoring operation of the Controller using the
LED indicators. Refer to Table 8-2 for the system status indicators.

Ac r
e
e
tiv
PS
w
Po
4 3 2 1

G
O
LO F

Ye

AI

FE

BP RC

N PD

Lo
et
O

ca
llo

/C
S/

V/
w

l
Figure 8-3 LED Indicators

Table 8-2 System Status Indicators

Indicator Colour Function

Power Green ON: Power supplies are operating and CPU is not in reset mode.
OFF: Power supplies are not within tolerance, or the CPU is in reset
mode, no power to Site Controller

Active Green ON: When the E1/ X.21 and site reference relays are energised.
OFF: E1/ X.21 and site reference relays not energised
(In an EBTS with active and standby Site Controllers this LED
indicates, which Site Controller is active.)

GPS Green ON: GPS receiver is tracking satellites and frequency lock is attained.
FLASHING: Free running, or all transitory conditions such as High
Stability Oscillator training.
OFF: GPS receiver is not tracking satellites and Site Reference does
NOT have Frequency Lock.

4 Green Indicates the physical E1 connection (if configured for E1)

3 Green Indicates the physical E1 connection (if configured for E1)

2 Green Indicates the physical E1 connection (if configured for E1)

1 Green Indicates the physical E1 connection (if configured for E1)

LOS / OOF Red Loss of signal (if configured for E1)

Yellow Yellow Remote Alarm Indication (if configured for E1)

AIS Yellow Reserved

FE / CRC Red Framing error (if configured for E1).

BPV / PD Red Bi-polar violation / pulse density violation (if configured for E1).

Net Red ON: TSC is not in wide trunking mode i.e. local.
OFF: Normal operation or redundant TSC in standby mode.

6866538D01-C 8-3
February 2005
TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Table 8-2 System Status Indicators (continued)

Indicator Colour Function

Local Yellow ON: TSC is in local site trunking mode.

OFF: Normal operation.

Switches
The Controller contains three switches on the front panel:
• Power – a toggle switch that applies (position 1) and removes (position 0) power to the
Controller
• Abort / Reset – a pushbutton switch that aborts or resets the Controller CPU when pressed.
This button must be pressed for two seconds or more to perform a CPU reset.
• Sel / Loop – E1 net – a push button that selects a span or initiates network loopbacks when
pressed.

Front Panel Connectors

The following connectors are located on the front panel:
• Monitor SMB port – provides access for monitoring the time and frequency signals
• Service Access DB-9 connection – provides MMI serial port access
• Network Access bantam jacks – bantam jacks provide access for servicing the E1 network.

Table 8-3 Front Panel Switches

Switch Name Switch Function

Sel / Loop Push to select E1 span. Push and hold (> 2 seconds) to loop / deloop selected span.

Abort / Reset Push for abort. Push and hold (>2 seconds) for reset

Power Power On / Off switch

Table 8-4 Front Panel Connectors

Connector Function

Service Access Serial RS232 MMI (Man Machine Interface) DB9 female connector

Mon 5MHz / 1PPS monitor

8-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Table 8-4 Front Panel Connectors

Connector Function

E1 Net Net -> Eqp / Net: Break into E1 from network (receive E1)
Mon / Eqp Net -> Eqp / Mon: Monitor E1 from network (receive E1)
Net -> Eqp / Eqp: Break into E1 to equipment (receive E1)
Net <- Eqp / Net: Break into E1 to network (transmit E1)
Net <- Eqp / Mon: Monitor E1 to network (transmit E1)
Net <- Eqp / Net: Break into E1 from equipment (transmit E1)

Rear Panel Connectors

Table 8-5 lists and describes the Controller rear panel connectors. Figure 8-5 shows the locations
of the rear panel connectors.

Table 8-5 Controller Rear Panel Connectors

Connector Name Connector Type Description/Function

Battery Amp 350943 Center pin to -48V EBTS power supply battery; right
pin to EBTS power supply return
GPS N GPS antenna input. Via Equipment Cabinet junction
panel.
E1 RJ48C Port 1 to E1 span; port 2, ports 3 and port 4 are reserved
for future use.
Receive: Pins 1 & 2
Transmit: Pins 4 & 5
Redundancy RJ45 Redundant Site Controller
Serial RJ45 Optional modem interface (Requires additional cable.)
Parallel IEEE1284C EAS parallel port
Site Reference Output BNC BR reference inputs
X.21 DB-15 X.21 interface, connects controller to Network
Terminating Unit (NTU)
10Base2 Ethernet BNC Redundant Site Controller and the BR’s 10Base2 ports;
each 10Base2 port is terminated with two 50–ohm
loads. Refer to cabling diagrams Chapter 5 for
cabinet to cabinet details.
10/100BaseT Ethernet RJ45 Redundant Site Controller

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2 10/100B-T

Figure 8-4 Controller Rear Panel Connectors

6866538D01-C 8-5
February 2005
TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Site Controller Board

The following is a list of Board main features:
• PPC750 host processor with 1 MByte L2 cache
• 32 MBytes of FLASH on the PPC bus
• 64 MBytes of SDRAM on the PPC bus
• 16 MBytes SDRAM on the MPC8260 local bus
• 32 KBytes battery backed SRAM with real time clock on the MPC8260 local bus
• Four E1span lines supported by a single quad E1framer/line driver IC
• One 10/100BaseT ethernet port
• Three 10Base2 ethernet ports
• One X.21 port
• One IEEE 1284 parallel port
• Two RS232 serial ports
• GPS receiver
• Three time/frequency reference outputs

8-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

SITE CONTROLLER
BLOCK DIAGRAM

L2 CACHE

MEMORY

CPU

RS232 SERIAL
RS232 MMI
COMMUNICATIONS
PROCESSOR X.21

10/100 BASE T ETHERNET

3
10 BASE 2 ETHERNET

QUAD
T1/E1 4
FRAMER/ T1/E1
LINE DRIVER

IEEE 1284
INTERFACE EAS

GPS ANTENNA
+5V
POWER SITE
-48V SUPPLY REFERENCE 3 1PPS/5MHZ
+3.3V SITE REFERENCE

iSC412
011101JNM

Figure 8-5 Site Controller functional block diagram

6866538D01-C 8-7
February 2005
TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

FRU Replacement Procedures

Available FRUs
See Appendix C.

Site Controller Replacement

Perform Site Controller replacement as described in the following paragraphs.

Removal
Remove the Site Controller from the Equipment Cabinet as follows:
• Remove power from the Site Controller by setting the Power Supply ON/ OFF switch to
OFF.
• Set CTRL A and CTRL B breaker switches (as applicable) to OFF.
• Tag and disconnect the cabling from the Site Controller rear panel connectors.
• Remove the four M6 TORX screws which secure the Site Controller front panel to the
Equipment Cabinet mounting rails.
• While supporting the Site Controller, remove the Site Controller from the Equipment
Cabinet by sliding the Site Controller from front of the cabinet.

Installation
Install Site Controller in Equipment Cabinet as follows:
• If adding a Site Controller, install side rails in the appropriate Site Controller mounting
position in the rack.
• Connect the green/yellow ground conductor between the secondary ground bar and the
grounding lug on the rear of the housing, and ensure the connection is tight.
• While supporting the Site Controller, slide the Site Controller in the Equipment Cabinet
mounting position.
• Secure the Site Controller to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using the four M6
TORX screws. Tighten the screws to 4.5 nm (40 in-lb).
• Attach the Site Controller grounding cable. (Attach grounding cable before other cables.)
• Connect cabling to the Site Controller rear panel connectors as tagged during the Site
Controller removal. If adding a Site Controller, perform required cabling in accordance
with Cabling Diagrams in Chapter 5.
• Perform the Site Controller verification in accordance with Chapter 6, “Configuration and
Testing”.

8-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Redundant Site Controller Removal/Installation

When installing a redundant TSC ensure that the configuration of both TSC’s is the same. This
can be achieved by uploading the configuration via TESS of the active TSC and then downloading
this configuration via TESS to the redudant TSC.
For service to be unaffected, the standby Site Controller must be powered down prior to
disconnecting the unit. If the Interlock and LAN cables are removed when the Standby unit is
powered-up, the SR output on the standby will start transmitting and conflict with the SR from
the Active. This will cause the EBTS to go off-air. When reconnecting the unit, all connections
must be replaced before the unit is powered up.

Lithium Battery Caution

This TSC contains a lithium battery.
Danger of explosion if the TSC battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace battery only with the same
or equivalent type recommended by manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

TSC Battery Removal/Installation

1 Examine the contents of the flash filling system using the Configuration Mode command
attrib. Record the file attributes for each of the files.
2 Remove the Site Controller from the Equipment Cabinet. See “Removal” on page 8-8..
3 Remove the Site Controller cover by using a screwdriver.
4 Carefully remove the battery by hand or using two small screwdrivers.
5Insert the new Lithium battery (Motorola P/N M48T35AV) on TSC board as
shown in Figure 8-6.
Match the dot on battery with arrow on the PCB.

6 Close the Site Controller.

7 Install Site Controller in the Equipment Cabinet. See “Installation” on page 8-8.
8 Boot up into the Configuration Mode and clear the NV RAM contents using
.resetnvr -all.
9 Then restore file attributes in the flash filling system using the attrib command again.

6866538D01-C 8-9
February 2005
TETRA Site Controller (TSC)

Dot

Arrow

Figure 8-6 Inserting the Lithium Battery on TSC board

8 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 9

9Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

The EAS provides an electrical interface for alarm signals form the EBTS and site. The EAS
provides input/output lines to connect to alarms to monitor such environmental conditions as site
power, smoke detectors, and intrusion (burglar) detectors. Only one EAS is used per site. The
EAS also receives alarms from the Breaker Panel and the RFDS. Base Radio alarms are sent
directly to the Site Controller over the Ethernet LAN.
The EAS accepts 48 alarm inputs and provides eight control outputs. The inputs are opto-isolated
and sense an opening of the contact between the alarm sensor and its return (i.e. the contacts are
normally closed and activate the alarm when they open). Four RJ-45 connectors are used for the
alarm connections within the Equipment Cabinet. The remaining alarm inputs and control (relay)
outputs are accessible via two 50-pin connectors, only one of which is connected to the Junction
Panel. The eight alarm outputs may be configured to respond automatically to certain EBTS state
changes or to be manually controlled.

The eight alarm outputs are not supported with System Releases prior to D5.2 and on MBTS
platforms.

Alarm wiring is connected to the EAS via the junction panel at the top of the EBTS. Some of the
connections are dedicated to specific equipment, although several inputs are available for
assignment by the customer. The EAS interfaces with the Site Controller(s) via an IEEE 1284
interface.
Figure 9-1 show the front view of the EAS.

ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM SYSTEM

te

ct t
e
er

A pu
ra

A ut
iv

iv
w

ct
pe

ut
Po

In
O

Power

iSC402_EAS2

Figure 9-1 Environmental Alarm System (front view)

6866538D01-C 9-1
February 2005
Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Alarm System Cabling

All site alarm wiring enters from the top of the EBTS equipment cabinet via the junction panel.
For a detailed description of EAS cabling and connector pinouts please refer to the Chapter 4,
“Hardware Installation”.

Power Supply Unit

The EAS has its own power supply. The Power Supply Unit (PSU) accepts a -48 VDC nominal
input and provides all of the necessary internal DC voltages.

Indicators
Table 9-1 lists and describes the EAS status indicators.

Table 9-1 EAS Indicators

Indicator Color Function

Input Active green Indicates an active input.

Output Active amber Indicates an active output.

Power On green Indicates the unit is on and powered-up.

Operate green Indicates I/O board is operational

Performance Specifications
Table 9-2 lists the EAS specifications.

Table 9-2 EAS Performance Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Input supply voltage range -41 to -60 VDC

Power consumption Typical: 22 W

Maximum: 50 W

Operating temperature range -30 to 60 °C (-22 to 140 °F)

Storage temperature range -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)

Physical dimensions:
Height 1 Rack Unit (RU)
Width 482.6 mm (19”)

Humidity 75% R.H. at 55 °C

Maximum loop length 24 or 32 gauge wire => 610 m (2000’)

Alarm input “ON” current 5.0 mA min.

9-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Table 9-2 EAS Performance Specifications (continued)

Specification Value or Range

Alarm input “OFF” current 0.1 mA max.

Theory of Operation
The EAS provides a direct interface between the Site Controller and various site alarms. Figure
9-2 shows a functional block diagram of the EAS.
The EAS is configured for 48 dry contact input sensors and 8 relay closure outputs. Each I/O
module provides 4000 V of isolation between field wiring and sensitive control circuitry.
The Site Controller and EAS interact in a master/slave relationship. The Site Controller sends
commands to the EAS to determine the status of alarm inputs or set the state of control outputs.
The EAS, in turn, sends alarm status responses to the Site Controller.
The EAS continuously scans the status of the alarm inputs, ensuring that all alarms are
consistently monitored.

3
17 LED´s (ON POWER SUPPLY)
IEEE 1284
PORT1
FPGA 8
(XCS20XL) 8 RELAYS
RELAYS
(8X)
17
IEEE 1284 56 INPUTS
PORT2 20 OUTPUTS
16 BI
4 INPUTS 92 TOTAL I/O
5 OUTPUTS 48
48 OPTO- ALARM INPUTS
8 BIT ISOLATORS
(48X)

-48 VDC
10 MHz OSC

RESET OPTO- A/D

CONVERTER BATTERY
CONTROLLER ISOLATORS

SERIAL
EEPROM +3.3 VDC
(XC17S20XL)

-48 VDC FROM

DC-DC BATTERY
CONVERTER CONNECTOR

TEBTS029_2

Figure 9-2 EAS Block Diagram

6866538D01-C 9-3
February 2005
Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

EAS Output Relay Operation

The EAS output relays can be used to provide automatic or manual control of external equipment
that is connected to them. Each of the outputs can be independently configured to perform one of
the functions listed in Table 9-3. The function assigned to each output is configured using the BTS
Service Software and stored in the Site Controller’s configuration file. Any change requires a new
configuration file to be downloaded and the Site Controller to be reset before it will take effect.
Each of the output relays has either normally open contacts, or both normally open and normally
closed contacts (see later in this section). The term activated is used below to mean that the relay
is not in its powered off position – i.e. in an activated relay, normally open contacts are closed,
and normally closed contacts are open.

Table 9-3 EAS Output Functions

Function Description

Output Not Used The output will not activate under any circumstances. This is the default
behaviour.
Manual The output can be controlled manually using the eas_out interface
command. For example, eas_out 1 on will activate output relay 1.
Not Wide Trunking The output will automatically activate whenever the site is not in Wide
Trunking, and will be deactivated during Wide Trunking.
Warning or Higher The output will automatically activate when any one or more of the
following EBTS subsystems is in a state with severity of at least warning:
EBTS, Site Controller, Site Reference, EAS, Base Radio (including FRUs:
BRC, Receiver, PSU, Power Amplifier, Exciter).
The status bts interface command allows the state of
these subsystems to be queried.

Minor or Higher As above, but activated on severity of at least Minor.

Major or Higher As above, but activated on severity of at least Major.
Critical As above, but activated on severity of Critical.
Output Not Used The output will not activate under any circumstances. This is the default
behaviour.

To determine the reason why an output has activated or deactivated, the following interface
commands will be useful.
The eas_out command, with the output number given as an argument (e.g. eas_out 2 for output
number 2), displays details of the most recent event that caused the output to activate or
deactivate. For automatically controlled outputs, this information will describe a subsystem state
change. For manually controlled outputs, a manual control operation will be described. In both
cases, the date and time of the event are shown.
The status bts interface command displays the state and associated severity of all relevant
subsystems. For more detail, including the date and time at which each subsystem last changed
state, use status bts –l. If a particular subsystem is missing from the displayed list, this means
that state information has not been received from that subsystem since Site Controller power up
or reset.

9-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

The following points must be considered when connecting external equipment to the outputs:
• Outputs configured for Not Wide Trunking, as well as for any of the severity based
functions (e.g. Warning or Higher) will be active following Site Controller power up or
reset. This is because the EBTS will initially be in the “No Trunking” state, which has a
severity of Critical.
• The Base Radio state “Standby” has severity Minor. Therefore, outputs configured for
Warning or Higher / Minor or Higher operation will always be active in an EBTS with a
Standby Base Radio. (Not for EBTS PR 3.1)

Connectors
Figure 9-3 shows the rear view of the EAS. Table 9-4 lists and describes the EAS connectors.

P9 P5 P6 P10

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
RF2 RF3
Tanapa No.: CLN1685

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

P1 P3 P7 P8

iSC403_EAS2

Figure 9-3 EAS (rear view)

Table 9-4 describes the connectors shown in Figure 9-3.

Table 9-4 EAS Connectors

Connector Type Description

Battery– -48V RTN Mate-N-Lock Provides -48Vdc input power and ground connection from
Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel.
GND Ground stud Provides a connection for the chassis ground.
User Alarm/Control 50-pin Provides a connection for the site alarms. Refer to Chapter
(P9) 4, “EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation” for
pinout details.
All customer provisioned connections are inputs, except for
pins 1, 2, 26 and 3, 4, 28 which are outputs.
System 50-pin Provides a connection for the site alarms. Refer to Chapter
Alarm/Control 4, “EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation” for
(P10) pinout details.
1, 2, 26; 3, 4, 28; & 5, 6, 30 are outputs.
Controller A - 36-pin IEEE 1284 Provides a parallel link for alarm commands and responses
Parallel to Site Controller A.
(P1) The alarm commands and responses are passed via an IEEE
1284 cable.

6866538D01-C 9-5
February 2005
Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Table 9-4 EAS Connectors (continued)

Connector Type Description

Controller B - 36-pin IEEE 1284 Provides a parallel link for alarm commands and responses
Parallel to Site Controller B.
(P3) The alarm commands and responses are passed via an IEEE
1284 cable.
Control RJ48 Provides an alarm connection to the Equipment Cabinet
(P5) Circuit Breaker Panel.
The alarm is activated when any breaker is tripped or set to
the OFF position.
RF#1 modular Provides an alarm connection for the Receiver
(P6) Multicouplers (RMCs). Activates if an RMC power supply
or low noise amplifier failure occurs.
RF#2 modular Provides an alarm connection for the Receiver
(P7) Multicouplers (RMCs). Activates if an RMC power supply
or low noise amplifier failure occurs.
RF#3 modular Provides an alarm connection for the Receiver
(P8) Multicouplers (RMCs). Activates if an RMC power supply
or low noise amplifier failure occurs.
The alarm outputs are not supported with System Releases prior to D5.2.

EAS Alarm/Control Connector Pinouts

The information that follows lists the EAS connector pinouts and functions
• Tables 9-5 and 9-6 show the P9 and P10 User Alarm pinouts.
• Table 9-7 defines the alarm input number assignments and correlates the alarm inputs to pin
numbers on EAS connectors P5 through P8.
• Tables 9-8 and 9-9 correspondingly list the user and system relay outputs on connectors P9
and P10.
• Table 9-10 lists the internal relay outputs and correlates the outputs to pin numbers on EAS
connector P5.

Table 9-5 User Alarm Inputs (P9)

EAS P9
Junction Panel
(USER ALARM/CONTROL)
D-SUB 50 CONN. Pin No.
Champ 50 CONN. Pin No. Function
Input No.
(Usage)
Signal (Live) Signal (Live)
RETURN RETURN
Connection Connection

1 22 47 36 3
2 21 46 4 20
3 20 45 21 37
4 19 44 38 5
5 18 43 6 22

9-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Table 9-5 User Alarm Inputs (P9) (continued)

EAS P9
Junction Panel
(USER ALARM/CONTROL)
D-SUB 50 CONN. Pin No.
Champ 50 CONN. Pin No. Function
Input No.
(Usage)
Signal (Live) Signal (Live)
RETURN RETURN
Connection Connection

6 17 42 23 39
7 16 41 40 7
8 15 40 8 24
9 14 39 25 41
10 13 38 42 9
11 12 37 10 26
12 11 36 27 43
13 10 35 44 11
14 9 34 12 28
15 8 33 29 45
16 7 32 46 13
17 6 31 14 30
18 5 30 31 47

Table 9-6 System Alarm Inputs (P10)

EAS P10
(SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL)
Champ 50 CONN. Pin No.
Input No. Function (Usage)
Signal (Live)
RETURN
Connection

19 23 48
20 22 47
21 21 46
22 20 45
23 19 44
24 18 43
25 17 42
26 16 41
27 15 40
28 14 39
29 13 38
30 12 37

6866538D01-C 9-7
February 2005
Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Table 9-6 System Alarm Inputs (P10) (continued)

EAS P10
(SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL)
Champ 50 CONN. Pin No.
Input No. Function (Usage)
Signal (Live)
RETURN
Connection

31 11 36
32 10 35
33 9 34
34 8 33
35 7 32

Table 9-7 Internal Alarm Inputs (P5, P6, P7, P8)

EAS Connector Pin No.

Input No. Function (Usage)
Signal (live) Ground
Connection Connection

P5 (CONTROL)

48 1 2

P6 (RF#1)

40 1 2 Power Breaker Contact Monitor

41 3 6 Receiver LNA Alarm
42 5 8 Receiver PSU Alarm
43 7 4 Hybrid Combiner Fan Alarm

P7 (RF#2)

44 1 2 Power Breaker Contact Monitor

45 3 6 Receiver LNA Alarm
46 5 8 Receiver PSU Alarm
47 7 4 Hybrid Combiner Fan Alarm

P8 (RF#3)

36 1 2 Power Breaker Contact Monitor

37 3 6 Receiver LNA Alarm
38 5 8 Receiver PSU Alarm
39 7 4 Hybrid Combiner Fan Alarm

9-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Table 9-8 User Relay Outputs (P9)

EAS P9 (USER Junction Panel

Output Function
Contact ALARM/CONTROL) User Alarm/Control
Relay No. (Usage)
Champ 50 Conn. Pin No. D-Sub 50 Conn. Pin No.

1 COM 28 32 SPDT User

Relay
NC 4 48
NO 3 16
2 COM 26 17 SPDT User
Relay
NC 2 33
NO 1 50
NC= Normally closed; NO= Normally Open.
The alarm outputs are not supported with System Releases prior to D5.2.

Table 9-9 System Relay Outputs (P10)

EAS P10 (USER Junction Panel

Output Function
Contact ALARM/CONTROL) User Alarm/Control
Relay No. (Usage)
Champ 50 Conn. Pin No. D-Sub 50 Conn. Pin No.

3 COM 30 47 SPDT Relay

NC 6 14
NO 5 31
4 COM 28 32 SPDT Relay
NC 4 48
NO 3 16
5 COM 26 17 SPDT Relay
NC 2 33
NO 1 50
NC= Normally closed; NO= Normally Open.
The alarm outputs are not supported with System Releases prior to D5.2.

6866538D01-C 9-9
February 2005
Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

Table 9-10 Internal Relay Outputs (P5)

Relay No. Contact P5 (CONTROL) Pin No. Function (Usage)

6 NO 7 SPST relay
COM 8
7 NO 5 SPST relay
COM 6
8 NO 3 SPST relay
COM 4
NO= Normally Open.
The alarm outputs are not supported with System Releases prior to D5.2.

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26

Figure 9-4 EAS User Alarms/Control (P9) and System Alarms/Control (P10)

Figure 9-5 User Alarm/Control on Junction Panel

9 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

FRU Replacement Procedure

Perform Environmental Alarm System (EAS) replacement as described in the following
paragraphs.

Available EAS FRUs

See Appendix C.

Removal
Remove EAS as follows:
1 Remove power from the EAS by setting the Power Supply ON/OFF switch to the OFF
position.
2 Set the appropriate breaker switch on the Breaker Panel to OFF.
3 Tag and disconnect the cabling from the EAS rear panel connectors.
4 Remove the four M6 TORX screws which secure the EAS front panel to the Equipment
Cabinet mounting rails.
5 While supporting the EAS, remove the EAS from the Equipment Cabinet by sliding the EAS
from the front of cabinet.

Installation
Install EAS in Equipment Cabinet as follows:
1 While supporting the EAS, slide the EAS in the Equipment Cabinet mounting position.
2 Secure the EAS to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using the four M6 TORX screws.
Tighten the screws to 4.5 Nm (40 in-lb).
3 Connect ground wire to EAS ground stud (do this before connecting other cables).
4 Connect the cabling to the EAS rear panel connectors as tagged during the EAS removal.
Attach the 3083892X06 adapter to the 3083892X02 cable.
5 Set the EAS power switch to ON.

6866538D01-C 9 - 11
February 2005
Environmental Alarm System (EAS)

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

9 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 10

10RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Available RFDS FRUs

See Appendix C.

Cavity Combining RF Distribution

System
The cavity combining RF Distribution System (RFDS) contains the following:
• Cavity Combiner (four-channel, auto tune)
• Analog Power Monitor (APM) tray
• Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) tray
Figures 10-1 show the front view of the four channel auto tune RFDS, front cover removed.

6866538D01-C 10 - 1
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

PA #3 PORT PA #4 PORT
(TX 3 IN) (TX 4 IN)

CONNECTOR
PORT

PA #2 PORT
(TX 2 IN)

PA #1 PORT
(TX 1 IN)

CONNECTOR
PORT

TEBTS086
022101JNM

Figure 10-1 Four-Channel Auto Tune Cavity Combining RFDS (Front View)

10 - 2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Performance Specifications

General Cavity Combining RFDS Specifications

Table 10-1 lists the general specifications for the cavity combining RFDS.

Table 10-1 Cavity Combiner General Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Dimensions:
Height 8.0 EIA Rack Units (RU) 4 Channel Cavity Combiner
(4 RU Master and 4 RU Slave)
Width 482.6 mm (19")
Depth 430 mm (17")
Storage Temperature Range -40 to +95 °C (-40 ° to +203 °F)
Operating Temperature -20 to +55 °C (-4 ° to +131 °F)
Range
Frequency Range Cavity combiner is available in the frequency range 910 to 930 MHz
Tx - Rx Spacing 15 MHz
Tx - Tx Spacing (NOTE) 150 kHz (min.)
Port Impedance 50 Ω (nom.)
Input Supply -44 to -60 VDC (-48 VDC nom.)
Voltage/Current 0.6 Amps (max.)
Auto Tune Cavity
Combiner
Input Supply 24 VDC nom.
Voltage/Current 100 mA (max.)
APM 320 Watts (internally this is scaled back by a factor of 0.9)
Max. Power Reading Actual range 0 to 288 Watts
In all cases specified Tx-Rx spacing applies. Tx frequency shall always be 10 MHz
greater than respective Rx frequency.

Receive Branch Specifications

Refer to “Receiver Multicouplers” on page 10-13 for specifications.

6866538D01-C 10 - 3
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Transmitter to Antenna Specifications

Table 10-2 lists the cavity combining RFDS transmitter port-to-antenna port specifications.

Table 10-2 Auto Tune Cavity Combining Transmitter Port-to-Antenna Port Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Cavity Combiner Maximum Insertion Loss: 4.0 dB maximum (NOTE)

(@ 150 kHz Channel Spacing, four-channel) 3.2 dB typical
Transmit-to-Transmit Isolation (150 kHz channel spacing)
25 to 55 °C (77 to 131 °F) 32 dB minimum
-20 to 24.9 °C (-4 to 76.8 °F) 24 dB minimum
Input Return Loss 14 dB minimum
17 dB typical
Antenna-to-PA Isolation
25 °C (77 °F) 27 dB minimum
55 °C (131 °F) 23 dB minimum
-20 to 24.9 °C (-4 to 76.8 °F) 18 dB minimum
Total RFDS Insertion Loss 3.7 to 5.5 dB
150 kHz Channel Spacing, four-channel 5.0 dB typical
250 kHz Channel spacing, four-channel 4.7 dB typical
250 kHz Channel spacing, two-channel 4.5 dB typical
The cavities are factory set for 150 kHz spacing. Cavities are not tuned to customer
frequency and may be field tuned. Cavity combiner insertion loss is combiner
only.

Typical values for Manual Tune derived at 25° C. May change over temperature.

Analog Power Monitor (APM)

The APM measures the power readings and converts them into proportional DC voltages. For
example, 320 Watts would be 5 V out (forward voltage) and 160 Watts would be 2.5 V out. This
assumes antenna VSWR 1:1 (50 Ω). These voltages are then sent to the appropriate Base Radio
where they are used to determine the forward and reflected power readings. They are also used
to generate a VSWR alarm in the case of antenna feed problems.

10 - 4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Theory of Operation of Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC)

Figure 10-2 shows the block diagram of the auto tune cavity combiner.
A minimum of 2 watts is needed at a cavity input. The ATCC will automatically tune in 40
seconds maximum. For more detail, refer to the ATCC specification.
Once an RF signal greater than 2 watts is detected, the ATCC tunes the cavity and continuously
keeps it tuned over humidity, temperature and changing transmit frequency, so long as it does not
sense one of the following alarm conditions:
• Channel Spacing alarm
• VSWR alarm
• Failure to Tune alarm
Being tuned means that a cavity is within the insertion loss specification at the frequency of the
applied PI/4DQPSK signal that is within the average input power range specified above. Being
tuned also means that the cavity peak response is no greater than 25 kHz away from the TX carrier
centre frequency. If the TX carrier does not change channel or average power level, the auto tune
algorithm will not initiate a re-tuning on its own which exceeds +/- 300 kHz from the carrier
frequency. The only exception occurs when the fine tune timer event happens. The fine tune timer
is used to compensate for large variations in humidity and is default set to 480 Minutes. The
cavity combiner is temperature compensated but large variations in humidity can de-tune the
cavities up to 150kHz with the result of an increasing insertion loss.
When the fine tune timer event occurs all cavities with RF applied will be re-tuned for maximum
output power of each TX carrier. The Fine tune timer can be adjusted to compensate for fast
humidity variations for instance if the EBTS is installed in out door sites without air-conditioning.
The recommended setting of the Fine tune Timer, if the EBTS is installed in a controlled
environment is 480 Minutes. For sites where the EBTS is exposed to more than +/- 20% variation
in RH then the recommended setting of the Fine tune timer is 60-200 minutes depending on the
speed of the variation.
The BRC MMI command for setting the fine tune timer is explained in Chapter 3, “EBTS
Interface Commands”. Having a second cavity tune up and pass through the desired channel, the
desired channel’s insertion loss dips no more than 3 dB more than the max insertion spec for a
period of 0.25 seconds. The cavity tuning rate should be faster than 1 MHz per second.
If any of the three alarm conditions are activated per channel, that channel’s relay will be
energized in the normally open position. That channel’s Base Radio (BR) will need to have the
fault condition be a logic high (for alarm condition).
Where the ATCC does not initiate an alarm condition, but a BR senses one, then the alarm harness
connected to that BR is not making connection or is opened.
The following list contains control and monitoring features available via the RS-232 port:
• Request current tuned position/frequency of a specific cavity.
• Fine tune time feature, to re-tune each cavity with a specified interval.
• Park an individual cavity, but if RF power is still present, cavity will park and then retune
again.
• Input power: request current measured input reflected power of a specific cavity.
• VSWR: request input VSWR of an individual cavity.
• Tuning status of each cavity; parked, tuning, tuned, and parking.
• Alarm conditions of each cavity shall be reported when requested, to include: VSWR, sub-
band, channel spacing and failure to tune.

6866538D01-C 10 - 5
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

The Man Machine Interface (MMI) are Motorola’s commands to control the ATCC. Chapter 3
describes the MMI commands which are used on the Base Radio Controller (BRC) by using a
terminal with its serial RS-232 cable connected to the RS-232 port on the front of the BRC.
Before using ATC commands, type “set rear_serial autotune” to set up the BRC’s RS-232 port on
the backplane.

TX/RX
ANT

RF OUTPUT

24V
FROM RMC
ANALOG V FWD
POWER
METER V REV TO BASE RADIO 1
(APM) (ALARM HARNESS)
SENSE LINE

AUTO TUNE CAVITY COMBINER (ATCC)

COUPLER
CAVITY 4 CAVITY 3

CAVITY 2 CAVITY 1
SINGLE- 75 WATT 75 WATT SINGLE-
STAGE LOAD LOAD STAGE
ISOLATOR MOTOR OPTIC ISOLATOR
CONTROL SENSORS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
CH4 CH3

BASE RADIO 4 BASE RADIO 3

PA OUT LOGIC/CONTROL MODULE PA OUT

RS-232
-48V
BASE
ALARM RADIO 1
HARNESS

DETECTOR MODULE

SINGLE- 75 WATT 75 WATT SINGLE-

STAGE LOAD LOAD STAGE
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR

CH2 CH1

BASE RADIO 2 BASE RADIO 1

PA OUT PA OUT

TEBTS075B

Figure 10-2 Four-Channel Auto Tune Cavity Combining RFDS Block Diagram

Loads are 75 W to 65°C and 55 W up to 75°C.

10 - 6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Removal/Replacement Procedures (Cavity Combining RFDS)

Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts

Swap suspect RFDS Replacement with known non-defective parts to restore the RFDS to proper
operation. The following procedures provide replacement instructions. Please refer also to the
NOTE on page 4-4.

Anti-Static Precaution
The RFDS contains static-sensitive modules. Take precautionary measures to prevent static
discharge damage when servicing the RFDS. Refer to Static Sensitive Precautions in Chapter 2,
“Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools” for recommended precautions.

Refer to Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling” for RFDS cabling diagrams, if required.

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution. Turn off power to all base radios
in the equipment cabinet being tuned before performing the following procedures to prevent
serious injury.

Auto Tune Cavity Combiner Removal

Remove Cavity Combiner as follows:
1 Remove front cover from top of cabinet.
2 Remove Breaker Panel-to-cabinet door ground cable from front panel of Breaker Panel.
3 Remove all Cavity Combiner module bolts from front flanges Figure 10-3.
4 Remove cavity combiner front panels.
5 Remove Tx cables from isolator N connector input
6 Remove ground cables (one per two channel module)
7 Remove the RF interconnect harness from RF output of the combiner modules.
8 Remove the RS-232, alarm, and DC-power cables from the Motor controller (Left side of the
lowest 2 channel combiner).
9 Remove the Master/Slave combiner I/O DB-37 cable.
10 Put all cables in the free space below the cavity combiner

The cavity combiner can weigh up to 11,8 kg (26 lbs.). Use caution when removing or installing
cavity combiner into equipment rack. Make sure the combiner is fully supported when free from
mounting rails to avoid injury to personnel and equipment damage.

11 Use the handles to pull out the combiner modules.

6866538D01-C 10 - 7
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

12 With one person on either side and underneath the Cavity Combiner module, slide module out
the remaining distance and remove it from the rack.
13 Place the Cavity Combiner module down on a flat surface.

9 7

3 3

8
5
TEBTS151
022101JNM

Figure 10-3 Four-Channel AutoTune Cavity Combiner, front view. (with front cover removed)

10 - 8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Auto Tune Cavity Combiner Installation

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution. Turn off power to all base radios
in the equipment cabinet being tuned before performing the following procedures to prevent
serious injury.

Install Cavity Combiner as follows:

1 Remove front cover from top of cabinet.
2 Remove breaker-panel-to-cabinet door ground cable from front panel of breaker panel.
3 Make sure that the space for the cavity is clear of any cables. All cables that connect to the
cavity combiner should be resting in the free space below the cavity combiner.

The cavity combiner can weigh up to 11,8 kg (26 lbs.). Use caution when removing or installing
cavity combiner into equipment rack. Make sure the combiner is fully supported when free from
mounting rails to avoid injury to personnel and equipment damage.

4 With the left hand on the side of the cavity combiner and the right hand on the right handle
place the combiner on the side bracket in the cabinet. If Autotune cavity combiner is used the
Master combiner (with the DC + RS-232 connector) is placed on the top of the APM unit.
Then the slave unit is placed just below the breaker panel. If only two channels are used only
the master combiner is present.
5 Pull all cables up from below.
6 Attach all Combiner ground cables
7 For Autotune cavity combiner. If the slave unit is present, connect the DB-37 cable. Connect
the RS-232, DC-power and alarm cable. Connect the TX cables to the N connectors on the
isolators. If slave unit is present connect the RF interconnect harness to the RF output of the
two combiners.
8 Mount the combiner front cover plates.
9 Replace the cavity combiner module bolts.
10 Replace the cabinet door-to-breaker-panel ground to front panel of breaker panel.
11 Return the front cover of top of cabinet.

6866538D01-C 10 - 9
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

7 6

9 9

7
6
TEBTS152
022101JNM

Figure 10-4 Four-Channel AutoTune Cavity Combiner

Analog Power Monitor (APM) Replacement

Replace the Analog Power Monitor (APM) as follows:

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution. Turn off power to all base radios
in the equipment cabinet being tuned before performing the following procedures to prevent
serious injury.

1 Remove the APM module bolts.

2 Pull out the APM module 10 cm.
3 Remove the TX N connector cables from the APM unit.
4 Pull out the module 5cm further.
5 Remove the DB-9 connector on the back of the APM unit.
6 Remove the APM module.

When replacing the APM module, the following must be noted: A special chrome screw, which
provides increased earth connection is located on the lower left hole of the front panel and must
be always in this position.

10 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Expansion Option

Removal/Installation Procedures Expansion Cable

Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts

Swap suspect RFDS Replacement with known non-defective parts to restore the RFDS to proper
operation. The following procedures provide replacement instructions.

Anti-Static Precaution
The RFDS contains static-sensitive modules. Take precautionary measures to prevent static
discharge damage when servicing the RFDS. Refer to Static Sensitive Precautions in Chapter 2,
“Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools” for recommended precautions.

Refer to Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling”, if required.

RF Energy hazard and equipment damage precaution. All base radios in the equipment cabinet
must be dekeyed before performing the following procedures to prevent serious injury.

Expansion Cable Removal

Remove the Expansion Cable.
1 Detach the expansion cable from the primary rack.
2 Pull the expansion cable out of the Cavity Combiner module.
3 Pull the expansion cable routed below the ATCC and out through the side of the cabinet.

6866538D01-C 10 - 11
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

PRIMARY RACK EXPANSION RACK

TEBTS127B

Figure 10-5 Expansion Cable Removal

Expansion Cable Installation

1 On the side closest to the primary rack, guide the expansion cable through the side wall of the
cabinet.
2 Route the cable below the ATCC.
3 Guide the cable through the Cavity Combiner module.
4 Attach the expansion cable to the Cavity Combiner in the expansion rack.

10 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Receiver Multicouplers
Figure 10-6 shows a block diagram of the receiver multicouplers. Distribution of diversity receive
antenna signals are distributed to the diversity receivers in the BRs using receiver multicouplers
(RMCs).

RMC Operation and Receive Signal Flow

Each receive branch of the prime RMC uses a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) and a Splitter that
converts a single receive signal into multiple buffered receive signals. The Rx branches function
identically.
The LNA takes the RX out signal from the Junction Panel. The RMC then provides four outputs
and an expansion output. Each output is fed to a single receiver in the prime rack Base Radios
(BRs). Up to four prime rack BRs are supported. The expansion output can be used to feed an
expansion rack RMC with 4 BRs giving a total of 8 BRs per antenna. Outputs not used are to be
terminated using a 50 Ω termination.
The RMC uses two Power Supply boards (power supply A and power supply B) in a dual-
redundant arrangement. The Power Supply boards are located in the RMC tray. The power
supplies converts the -48 VDC (hot) site power to +12 VDC and +24 VDC. The +12 VDC is used
for the RMC LNAs and the Power Monitor. The +24 VDC is used to support the Power Monitor
module.
Each power supply board is equipped with green and red LED indicators that indicate when the
board is receiving power and functioning properly. The RFS1 and RFS2 circuit breakers on the
cabinet breaker panel control the application of -48 VDC power to the A and B Power Supply
boards.
Table 10-3 lists the RMC antenna port-to-receiver port specifications for a single receive branch.

Table 10-3 Antenna Port-to-Receiver Port Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Gain:
Antenna Port-to-RX OUT 11.9 + 1 dB (typ)
Antenna Port-to-Expansion Output 20 + 1 dB (typ)

6866538D01-C 10 - 13
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

RECEIVER BRANCHES

ANT ANT
1 2

RMC RMC
RX 1 BRANCH RX 2 BRANCH

LNA LNA

4 - W AY 4 - W AY

50 Ω 50 Ω

6 - WAY 6 - WAY

TO RX1 BR INPUTS TO RX2 BR INPUTS

12V

LNA ALARM

LNA2 ALARM BREAKER ALARM

TO EAS
LNA1 ALARM PS ALARM

PS1 ALARM

PS2 ALARM

POWER MONITOR
SUPPLY (24V)
ALARM/
24V INTERFACE

POWER SUPPLY B POWER SUPPLY A

EXPANSION RMS ALARM

BREAKER STATUS
-48V
-48V A
-48V
-48V B

TEBTS088B

Figure 10-6 RMC Block Diagram

RMC Alarm Output

Each RMC provides two alarm relay contact closure pairs that send alarm conditions to the
Environmental Alarm System (EAS) in the event of RMC power supply or LNA failure. Under
normal operating conditions (no alarm conditions present), the alarm outputs for both of these
alarms are closed. Upon detection of an alarm condition, the respective alarm output will open.
Via the cabinet alarm wiring harness, the alarm signals are routed from the Telco connector on
the RMC to the RF#1 connector on the EAS.

10 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

RMC Removal/Replacement Procedures

Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts

Instructions are provided below for replacing FRUs within the RFDS. Figure 10-7 identifies the
RMC tray assemblies and FRUs. Replace suspect FRUs with known non-defective FRUs to
restore the RFDS to proper operation.

Anti-Static Precaution
The RFDS contains static-sensitive modules. Take precautionary measures to prevent static
discharge damage when servicing the RFDS. Refer to Static Sensitive Precautions in Chapter 2,
“Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools” for recommended precautions.

Refer to Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling” for RFDS cabling diagrams, if required.

I/O BOARD EXPANSION SPLITTER

(1 OF 3)
1
2 (1 OF 12)

4 4

A 3

A 5

7
5

ALARM BOARD POWER SUPPLY A POWER SUPPLY B

NOTE: THREE LNA/SPLITTER BOARDS (NOT SHOWN) ARE LOCATED ON UNDERSIDE OF

RX TRAY. ATTACHING HARDWARE AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION IS SIMILAR TO
THAT FOR THE EXPANSION SPLITTER. EBTS490
090399JNM

Figure 10-7 RMC FRU/Assembly Replacement

6866538D01-C 10 - 15
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

LANYARD CLIP (QTY 2)

RM RFDS
CT
RA
Y
EA
PULL OUT USING S
HANDLE
CO
NT
RO SITE
LLE
R

BA
SE
RA
DIO
NOTE: REMOVE THE LANYARD CLIP TO
REMOVE THE ENTIRE RMC TRAY.
BA
SE
RA
DIO

IN SERVICE POSITION
TEBTS125B

Figure 10-8 RMC Tray in the Service Position

Use Figure 10-8 as a reference for the removal and installation procedures that follow. The figure
shows the RMC Tray in the "in-service" position.

Expansion Splitter Board Removal

With RMC tray removed and in service position, remove the Expansion Splitter Board (see
Figures 10-7 and 10-8) as follows:
1 Tag and remove all BNC connections at the R1 through R4 BNC connectors on the Expansion
Splitter Board.
2 Remove two M3.5 TORX screws (1, Figure 10-7) which secure board assembly to Rx Tray
chassis (one screw on each side of board). Save screws for reuse.
3 Partially draw board assembly out of Rx Tray until blindmate connector at front of board is
disengaged.
4 Remove board from slot enough to gain access to input port SMA cable termination on top of
board. Disconnect SMA cable from board connector.
5 Remove board fully from Rx Tray slot.

Expansion Splitter Board Installation

With RMC tray removed and in service position, install the Expansion Splitter Board (see Figures
10-7 and 10-8) as follows:
1 Align the Expansion Splitter Board with Rx Tray board slot. Partially slide board into slot
enough to allow Rx input SMA cable to mate with SMA connector on top of board.
2 Connect SMA cable to SMA connector on top of board. Using a breaking-type 5/16” torque
wrench, torque the SMA connector to 0.8 Nm (5 in-lb).

10 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

3 Carefully slide board fully into slot, making certain blindmate connection at front of board is
fully mated to Rx Tray chassis midplane connector.
4 Install two M3.5 TORX screws (1, Figure 10-7) one on each side of assembly, (saved during
removal) which secure board assembly to Rx Tray chassis.
5 Connect cabling to the R1 through R4 BNC connectors on the Expansion Splitter Board as
tagged during removal.
If adding the Expansion Splitter Board, perform the required cabling in accordance with
Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling”.

LNA/Splitter Board Removal

With RMC tray removed and in service position, remove the LNA/Splitter Board (see Figures
10-7 and 10-8) as follows:
1 Tag and remove all BNC connections at the E-R1 through E-R6 BNC connectors on the
LNA/Splitter Board.
2 Remove two M3.5 TORX screws (1, Figure 10-7) which secure board assembly to RMC
chassis (one screw on each side of board). Save screws for reuse.
3 Partially draw board assembly out of RMC until blindmate connector at front of bard is
disengaged.
4 Remove board from slot enough to gain access to SMA cable termination on underside of
board. Disconnect SMA cable from board connector (or inline attenuator, if so equipped).
5 Remove board fully from RMC slot.
6 If multicoupler board is equipped with inline input attenuator, remove attenuator and save for
reuse.

LNA/Splitter Board Installation

With RMC tray removed and in service position, install the LNA/Splitter Board (see Figures 10-7
and 10-8) as follows:
1 Align the LNA/Splitter Board with Rx Tray board slot. Partially slide board into slot enough
to allow Rx input SMA cable to mate with SMA connector (or attenuator, if so equipped) on
underside of board.
2 Connect SMA cable to SMA connector on underside of board. Using a breaking-type 5/16”
torque wrench, torque the SMA connector to 0.8 Nm (5 in-lb).
3 Carefully slide board fully into slot, making certain blindmate connection at front of board is
fully mated to RMC chassis midplane connector.
4 Install two M3.5 TORX screws (1, Figure 10-7) one on each side of assembly, (saved during
removal) which secure board assembly to RMC chassis.
5 Connect cabling to the E-R1 through E-R6 BNC connectors on the LNA/Splitter Board as
tagged during removal.
If adding the LNA/Splitter Board, perform the required cabling in accordance with Chapter 5,
“Interconnection and Cabling”.

6866538D01-C 10 - 17
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

I/O Board Removal

During I/O Board replacement, the site will become inoperative due to loss of alarm and certain
power functions, the site should be shut down from the central site. When followed as written,
this procedure keeps the amount of downtime to a minimum. It is recommended to perform this
procedure during off-peak periods.

With RMC tray removed and in service position, remove the I/O Board (see Figures 10-7 and
10-8) as follows:
1 Remove two M3.5 TORX screws (2, Figure 10-7 that secure I/O Board to Rx Tray chassis.
Save screws for reuse.
2 Slide I/O Board away from Rx Tray midplane until connector at front of board is disengaged.
3 With board still connected to RJ45 alarm and Mate-N-Lock power connectors, tag wiring
connections. Position board aside with all connections intact.

I/O Board Installation

With RMC tray removed and in service position, remove the I/O Board (see Figures 10-7 and
10-8) as follows:
1 Disconnect connection on board being replaced. Connect harness to replacement I/O Board
noting tagged position.
2 Place new I/O Board in mounting position.
3 Align connector at front of board with mating connector on Rx Tray chassis midplane. Gently
slide board toward front of Rx Tray chassis until connectors are fully mated.
4 Secure board using two M3.5 TORX screws (2, Figure 10-7) saved during removal.
5 Lifting RMC tray into place, align to opening and slide into cabinet until panel touches
mounting rails.
6 Install and tighten the four M6 TORX HD screws that mount the RMC tray to the cabinet
mounting rails and torque to 4.5 Nm (40 in-lb).
7 Reactivate site via OMC.

Power Supply Board Removal

The Rx Tray Power Supply Boards are located in the Rx Tray as shown in Figure 10-7. Because
two Power Supply Boards are used in a redundant arrangement, a defective power supply board
can be replaced without taking the system out of operation.

Power Supply Board opposite to board being replaced remains energized. When replacing board,
use care to prevent accidental contact of tools with components and/or surfaces of energized
board. Failure to adhere to caution may result in damage to equipment.

10 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

With RMC tray removed and in service position, detect and remove a defective Power Supply
Board (see Figures 10-7 and 10-8) as follows:
1 Remove six M3.5 TORX screws (4, Figure 10-7) that secure cover to Rx Tray chassis (save
screws for reuse). Remove cover.
2 Determine which Power Supply Board has failed by observing the green and red LED
indicators on each board. (On properly functioning supply, green LED is lit and red LED is off.)
3 Noting the Power Supply Board that has failed, on Breaker Panel turn off power for the
defective power supply as follows:

Power Supply Board Breaker Panel Circuit Breaker

A (left board as viewed from front) RFS1

B (right board as viewed from front) RFS2

4 On failed board, remove five M3.5 TORX screws (5, Figure 10-7) that secure to Rx Tray
chassis. Save screws for reuse.
5 Remove two M3 TORX screws (6, Figure 10-7) that secure board, along with D120 and D122
TO-220 devices, to Rx Tray chassis.
6 Slide board towards front of Rx Tray chassis until connector at rear of board disengages
mating connector on Rx Tray chassis midplane. Remove board from chassis.

Power Supply Board Installation

With RMC tray removed and in service position, install Power Supply Board (see Figures 10-7
and 10-8) as follows:
1 Place Power Supply Board in mounting position on Rx Tray chassis floor.
2 Align connector at rear of board with mating connector Rx Tray chassis midplane. Gently
slide board toward rear of chassis until connectors are fully mated.
3 Start (but do not tighten) five M3.5 TORX screws (5, Figure 10-7) that secure board to Rx
Tray chassis.
4 Note the TO-220 devices (D120 and D122) on the board, each secured by a screw (6, Figure
10-7) in the device mounting tabs.
5 Start (but do not tighten) two M3 TORX screws (6, Figure 10-7) that secure the D120 and
D122 TO-220 devices to the Rx Tray chassis.
6 Tighten five screws (5, Figure 10-7) and two screws (6, Figure 10-7) evenly.
7 Apply power to board being replaced by resetting appropriate breaker on Breaker Panel.
Verify proper operation by observing green LED (only) indicator on board.
8 Place cover (3, Figure 10-7) in mounting position, making certain any adjacent wiring is not
pinched under cover.
9 Secure cover using six M3.5 TORX screws (4, Figure 10-7).
10 Carefully slide Rx Tray fully into cabinet.
11 Secure the Rx Tray to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using four M6 TORX screws.
Tighten the screws to 4.5 Nm (40 in-lb).

6866538D01-C 10 - 19
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Alarm Board Removal

During I/O Board replacement, the site will become inoperative due to loss of alarm and certain
power functions, the site should be shut down from the central site. When followed as written,
this procedure keeps the amount of downtime to a minimum. It is recommended to perform this
procedure during off-peak periods.

With RMC tray removed and in service position, remove Alarm Board (see Figures 10-7 and
10-8) as follows:
1 Remove six M3.5 TORX screws (4, Figure 10-7) that secure cover to Rx Tray chassis (save
screws for reuse). Remove cover.
2 Remove four M3.5 TORX screws (7, Figure 10-7) that secure Alarm Board to Rx Tray
chassis. Save screws for reuse.
3 Using the finger hole in the Alarm Board, place finger in hole and pull board forward until
connector at rear of board disengages mating connector on Rx Tray chassis midplane.
Remove board from chassis.

Alarm Board Installation

With RMC tray removed and in service position, install Alarm Board (see Figures 10-7 and 10-8)
as follows:
1 Place Alarm Board in mounting position on Rx Tray chassis floor.
2 Align connector at rear of board with mating connector on Rx Tray chassis midplane.
3 Using finger hole in board, gently slide board toward rear of Rx Tray chassis until connector
is fully mated.
4 Secure board using four M3.5 TORX screws Remove Alarm Board (7, Figure 10-7) saved
during removal.
5 Place cover (3, Figure 10-7) in mounting position, making certain any adjacent wiring is not
pinched under cover.
6 Secure cover using six M3.5 TORX screws (4, Figure 10-7) saved during removal.
7 Carefully slide Rx Tray fully into cabinet.
8 Secure the Rx Tray to the Equipment Cabinet mounting rails using four M6 TORX screws.
Tighten the screws to 4.5 Nm (40 in-lb).
9 Reactivate site via OMC.

Analog Power Monitor (APM)

The analog power monitor is a directional coupler that measures forward and reverse power and
translates that into DC voltages. The DC voltages from the analog power monitor are connected
to the Base Radio, which measures the two DC voltages and uses them to report forward and
reverse power and the SWR (standing wave ratio). The SWR is calculated by the BR based on
the two DC voltages.

10 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

The purpose of the APM is to monitor the health of the antenna system. It is not an accurate
absolute power measurement. The APM has been placed in the TX path as a compromise between
measurement accuracy and minimization of potential problems caused by a natural phenomenon
known as passive intermodulation. Passive Intermodulation occurs when two transmitter signals
are mixed in non-ideal metal-to-metal joints such as connectors and is particularly critical in
duplexed systems with many carriers.
The Analog Power Monitor is power supplied from the RMC (Receiver Multi Coupler).

Figure 10-9 Analog Power Monitor

Table 10-4 Key Specs for APM

Frequency Range 932 to 942 MHz

Avg. RF Power Input Maximum 320 W
Peak Instantaneous Power (PIP,8 ch) 5400 W
Worst Case Load 4:1
Passive Intermodulation (two tone, 43 dBm) Max -150 dBc, typical -160 dBc
Forward DC voltages (0 W, 160 W, 320 W), tolerance 0 V, 2.5 V, 5.0 V, +/- 10%
Reverse DC voltage (0 W, 160 W, 320 W), tolerance 0 V, 2.5 V, 5.0 V, +/- 10%
DC Power 24 V +/- 10%
DC current, typical/max 25 mA

Table 10-5 Pin Definitions

Pin Function

1 Reflected Output (0-5V)

2 Power Supply Input +24 V)
3 Ground (metering status) (Tells the BR that an APM is connected)
4 Ground (signal return)
5 Forward Output (0-5V)
6 Not connected
7 Power Supply Ground
8 Ground
9 Not connected

6866538D01-C 10 - 21
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Alarm/Power Monitor Pinouts and Wiring

Table 10-6 and 10-7 list the connector pinouts within the cabinet alarm wiring harness used for
RMC and power monitor functions.

Table 10-6 I/O Board Rear Panel Connector Pinouts

Function/Connector
Pin
Diagnostics Breaker Alarm Status Alarm Standard Alarm Auxiliary
1 Breaker RMC Power Supply Alarm
return
2 Breaker return Expansion LNA Alarm return
3 LNA #1 Alarm RMC MC Alarm RMC Multicoupler Alarm return
4 LNA #2 Alarm RMC Power Supply Alarm
5 LNA #3 Alarm RMC PS Alarm Expansion LNA Alarm
6 LNA Alarm Expansion RMC MC Alarm return RMC Multicoupler Alarm
7 Breaker Alarm return PS Alarm Expansion return
8 RMC PS Alarm return Breaker Alarm PS Alarm Expansion
9
10
11
12
13 PS#1 +12 VDC Alarm
14 PS#1 +24 VDC Alarm
15 PS#2 +12 VDC Alarm
16 PS#2 +24 VDC Alarm
17 PS Alarm Expansion
18 N/C
19
20 GND
21 GND
22 GND
23 GND
24 GND
25 N/C
26 N/C
27 +24 VDC
28 +24 VDC
29 +24 VDC
30 +24 VDC
31 N/C
32 N/C
33 +12 VDC
34 +12 VDC
35 +12 VDC
36 +12 VDC

10 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RF Distribution System (RFDS)

Table 10-7 Power Monitor DB-9 Connector Pinouts

DB-9 Connector Pin Description

1 EXT VREF (reflected power representative voltage)

2 +24 VDC IN, + 10%
3 MTR STAT, #1 (meter status, #1) (GND)
4 GND, EXT_V RTN
5 EXT VFWD (forward power representative voltage)
6 not used
7 GND, 24 VDC RTN
8 GND
9 not used

The I/O Board power connectors provide the I/O board power interface from the cabinet breaker
panel -48 VDC power feed to the RFDS and combiner deck fans. (The I/O Board power
connectors are mounted on the printed circuit board surface.) The connectors are as follows:
• -48 VDC input – 8-pin Mate-N-Lock header connector P1008. Receives -48 VDC feed from
RFS1 & RFS2 connector on the breaker panel.
• RFDS Power output (power monitor interface) – Mate-N-Lock header connector which
terminates to 9-pin Submin-D connector P5.
Table 10-8 lists the power connector pinouts for the I/O Board.

Table 10-8 I/O Board Power Connector Pinouts

Pin Function/Connector (-48 VDC Input P1008)

1 -48 VDC (’A’ side)

2 Return (’A’ side)
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 -48 VDC (’B’ side)
6 Return (’B’ side)
7 N/C
8 N/C

6866538D01-C 10 - 23
February 2005
RF Distribution System (RFDS)

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

10 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 11

11Base Radio

Available Base Radio FRUs

See Appendix C.

Base Radio Overview

The Base Radio provides reliable digital base radio capabilities in a compact software-controlled
design. Increased channel capacity is provided through voice compression techniques and Time
Division Multiplexing (TDM).
The modular design of the Base Radio reduces down-time through the use of Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs). The Base Radio contains the following FRUs:
• Base Radio Controller (BRC)
• Exciter
• Power Amplifier (PA)
• Power Supply
• 3X Receiver
The modular design of the Base Radio also offers increased shielding and provides easy handling.
All FRUs connect to the backplane through blindmate connectors. Figure 11-1 shows the front
view of the Base Radio.

3X RECEIVER

POWER SUPPLY

EXCITER STATUS B R P S E X P A C T L R 1 R 2 R 3 RESET CONTROL

75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

TEBTS060B

6866538D01-C 11 - 1
February 2005
Base Radio

Figure 11-1 Base Radio (Front View)

Controls and Indicators

The Power Supply and BRC are the only modules containing controls and indicators for the Base
Radio. The indicators provide a means for monitoring various status and operating conditions of
the Base Radio, and also aids in isolating failures. The controls and indicators for both modules
are discussed in the Power Supply and BRC sections of this chapter.
The Power Supply contains two front panel indicators; the BRC contains eight front panel
indicators. The Power Supply contains a power switch used to apply power to the Base Radio.
The BRC contains a RESET switch used to reset the Base Radio.

Performance Specifications

General Specifications
General specifications for the Base Radio are listed in Table 11-1.

Table 11-1 Base Radio General Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Dimensions:
Height 5 EIA Rack Units (RU)
Width 482.6 mm (19 ")
Depth 425 mm (16.75 ")

Operating Temperature -20 to 55 °C (-4 to 131 °F)

Storage Temperature -40 to 85 °C (-22 to 185 °F)

Rx Frequency Range 917 to 927 MHz

Tx Frequency Range 932 to 942 MHz

Tx - Rx Spacing 15 MHz

Tx - Tx Spacing Minimum 150 kHz

Frequency Generation Synthesised, 6.25 kHz

Frequency Resolution 6.25 kHz

Digital Modulation Π/4 DQPSK

Power Supply Input: -48 VDC (-44 to -60 VDC)

Diversity Branches Up to 2

11 - 2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Transmit Specifications
The Base Radio transmit specifications are listed in Table 11-2.

In Table 11-2, all specifications are observed at RF Distribution System output, unless otherwise
stated.

Table 11-2 Transmit Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Average Power Output (at Base Radio output) 5 to 80 W

Π/4 DQPSK Transmitted Power
(measured at RFDS antenna port): 25 W (44 dBm)
Normal Conditions + 2.0 dB
Extreme Conditions +3.0/-4.0 dB
Transmitter Power (off/standby) -36 dBm/-40 dBc
Frequency Stability (NOTE) 7 ppb
Transmit Bit Error Rate (BER) 0.01%
Transmitter Power Control 12 dB in 1 dB steps
Carrier Feedthrough -26 dBc
Transmitter Modulation Accuracy 10% RMS/burst (30% peak/symbol)
Synchronisation 1/4 symbol
Adjacent-channel Power due to Modulation
(Normal Conditions):
+ 25 kHz -55 dBc
+ 50 kHz -65 dBc
+ 75 kHz -65 dBc
Adjacent-channel Power due to Modulation
(Extreme Conditions):
+ 25 kHz -45 dBc
+ 50 kHz -55 dBc
+ 75 kHz -55 dBc
Adjacent-channel Power due to Switching -50 dBc
Adjacent-channel Power due to Linearisation -45 dBc
Tx Conducted Emission:
100 - 250 kHz -80 dBc
250 - 500 kHz -85 dBc
500 - frb kHz -90 dBc
At receive band -100 dBc
Intermodulation Attenuation:
Single BR 70 dB
Multiple BRs 60 dB
I & Q Balance -25 dBc
RF Input Impedance 50 Ω (nom.)
Stability with site reference connected to station and locked to GPS.

6866538D01-C 11 - 3
February 2005
Base Radio

Receive Specifications
The receive specifications are listed in Table 11-3.
In Table 11-3, all specifications are via the RF Distribution System, unless otherwise stated.
Table 11-3 Receive Specifications

Specification Value or Range

Sensitivity
(normal conditions, unprotected T1, static, 4% BER):
population mean -117.5 dBm
spec limit -115.0 dBm
Sensitivity (normal conditions, faded, TU50, 2.2% BER):
population mean -108.5 dBm
spec limit -106.0 dBm
Degradation (extreme conditions, static and faded) 6 dB
Nominal Error Rate (unprotected T1):
Static, -85 to -40 dBm <0.01%
Static, -40 to -20 dBm <0.1%
TU50, -85 to -40 dBm <0.4%
Maximum On-channel Desired Power Level -20 dBm
Co-channel Interference
(19 dB C/I, faded, unprotected T1): 2.0%
TU50 3.7%
Adjacent Channel Interference (faded, unprotected T1,
normal conditions, 45 dB C/I, at -103 dBm):
TU50 2.0%
Adjacent Channel Interference (faded, unprotected T1,
normal conditions, 45 dB C/I, at strong signal (-65 dBm)):
TU50 2.0%
Adjacent Channel Interference (faded, unprotected T1,
extreme conditions, 35 dB C/I, at -97 dBm):
TU50 2.0%
Blocking (static, normal conditions, 4% BER):
50 to 100 kHz -40 dBm
100 to 200 kHz -35 dBm
200 to 500 kHz -30 dBm
>500 kHz -25 dBm
Spurious Responses (normal conditions) 6 max
Intermodulation Response Rejection:
Normal conditions 65 dB
1st Image 70 dB
1/2 IF 70 dB
2nd Image 70 dB
1/2 2nd IF 77 dB

ETSI Compliance Notice: The Base Radio is only ETSI-compliant when used in conjunction with
Motorola-supplied RF Distribution System (RFDS). The Base Radio shall not be used without a
Motorola-approved RFDS.

11 - 4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Theory of Operation

The Base Radio operates in conjunction with a Site Controller via a properly terminated 10base2
Ethernet link. The following description assumes such a configuration. Figure 11-2 shows an
overall block diagram of the Base Radio.
Power is applied to the DC Power inputs located on the Base Radio backplane.
Power is applied to the Base Radio by setting the Power Supply power switch to the on position.
Upon power-up, the Base Radio performs self-diagnostic tests to ensure the integrity of the unit.
These tests are primarily confined to the BRC and include memory and Ethernet verification
routines.
After the self-diagnostic tests are complete, the Base Radio reports any alarm conditions present
on any of its modules. All alarms are reported to the site controller via the Ethernet LAN. Alarm
conditions may also be verified locally through the STATUS port located on the front of the BRC
and the use of a service computer.
The software resident in FLASH on the BRC registers the Base Radio with the site controller via
the Ethernet LAN. Once registered, the Base Radio software is downloaded via the Ethernet LAN
and is executed from SDRAM. Operating parameters for the Base Radio are included in this
download. This software allows the Base Radio to perform call processing functions.
The Base Radio operates in a TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) mode. This mode,
combined with voice compression techniques, provides an increased channel capacity ratio of as
much as 4 to 1. Both the receive and transmit signals of the Base Radio are divided into 4
individual time slots. Each receive slot has a corresponding transmit slot; this pair of slots
comprises a logical RF channel.
The Base Radio uses diversity reception for increased talkback coverage area and improved
quality. The Base Radio contains a triple receiver module in which all three diversity receivers are
packaged in a single-slot module. Two Receivers are used with two-branch diversity sites, and
three Receivers are used with three-branch diversity sites.
All Receivers within a given Base Radio are programmed to the same receive frequency. The
signals from each receiver are fed to the BRC where a diversity combining algorithm is performed
on the signals. The resultant signal is processed for error correction and then sent to the site
controller via the Ethernet LAN with the appropriate control information regarding its
destination.
The transmit section of the Base Radio is comprised of two separate FRUs, the Exciter and Power
Amplifier (PA). The Exciter processes the information to transmit from the BRC in the proper
modulation format. This low level signal is sent to the PA where it is amplified to the desired
output power level. The PA is a continuous-keyed linear amplifier. A power control routine
monitors the output power of the Base Radio and adjusts it as necessary to maintain the proper
output level.

6866538D01-C 11 - 5
February 2005
 11 - 6
Base Radio

RECEIVER MODULE
RECEIVER MODULE
DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
RECEIVER MODULE
MIXER
RF IN DSP BUS 28 V / INVERTER DC INPUT
INPUT FILTER 44 - 60 VDC
FROM LPF/ BAND BAND DIGITAL CUSTOM CIRCUITRY
RFDS PREAMP/ IF ATTEN. RECEIVER
(RECEIVER PASS PASS
IMAGE FILTER AMP CIRCUIT IC
ANTENNA) FILTER FILTER 133 KHZ
267 KHZ
CLOCK
133 KHZ START-UP
CIRCUITRY
CIRCUITRY

ADDRESS DECODE,

AGC
SPI BUS
VCO/ MEMORY, +14.2 V
SYNTH A/D CONVERTER INVERTER +14.2 VDC

SERIAL BUS
CIRCUITRY TO BACKPLANE

2.1 MHZ +5 VDC

+5 V TO BACKPLANE
INVERTER
SPI BUS
CIRCUITRY

5 MHZ 5 MHZ +28 VDC

EXTERNAL TO BACKPLANE
REFERENCE DIAGNOSTICS
CIRCUITRY

BASE RADIO CONTROLLER

MODULE

SPI BUS
SPI BUS
PLL/
VCO 16.8 MHZ
SPI BUS

DATA/CLOCK
TO/FROM ETHERNET
ETHERNET INTERFACE

SPI BUS
DSP TISIC
ASIC
TO/FROM
STATUS PORT EXCITER MODULE
(RS-232)
NON-VOLATILE
TO/FROM HOST MEMORY
DRAM 774..784 MHZ
V.24/RS-232 PORT (EEPROM, MEMORY, A/D CONVERTER
µP 2.4MHz VCO2/SYNTH
(ON BACKPLANE)
FLASH)
SPI BUS
5V PS 3.3V

SPI BUS SPI BUS

PLA
DATA

4.8MHz
DATA
DATA CLOCK
157.3 MHZ
LNODCT2 VCO1
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE SPI BUS

Figure 11-2 Base Radio Functional Block Diagram

ADDRESS DECODE,
MEMORY, A/D CONVERTER
LNODCT1
RF OUT
TO RF FEEDBACK
RFDS COMBINER
(TRANSMIT FEEDBACK IN
ANTENNA) RF OUT

FINAL LINEAR
AMP
RF IN
FINAL LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR RF
SPLITTER DRIVER AMPLIFIER
AMP

FINAL LINEAR
AMP

TEBTS055B

February 2005
6866538D01-C
 Base Radio

Base Radio Controller

BRC Overview
The Base Radio Controller (BRC) serves as the main controller for the Base Radio. The BRC
provides signal processing and operational control for other Base Radio modules. Figure 11-3
shows a top view of the BRC with the cover removed. The BRC module consists of two printed
circuit boards (BRC board and LED/display board), a slide-in housing, and associated hardware.
The operating software and codeplug are contained within the BRC memory. The software
defines operating parameters for the BR, such as output power and operating frequency.
The BRC interconnects to the Base Radio backplane using one 96-pin DIN connector and one
blindmate RF connector. The BRC is secured in the Base Radio chassis using two TORX screws.

Figure 11-3 Base Radio Controller (with cover removed)

6866538D01-C 11 - 7
February 2005
Base Radio

Controls and Indicators

The BRC monitors the functions of other Base Radio modules. The LEDs on the front panel
indicate the status of the modules monitored by the BRC. All LEDs on the BRC front panel
normally flash on/off three times upon initial power-up. A RESET switch is provided to allow a
manual reset of the BR. Figure 11-4 shows the front panel of the BRC.

SERVICE ACCESS B R P S E X P A C T L R 1 R 2 R 3 RESET CONTROL

EBTS316
022800JNM

Figure 11-4 BR Controller (Front View)

Indicators
Table 11-4 lists and describes the BRC LEDs.

Table 11-4 BR Controller Indicators

Module
LED Color Condition Indications
Monitored

BR Green BR Solid (on) Station is keyed

Flashing (on) Station is not keyed
Off Station is out of service or power is removed
PS Red Power Supply Solid (on) FRU failure indication - Power Supply has a major
alarm and is out of service
Flashing (on) Power Supply has a minor alarm and may be
operating at reduced performance
Off Power Supply under normal operation (no alarms)
EX Red Exciter Solid (on) FRU failure indication - Exciter has a major alarm
and is out of service
Flashing (on) Exciter has a minor alarm and may be operating at
reduced performance
Off Exciter under normal operation (no alarms)
PA Red Power Solid (on) FRU failure indication - PA has a major alarm and
Amplifier is out of service
Flashing (on) PA has a minor alarm and may be operating at
reduced performance
Off PA under normal operation (no alarms)

11 - 8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Table 11-4 BR Controller Indicators (continued)

Module
LED Color Condition Indications
Monitored

CTL Red Controller Solid (on) FRU failure indication - BRC has a major alarm and
is out of service
Flashing (on) BRC has a minor alarm and may be operating at
reduced performance
Off BRC under normal operation (no alarms)
R1 Red Receiver #1, Solid (on) FRU failure indication - Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) has
R2 #2, or #3 a major alarm and is out of service
R3
Flashing (on) Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) has a minor alarm and may
be operating at reduced performance
Off Receiver (#1, #2, or #3) under normal operation (no
alarms)

Controls
Table 11-5 lists the controls and descriptions.

Table 11-5 BR Controller Controls

Control Description

RESET Switch A push-button switch used to manually reset the BR.

STATUS connector A 9-pin connector used for connection of a service computer, providing a
convenient means for testing and configuring. Pin 9 serves as a frame trigger.

Table 11-6 Service Access Connector Details

DB-9 Female Connector Pinout Function

1 not used
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 not used
5 GND (NOTE)
6 not used
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 Trigger Out (NOTE)
Pins 9 and 5 require breakout leads for connection to signal generator for T1
framed TETRA test signal generation.

6866538D01-C 11 - 9
February 2005
Base Radio

Theory of Operation
Table 11-7 briefly describes the BRC circuitry. Figure 11-6 is a functional block diagram of the
BRC.

Table 11-7 BR Controller Circuitry

Circuit Description

Host Microprocessor
Non-Volatile Memory
Volatile Memory
Ethernet Interface
RS-232 Interface
Digital Signal Processor and
TDMA Infrastructure Support
IC (TISIC2)
Station Reference Circuitry
Input Port
Output Port
Remote Station Shutdown
A Motorola MPC860DE is the central controller of the BRC and station
Consists of:
• FLASH containing the station operating software
• EEPROM containing the station codeplug data
Contains SDRAM to store station software used to execute commands
Provides the BRC with a 10Base2 Ethernet communication port to
network both control and compressed voice data
Provides the BRC with two independent RS-232 serial interfaces
Performs high-speed modulation/demodulation of compressed audio
and signalling data
Generates the 16.8 MHz and 2.1 MHz reference signal used throughout
the station
Contains one 24-line input bus that receives miscellaneous inputs from
the BR
Input Port P1 In consists of 24 lines of data written to Output Port P0
Out; Input Port P0 In consists of 24 lines from circuitry in the BRC, as
well as other modules in the station via the backplane
Contains one 24-line output bus, providing a path for sending
miscellaneous control signals to various circuits throughout the BR
Provides software control to cycle power on the BR

Host Microprocessor
The host microprocessor serves as the main controller for the BR. It operates at a clock speed of
50.0 MHz, which is derived from the 25.0 MHz clock oscillator. The processor controls the
operation of the Base Radio as determined by the station software contained in non-volatile
memory. The station software is contained in a FLASH SIMM.

Serial Communication Buses

The microprocessor provides two general-purpose serial communications buses (SCC2 and
SMC2).
The SMC2 serial communications bus is an asynchronous RS-232 interface. A 9-pin D-type
connector on the BRC front panel provides a port for service personnel to connect a service
computer. Service personnel can perform programming and maintenance tasks via Man Machine
Interface (MMI) commands. The interface between the SMC2 port and the front panel Service
Access connector is via EIA-232 Bus Receivers/Drivers. Table 11-6, “Service Access Connector
Details,” on page 11-9 lists the DB-9 female connector pinout details on the BRC front panel.

11 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

The SCC2 serial communications bus is an RS-232 interface with synchronous or asynchronous
capabilities. It can interface remotely to a synchronous modem. The SCC2 port connects via EIA-
232 Bus Receivers/Drivers to RS232 connector located on the backplane of the BR. Refer to
Table 11-21, “Backplane RS-232 Pin Dsub (P8),” on page 11-42. This port supports ETSI 300-
394 requirements for a test connector which can be accessed for Rx data recovery during
conformance testing.

Address and Data Bus

The microprocessor is equipped with a 32-line address bus used to access the non-volatile
memory, SDRAM memory, and provide control via memory mapping for other circuitry in the
BRC.
A 32-line data bus transfers data to/from the BRC memory, as well as other BRC circuitry. This
data bus is buffered for transfers to and from the non-volatile memory. The data is not buffered
for the SDRAM memory.

Non-Volatile Memory
The Base Radio software resides in an 8 Mb FLASH SIMM (expandable to 16 Mb) accessed by
the Host Microprocessor via the 23 lines of the 32-line host address bus and the 32-line host data
bus.
The data determining the station personality resides in a 32K x 8 codeplug EEPROM. The
EEPROM is accessed by the microprocessor via 15 lines of the 23-line host address bus and the
8-line data bus.
Field programming information is downloaded from the network/Site Controllers. This data
includes operating frequencies and output power level. Many of the station parameters may be
adjusted but will not be stored within the station. Refer to Chapter 3, “Site Controller Commands”
for additional information.

Volatile Memory
Each BRC contains 32Mb of SDRAM. The BRC downloads the station software code into
SDRAM for the station to use. Data is lost upon loss of power or reset since the SDRAM is
volatile memory.
The SDRAM also provides short-term storage for data generated and required during normal
operation. Read and write operations are performed via the Host Address and Data buses.
SDRAM memory locations are sequentially refreshed by the address bus and CS, RAS, and CAS
signals from the Host Processor during normal operation.

Ethernet Interface
The Ethernet Interface is provided by SCCI of the MPC860 (Host Processor). It implements the
CS/CDMA access method which supports the Ethernet 10Base2 standard.
The Ethernet Serial Interface performs the following major functions:
• 10 MHz transmit clock generation (obtained by dividing the 20 MHz signal provided by
on board crystal)
• Manchester encoding/decoding of frames

6866538D01-C 11 - 11
February 2005
Base Radio

• electrical interface to the Ethernet transceiver

An isolation transformer provides high voltage protection and isolates the Ethernet Serial
Interface (ESI) and the transceiver. The pulse transformer has the following characteristics:
• Minimum inductance of 75 µH
• 2000 V isolation between primary and secondary windings
• 1:1 Pulse Transformer
The Coaxial Transceiver Interface (CTI) is a coaxial cable line driver/receiver for the Ethernet.
CTI provides a 10Base2 connection via a coaxial connector on the board. This device minimises
the number of external components necessary for Ethernet operations.
A DC/DC converter provides a constant voltage of -9 VDC for the CTI from a 5 VDC source.
The CTI performs the following functions:
• Receives and transmits data to the Ethernet coaxial connection
• Reports any collision detected on the coaxial
• Disables the transmitter when packets are longer than the legal length (Jabber Timer)

Digital Signal Processor

The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) and related circuitry process the station transmit and receive
compressed audio/data signals. This circuitry includes the DSP, the TDMA Infrastructure
Support IC (TISIC2), and the TISIC2 Interface Circuitry.
The DSP receives a 25 MHz clock, which it frequency multiplies by 4 to operate at 100 MHz. The
DSP communicates with the Host Microprocessor via an 8 bit data bus. Communication with the
Host Microprocessor is interrupt driven. The DSP also contains internal SRAM to store its
programs and signal processing algorithms.
The inputs are digitised signals from the Receivers. The digitised samples are first received by
TISIC2, stored in registers, and then read by the DSP via the DSP data bus.
The outputs are digitised voice audio/data (modulation signals) that are first sent to TISIC2 via a
synchronous serial interface (SSI). TISIC2 reformats and reclocks the data and sends it to the
Exciter module.

11 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

TISIC2
The TISIC2 controls all internal DSP operations. This ASIC provides a number of functions,
including the following:
• Interfaces with the DSP via the DSP (Port A) address and data buses.
• Accepts a 16.8 MHz signal and a 1 PPS signal from Station Reference Circuitry.
• Outputs a 2.4 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter and Receivers.
• Outputs a 4.8 MHz reference signal used by the Exciter to clock data into the LNODCT
IC.
• Accepts differential data from Receivers (RX1 through RX3) via interface circuitry.
• Sends serial data to the Receivers (RX1 through RX3) via SBI data lines.
• Accepts and formats serial data from the DSP for transmission to the Exciter via interface
circuitry.
• Generates 14.167 ms and 7.083 ms ticks. These are synchronised to the 1 PPS time mark
from the Site Controller (TSC) for routing to the DSP.

Station Reference Circuitry

The Station Reference Circuitry is a phase-locked loop consisting of a high-stability Voltage
Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) and a Phase Locked Loop IC. The OUT 1 or OUT 2 output
from the Site Controller is connected to the 5 MHz/1 PPS A BNC connector on the EBTS junction
panel. In this mode, the PLL compares the reference frequency to the 16.8 MHz VCXO output
and generates a DC correction voltage. The control voltage enable switch is closed. This allows
the control voltage from the PLL to adjust the high-stability VCXO frequency to a stability
equivalent to that of the external 5 MHz frequency reference.
The VCXO is continually frequency-controlled by the control voltage from the PLL and outputs
a 16.8 MHz clock signal which is applied to TISIC2.
TISIC2 divides the 16.8 MHz signal by 8 and outputs a 2.1 MHz signal. This signal is separated
and buffered by a splitter. The output signal is then sent to the Exciter and Receivers as a 2.1 MHz
reference via the backplane.
The 4.8 MHz reference signal generated by TISIC2 is applied to the Exciter module, where it is
used to clock data into the TX PLA (Programmable Logic Array) IC.

Input Port
One general purpose, 24-line input port provides for various input signals from the BRC and
station circuitry. These inputs are sent to the Host Microprocessor.
Input Port P0 In consists of 24 lines from circuitry in the BRC, as well as other modules in the
station via the backplane.
Input Port P1 In consists of 24 lines of data written to Output Port P0 Out.

6866538D01-C 11 - 13
February 2005
Base Radio

Output Port
One general purpose 24-line output port provides various control signals from the Host
Microprocessor to the BRC and station circuitry via the backplane. The output port, Port P0 Out,
consists of 24 lines from the Host Data Bus via latches.
Typical control signals from these output ports vary from the control signals for the eight front
panel LEDs and the address select lines for SPI peripherals.

Remote Station Shutdown

The BRC contains circuitry to send a shutdown pulse to the Base Radio Power Supply. After
receiving this pulse, the power supply cycles the power for the BR, including the 5.1 VDC,
28.6 VDC and 14.2 VDC distributed through the BR. The BRC generates the shutdown pulse
through software control. A remote site uses the shutdown function to perform a hard reset of all
modules in the BR.

11 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
February 2005
6866538D01-C
HOST MICROPROCESSOR
25 MHZ CLK CLOCK
OSCILLATOR

EIA-232
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS BUS STATUS PORT
RECEIVERS/ (9 PIN D CONNECTOR
6 DRIVERS ON BRC FRONT PANEL)
CLSN CD
ETHERNET
SERIAL EIA-232
INTERFACE
ETHERNET SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS BUS RS-232 PORT
MPC860 RCV ISOLATION RX 10BASE2
SCCI SERIAL TRANSCEIVER RECEIVERS/ (9 PIN D CONNECTOR
INTERFACE TRANSFORMER
COAX 8 DRIVERS ON BACKPLANE)
HOST
TRMT TX MICRO-
PROCESSOR
MAN_RESET* (FROM
TISIC_2; SEE B ON B
SHEET 2)
SPI-BUS
SPI BUS TO/FROM
3 STATION MODULES

ETHERNET INTERFACE A

LED CONTROL
LINES HOST DATA BUS
(P/O I/O PORT 8
P0 OUT)

BASE POWER EXCITER PA CTL R1 R2 R3

RADIO SUPPLY

BUFFERS BUFFERS
FRONT PANEL LEDS
HOST HOST ADDRESS BUS
A0-A22
BUFFERED SDRAM
ADDRESS BUS 32 MB

FLASH HOST BUFFERED

5V SHUTDOWN SIMM DATA BUS
(TO PO WER 8 MB
SHUTDOWN SUPPLY)
I/O PORT CIRCUITRY
PO_OUT (12)

REMOTE STATION
SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY EEPROM
32kx8

HOST DATA BUS

FROM HOST
MICROPR OCESSOR
VARIOUS
I/O PORT P0 IN CONTROL
BUFFERS LINES TO
VARIOUS INPUTS I/O PORT P0 IN 24 BRC &
FROM BRC & BUFFERS
STATION
STATION CIRCUITRY

Figure 11-5 Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram, Sheet 1 of 2

24 CIRCUITRY

INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRY TEBTS053

032101JNM

11 - 15
Base Radio
 TISIC 2 INTERFACE CIRCUITRY
RX1 DATA

11 - 16
RX1 ODC
Base Radio

RX1 CLOCK
DIFFERENTIAL DATA RX1 DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #1 DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
VIA BACKPLANE
CONVERTER/BUFFER

SERIAL BUS
RX1 SBI BUFFER TO RECEIVER
MODULE #1

RX2 DATA
RX2 ODC
RX2 CLOCK
DIFFERENTIAL DATA RX2 DATA
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #2
CONVERTER/BUFFER
VIA BACKPLANE

SERIAL BUS
RX2 SBI BUFFER TO RECEIVER
MODULE #2

RX3 DATA
RX3 ODC
RX3 CLOCK
DIFFERENTIAL DATA RX3 DATA
FROM RECEIVER MODULE #3
DIFFERENTIAL-TO-TTL
TISIC_2
VIA BACKPLANE CONVERTER/BUFFER

SERIAL BUS
RX3 SBI BUFFER TO RECEIVER
MODULE #3

TXLIN DIFFERENTIAL DATA

TTL-TO-DIFFERENTIAL TO EXCITER MODULE
DATA CONVERTER/BUFFER VIA BACKPLANE

TXLIN TTL-TO-DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL CLOCK

CLOCK TO EXCITER MODULE
CONVERTER/BUFFER VIA BACKPLANE

HOST AGC
TX SYNCHRONOUS TO RECEIVERS (1-3)
DATA 4
BUS SERIAL INTERFACE
(TXSSI)
FROM HOST ESSI_0 TX_SSI
HOST PORT PORT LINES
MICRO-
PROCESSOR HOST
ADDRESS DIGITAL
21 MHz REF TO EXCITER
BUS SIGNAL 2.1 MHz FROM TISIC MODULE VIA BACKPLANE
2.1 M;Hz BUFFER/
PROCESSOR OUT SPLITTER 21 MHz REF TO RECEIVER
(DSP) DSP MODULE VIA BACKPLANE
ADDRESS BUS 16.8 MHz TO TISIC
16.8 MHz
ADDRESS ADDRESS IN
DSP
DATA BUS
5 MHz/1PPS BNC 5 MHz REF
DATA DATA OSCIN PHASE
CONNECTOR
ON BACKPLANE SPI BUS LOCKED
LOOP
MAN_RESET 5MHz/1PPS 3 F IC
IN
COMBINED SIGNAL
5MHz/1PPS
16.8 MHz
RESET
HIGH

Figure 11-6 Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram, Sheet 2 of 2

16.8 MHz TO TISIC
VCC STABILITY
VCO
25 MHZ CONTROL VOLTAGE
CLOCK A ENABLE SWITCH
3 CONTROL VOLTAGE
FRONT
PANEL EXTERNAL 5 MHz
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR/TISIC RESET DETECTION
STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY
TEBTS064
092399JNM

February 2005
6866538D01-C
 Base Radio

Exciter

Exciter Overview
The Exciter, in conjunction with the Power Amplifier (PA), provides the transmitter functions for
the Base Radio. The Exciter module consists of a printed circuit board, a slide-in housing, and
associated hardware.
The Exciter interconnects to the Base Radio backplane using a 96-pin DIN connector and two
blindmate RF connectors. Two TORX screws secure the Exciter to the chassis.
There are no controls or indicators on the Exciter. Specifications of the transmitter circuitry,
including the Exciter and PAs, are provided in Base Radio section of the manual.
Figure 11-7 shows the Exciter with the cover removed.

Figure 11-7 Exciter (with cover removed)

6866538D01-C 11 - 17
February 2005
Base Radio

Theory of Operation
Table 11-7 lists and describes the basic circuitry of the Exciter. Figure 11-8 shows the functional
block diagram of the Exciter.

Table 11-8 Exciter Circuitry

Circuit Description

LNODCT1 IC • Up converts the baseband data to the Transmit frequency

• Down converts the Transmit frequency feedback signal to baseband
• Uses a baseband Cartesian feedback loop system, necessary to obtain linearity
from the transmitter and avoid splattering power into adjacent channels
• Performs training functions for proper linearization of the transmitter
• Provides synthesizer for setting 1st IF to 157.3 MHz
LNODCT2 IC • Up converts the baseband data to the IF freq
• Down converts the IF feedback signal to baseband
• Performs training functions for proper linearization of the IF path
• Acts as a stand-alone Cartesian feedback system
Frequency • Consists of a phase-locked loop and VCO to provide a LO signal to the LNODCT1
Synthesizer for up-conversion and for down-conversion of the feedback signal from PA
Circuitry • Provides LO signal to discrete mixer stage of reference path for 2nd up-conversion
774..785 MHz • Provides LO signal to discrete mixer stage for 2nd up-conversion to Tx frequency
VCO2 • Provides LO signal to LNODCT1 for up-conversion and down-conversion via
mixing it with 157.3MHz.
157.3 MHz • Provides LO signal to LNODCT2 IC for IF up-conversion
VCO1 • Mixes with 774..785 MHz VCO freq to provide LO freq to LNODCT1 IC.
Regulator • Provides a regulated voltage to various ICs and RF devices located on the Exciter
Circuitry
Linear RF • Amplifies the RF signal from the LNODCT IC and reference path to an appropriate
amplifier level for input to the PA
Stages
Programmable • Accepts clock and serial DSP data from BRC; formats the data to meet LNODCT1
Logic Array and LNODCT2 requirements
(PLA) • Routes SYNC and train data to LNODCT1
• Routes SYNC, train, and data to LNODCT2
• Outputs Amp on/off control signal during TRAIN/non-TRAIN interval
• Accepts SPI addresses for various ICs from BRC and decodes the SPI addresses
• Serves as the main interface between the synthesizer, LNODCT1, LNODCT2 IC,
A/D, EEPROM, vblin DAC, and BRC via SPI bus

DAC and Alias filter

DAC and alias filter are used to convert digital baseband signal to analog baseband signal to meet
the input data format for the LNODCT ICs.

11 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Memory Circuitry
The memory circuitry consists of an EEPROM located on the Exciter. The BRC performs all
memory read and write operations via the SPI bus. Information stored in this memory device
includes the kit number, revision number, module specific scaling and correction factors, and free
form information (scratch pad).

A/D Converter Circuitry

Analog signals from various areas throughout the Exciter board are fed to the A/D converter.
These analog signals are converted to a digital signal and are periodically monitored and
controlled by the BRC.
Some of the signals monitored include the regulated voltages, the analog power monitor (APM),
the 774..785 MHz PLL circuit and internal signals.

PLA Circuitry
The PLA interfaces between Exciter and BRC for SPI address decoding. The SPI address is
asserted from BRC to PLA and PLA decodes the asserted address and links the SPI
communication between IC in Exciter to BRC.
The PLA also formats serial digital baseband signal from DSP and converts the serial data to I &
Q parallel output data. Other function of PLA is to generate the 2.4 MHz reference clock for
LNODCT IC and SYNTH IC.

LNODCT IC Circuitry
The LNODCT IC is a main interface between the Exciter and BRC. Digitized signals are sent via
the DSP data bus from the Digital Signal Processors of the BRC to the exciter. These data signals
are clocked via the DSP clock signal provided by the Receiver.
The differential data clock signal is provided to PLA and PLA generates the reference signal to
the internal synthesizer circuit of the LNODCT1 IC. The LNODCT1 compares the reference
signal with the output of the 157.3 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator. IF the VCO output is out
of phase or differs in frequency, correction pulses are sent to the Oscillator and the VCO output
is adjusted.
LNODCT1 IC does up-conversion the baseband data received from the BRC to Tx freq and
down-converts feedback Tx frequency from PA to baseband.
LNODCT2 IC does up-conversion the baseband data received form the BRC to 1st IF
(157.3 MHz) and down-converts the 1st IF feedback to baseband.
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus is use to communicate with the LNODCT ICs. The SPI
bus serves as a general purpose bi-directional serial link between the BRC and other modules of
the Base Radio, including the Exciter. The SPI bus is used to send control and operational data
signals to and from the various circuits of the Exciter.

6866538D01-C 11 - 19
February 2005
Base Radio

Synthesizer Circuitry
The synthesizer circuitry consists of the Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) CI and associated circuitry.
The output of this circuit is combined with the 774..785 MHz VCO to supply a Local Oscillator
(LO) signal to the LNODCT IC and discrete mixer.
An internal phase detector generates a logic pulse in proportion to the difference in phase or
frequency between the reference frequency and loop pulse signal.
If the reference frequency is faster than the VCO feedback frequency, an up signal is output from
the PLL IC. If the reference frequency is slower than the VCO feedback frequency, a down signal
is output from the PLL IC. These pulses are used as correction signals and are fed to a charge
pump circuit.
The charge pump circuit generates the correction signal and causes it to move up or down in
response to the phase detector output pulses. The correction signal is passed through the low-pass
loop filter to the 774..785 MHz VCO circuit.

774..785 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO2)

The 774..785 MHz VCO circuit generates the main LO signal for LNODCT1 IC via offset mixer
and main LO signal for discrete mixer in reference path.
The VCO requires a very low-noise DC supply voltage. The oscillator is driven by a Super Filter
that contains an ultra low-pass filter. The Super Filter obtains the required low-noise output
voltage for the oscillator.
The output of the oscillator is tapped and sent to the VCO feedback filter. This feedback signal is
supplied to the Synthesizer circuitry for the generation of correction pulses.
The untapped output of the 774..785 MHz VCO is split to provide the main LO for LNODCT1
IC via offset mixer and the discrete mixer in reference path.
Via the Tx frequency issued to the Base Radio through MMI programming the VCO generates an
LO frequency of 774.7 to 784.7 MHz.

157.3 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO1)

The 157.3 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator 157.3 MHz VCO provides a LO signal to the
LNODCT 2 IC for the 1st IF (157.3 MHz) up-conversion and input to the offset mixer.

Regulator Circuitry
This circuitry generates five voltages of +3 VDC, +3.3 VDC, +5 VDC, +10 VDC, and +11.8
VDC. The +11.8 VDC, +10 VDC and +5 VDC voltages are obtained from the +14.2 VDC
backplane voltage, and the 3 VDC, +3.3 VDC voltages are obtained from the +5 VDC backplane
voltage. These voltages are used to power various RF devices of the Exciter.

Linear RF Amplifier Stages

This circuitry is used to amplify the RF signal from LNODCT1 IC, and the signal from the
reference path mixer prior to the summing junction, to an appropriate level for input to the PA.

11 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

EXT_WM_Vr

balun
A/D

Switch
I PA input
EXT_WM_Vf LNODCT1
Q
DSP outputs

PA feedback

MVCO
SLT
RF I RF Q

balun
OVCO
157.3MHz
VCO1

I Q generator
and splitter
774..785MHz
2way splitter
VCO2 2way
splitter
SPI bus
SPI interface

REGULATOR CIRCUITRY

balun
DATA
PLA

driver

I
differential

Dual
data

LNODCT2
DAC
Q

12 dB coupler
clock

MVCO
SLT control
CLOCK

SLT
RF I RF Q
balun

I Q generator
and splitter REFERENCE PATH

REGULATOR CIRCUITRY

11.8 V
11.8V
Regulator

10V_Baseband 3 V_LN ODC T

10V_Baseband 3 V_LN ODC T
Regulator Regulator
From + 14.2V
10V_RF 3V3_Baseband
10V_RF From + 5.1V 3.3V_Baseband
Regulator Regulator

5V_RF 5V_RF 3V3_RF

3.3V_RF
Regulator Regulator

Figure 11-8 Exciter Functional Block Diagram

6866538D01-C 11 - 21
February 2005
Base Radio

Power Amplifier

PA Overview
The Power Amplifier (PA), in conjunction with the Exciter, provides the transmitter functions for
the Base Radio. The PA accepts the low-level modulated RF signal from the Exciter and amplifies
the signal for transmission via the RF output connector.
The power PA contains five hybrid modules, three pc boards, and the module heatsink/housing
assembly.
The PA connects to the chassis backplane using a 96-pin DIN connector and three blindmate RF
connectors. Two TORX screws secure the PA to the chassis.
Specifications of the transmitter circuitry, including the Exciter and PAs, are provided in “Base
Radio Overview” on page 11-1. Figure 11-9 shows the PA with the cover removed.

Theory of Operation
Table 11-9 describes the basic functions of the PA circuitry. Figure 11-10 shows a functional
block diagram of the PA.

DC/Metering Board
The DC/Metering Board provides the interface between the Power Amplifier and the Base Radio
backplane. The preamplified / modulated RF signal is input directly from the Exciter via the Base
Radio backplane.
The RF input signal is connected, through a Voltage Variable Attenuator (VVA), to the input of
the Linear Driver Module (LDM). The RF feedback signal is fed back to the Exciter, where it is
monitored for errors.
The primary functions of the DC/Metering Boards is to monitor proper operation of the PA and
to set PA gain via the VVA. This information is forwarded to the Base Radio Controller (BRC)
via the SPI bus. The alarms diagnostic points monitored by the BRC on the PA include the
following:
• Forward power
• Reflected power
• PA temperature sense

11 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Figure 11-9 Power Amplifier

6866538D01-C 11 - 23
February 2005
Base Radio

Table 11-9 Power Amplifier Circuitry

Circuit Description

DC/Metering board • Serves as the main interface between the PA and the backplane
board
• Accepts RF input from the Exciter via blindmate RF connector
• Routes the RF input through a VVA to the LDM RF amplifier
• Routes the RF feedback from the RF Combiner/Peripheral Module
to the Exciter via blindmate RF connector
• Provides digital alarm and metering information of the PA to the
BRC via the SPI bus
• Routes DC power to the fans and PA
Linear Driver Module • Contains two Class A and one Class AB amplifiers in cascade
(LDM) • Amplifies the low-level RF signal (~25 mW average power) from
the Exciter via the DC/Metering board
• Provides an output of ~5 W average power
• Interfaces with DC board to route PA_ENABLE signal to the
LFM’s via the RF splitter.
RF Splitter • Interfaces with the DC/Metering board to route PA_ENABLE
Signal to the LFM’s
• Contains a Wilkinson splitter circuit to split the RF output signal of
the LDM to the three Linear Final Modules
Linear Final Module • Contains one Class AB amplifier. It also amplifies the RF signal
(LFM) (~ 5 W average power) from the LDM (via the Splitter/DC board)
• Three LFMs provide an RF output of approximately 103 W average
power
Peripheral Module • It routes the combined RF signal through a circulator and a Low
MPM Pass Filter. The output signal is routed to the blindmate RF
connector
• An RF coupler to provide an RF feedback signal to the Exciter, via
a blindmate RF connector and a forward and reverse power detector
for alarm and power monitoring purposes
• Contains a Wilkinson combiner circuit to combine the RF signals
from the 3 LFM's
Fan Assembly • Contains three fans used to keep the PA within predetermined
operating temperatures
Interconnect Board • Routes the output of the LFM’s to the peripheral module

Linear Driver Module

The Linear Driver Module (LDM) amplifies the low level RF signal from the Exciter. The LDM
consists of a three-stage cascaded amplifier. This output is fed directly to the RF Splitter.
The RF input signal has an average power level of approximately 8 mW. The LDM amplifies this
signal to an average output level of approximately 1.3 Watts.

11 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

RF Splitter Board
The RF Splitter of this board accepts the amplified signal from the LDM. The primary function
of this circuit is to split the RF signal into three separate paths. These three RF outputs are fed
directly to three separate Linear Final modules where the RF signals will be amplified further.

Linear Final Module

The RF signals from the outputs of the RF Splitter are input directly into the Linear Final Module
(LFM) for final amplification. The LFM’s contain amplifier circuits that amplify the RF signal to
a total of approximately 103 Watts average power (218 Watts peak envelop power (PEP)).

Interconnect Board
Routes the output of the LFM’s to the peripheral module.

Peripheral Module
The RF combiner portion of this board accepts the amplified signal from 3LFM’s and combines
the three.
The RF signal is then coupled to the Exciter so that it can be monitored. The RF output signal is
then passed through a circulator that acts as a protection device for the PA in the event of high
reflected power.
A power monitor circuit monitors the forward and reflected power of the output signal. This
circuit provides the A/D converter on the DC/Metering board with input signals representative of
the forward and reflected power levels. Output power at this point is approximately 80 Watts
average (169 Watts PEP).
For forward power, a signal representative of the measured value is sent to the BRC via the SPI
bus. The BRC determines if this level is within tolerance of the programmed forward power level.
If the level is not within certain parameters, the BRC will issue a warning to the site controller
and may shut down the Exciter.
Reflected power is monitored in the same manner. The BRC uses the reflected power to calculate
the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR). If the VSWR is determined to be excessive, the forward
power is rolled back. If it is extremely excessive, the BRC issues a shut-down command to the
Exciter.

Fan Module
The PA contains a fan assembly to help keep it within a normal operating temperature through the
use of a cool air intake. The fan assembly contains three individual fans that are directed across
the PA heatsink.
The current drain of the fans is monitored by the DC/Metering board. A voltage representative of
the current drain is monitored by the BRC. The BRC flags the site controller if an alarm is
triggered. The PA LED on the front panel of the BRC is also illuminated, however the PA does
not shut down.

6866538D01-C 11 - 25
February 2005
Base Radio

Replacement of Fan Assembly in Power Amplifier

1 Turn off power for the base radio in question on breaker panel (BR 1 to 4).
2 Remove the two black screws holding the PA in the base radio.
3 Pull the PA out from the base radio.
4 Remove the white connector for 12 VDC supply to the fans, located between the heat sink fins
on the bottom.
5 Loosen the rubber grommet holding the wires between the fins.
6 Unscrew the fan assembly (two torx (TX20) screws).
7 Replace with the new fan assembly, and assemble in reverse order.
8 Insert the PA in the base radio and secure with the two screws.
9 Turn on power for the base radio again. Check the fans.

11 - 26 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

LINEAR DRIVER MODULE RF SPLITTER BOARD

RF INPUT LINEAR FINAL MODULE

VVA

STAGE1 STAGE2 STAGE3

VBLIN
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SPI BUS
TO/FROM BRC

MEMORY LINEAR FINAL MODULE

FAN ASSEMBLY
CHIP SELECT
DECODE
CIRCUITRY

ADDRESS BUS FAN SENSE

FROM BRC
BOARD A/D
SELECT FDW PWR
DECODE REF PWR
CIRCUITRY LINEAR FINAL MODULE

ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY &

A/D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY

INTERCONNECT BOARD

RF OUT LOW-PASS POWER FEEDBACK

FITLER DETECTOR COUPLER

RF FEEDBACK
TO EXCITER
MODULE PERIPHERAL MODULE

Figure 11-10 Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram

6866538D01-C 11 - 27
February 2005
Base Radio

DC Power Supply

DC Power Supply Overview

The DC Power Supply provides DC operating voltages to the various Base Radio FRUs. It
accepts input voltage sources from -41 to -60 VDC. This input source may be grounded at either
its positive or negative end.
The DC Power Supply is designed for sites with an available source of DC voltage that is
nominally -48 VDC. On initial start up, the supply requires a voltage of -44 VDC to -48 VDC. If
the voltage hereafter drops out of the range of -41 VDC to -60 VDC, the DC Power Supply reverts
to a quiescent mode and does not supply any output power.
Outputs supplied from the DC Power Supply are 28.6 VDC at up to 18.0 A, 14.2 VDC at up to
8.0 A, and 5.1 VDC at up to 3.0 A; all referenced to chassis ground. The supply is rated for
575 Watts of continuous output power up to 45 °C (113 ° F) inlet air. The 28.6 VDC output is then
linearly derated to 15 A at 60 °C (140 °F).
The DC Power Supply consists of the Power Supply and front panel hardware. The DC Power
Supply interconnects to the system backplane via edgecard connections. Two TORX screws
secure the DC Power Supply to the chassis.
Figure 11-11 shows the front view of the DC Power Supply.

Figure 11-11 DC Power Supply (Front View)

This doesn’t show front plate, but LED’s and switch can’t be easily seen if it is installed.

11 - 28 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Controls and Indicators

The front panel ON/OFF switch is used to turn the DC power supply on and off. Performance
Specifications
Table 11-10 summarizes the LED indicators on the DC Power Supply during normal operation.

Table 11-10 DC Power Supply Indicators

LED Condition Indications

Green Solid (on) Power Supply is on and operating under normal conditions with no alarms
Off Power Supply is turned off or required power is not available
Red Solid (on) Power Supply fault or load fault on any output
Off Power Supply is under normal operation with no alarms

Table 11-11 lists the specifications for the DC Power Supply.

Table 11-11 DC Power Supply Specifications

Description Value or Range

Input Voltage -41 to -60 VDC

Start Up Voltage
Input Current
Steady State Output
Voltages
Total Output Power Rating
Operating Temperature
Output Ripple
Short Circuit Current
- 44 VDC (minimum)
19.5 A (maximum) @ -41 VDC
28.6 VDC +5%: 1.0 to 18.0 A
14.2 VDC +5%: 0.1 to 8.0 A
5.1 VDC +5%: 0.1 to 3.0 A
575 W (no derating)
485 W (derating at +60 °C (140 °F))
-30 to +45 °C (-22 to 113 °F) (no derating)
+45 to +60 °C (113 to 140 °F) (linear derating of 28 VDC output current
to15 A)
All outputs 150 mVp-p (measured with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope
at 25 °C (77 °F))
0.5 A average

6866538D01-C 11 - 29
February 2005
Base Radio
Theory of Operation
Table 11-12 briefly describes the basic DC Power Supply circuitry.
Circuit
Input Circuit
Start-up Inverter Circuitry
Main Inverter Circuitry
Temperature Protection
+14.2 VDC Secondary
Converter Circuitry
+5.1 VDC Secondary
Converter Circuitry
Clock Generator Circuitry
Address Decode, Memory,
& A/D Converter
11 - 30
Table 11-12 DC Power Supply Circuitry
Description
Routes input current from the DC power input cable through the high
current printed circuit edge connector, EMI filter, panel mounted
combination circuit breaker, and on/off switch
Provides VDC for power supply circuitry during initial power-up
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +28.6 VDC
supply voltage
Contains a built-in thermostatically controlled cooling fan. The supply shuts
down if temperature exceeds a preset threshold
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +14.2 VDC
supply voltage
Consists of a switching-type power supply to generate the +5.1 VDC supply
voltage
Generates the 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals used by the pulse width
modulators in the four inverter circuits
Serves as the main interface between A/D on the Power Supply and the BRC
via the SPI bus
6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

3X Receiver

Overview
The 3X Receiver provides the receiver functions for the Base Radio. It consists of a receiver
board, a slide-in housing, and associated hardware. The 3X Receiver incorporates one to three
diversity branches on a single module. Figure 11-12 shows a top view of the 3X Receiver with
the cover removed.

Figure 11-12 3X Receiver (with cover removed)

Definition and Identification

The 3X Receiver kit contains three receivers on a single board. This allows a single module to
provide three-branch diversity BR functionality. To identify 3X Receiver boards in the EBTS, use
the MMI command get_rx1_kit_no, this command reports the kit number from the receiver’s
EEPROM.

Diversity Configuration
There is a software parameter used for diversity purposes with the 3X Receiver. The parameter is
the rx_fru_config parameter. The diversity issues to consider are described in the following
paragraph. This parameter can be accessed through the MMI commands using the Motorola
password.

6866538D01-C 11 - 31
February 2005
Base Radio

Diversity Uses and Cautions

The 3X Receiver board can be used in one, two, or three branch diversity systems. The number
of active receivers is determined by the rx_fru_config parameter stored on the Base Radio
Control (BRC) board. The rx_fru_config parameter must be set properly for the diversity system
in use.
To view the rx_fru_config parameter, use the MMI command get rx_fru_config . The
configuration of each Base Radio can be changed in the field to match the number of receivers
connected to antennas. To change the rx_fru_config parameter, use the command set
rx_fru_config yyy, where yyy is the active receiver (yyy is 1 for one branch, 12 for two branch
diversity). For the system to work optimal, the rx_fru_config parameter must match the number
of receivers connected to antennas.

There will be significant system degradation if the rx_fru_config parameter is not set properly
for the diversity system in use.

Theory of Operation
The 3X Receiver performs highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of the
station receive RF signal. A custom Receiver IC outputs the baseband information in a
differential data format and sends it to the BRC.
Table 11-13 lists the 3X Receiver circuitry and Figure 11-13 shows a functional block diagram
for the 3X Receiver.

Table 11-13 3X Receiver Circuitry

Circuit Description

Frequency Synthesiser Consists of a phase-locked loop and a VCO. It generates the 1st LO injection
Circuitry signal for all three receivers.
Receiver Front-End Provides filtering, amplification, and the 1st down conversion of the receive RF
Circuitry signal. Digital step attenuators at the 1st IF are included in this block.
Custom Receiver IC Consists of a custom IC to perform the 2nd down conversion, filtering,
Circuitry amplification, and conversion of the receive signal. This block outputs the
receive signal as differential data to the BRC.
Address Decode, A/D Performs address decoding for board and chip select signal, converts analog
Converter, & Memory status signals to digital format for use by the BRC. A memory device holds
Circuitry module specific information.
Local Power Supply Accepts +14.2 VDC input from the backplane interconnect board and generates
Regulation two +10 VDC, a +10.8 VDC, and two +5 VDC signals for the receiver.

Frequency Synthesiser and VCO Circuitry

The synthesiser and VCO circuitry generate the RF signal used to produce the 1st LO injection
signal for the first mixer in all the Receiver front end circuits. Functional operation of these
circuits involves a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) and VCO.

11 - 32 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

The PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the BRC module microprocessor via the SPI
bus. Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a 2.4 MHz reference signal from the BRC with a
feedback sample of the VCO output from its feedback buffer.
Correction pulses are generated by the PLL IC, depending on whether the feedback signal is
higher or lower in frequency than the 2.4 MHz reference. The width of these pulses is dependent
on the amount of difference between the 2.4 MHz reference and the VCO feedback.
The up/down pulses are fed to a charge pump circuit that outputs a DC voltage proportional to the
pulse widths. This DC voltage is low-pass filtered and fed to the VCO circuit as the control
voltage. The control voltage is between +2.5 VDC and +7.5 VDC.
The DC control voltage from the synthesiser is fed to the VCO circuitry, which generates the RF
signal used to produce the 1st LO injection signal.This signal is fed through a buffer to the 1st LO
injection amplifier. A sample of this signal is returned to the PLL IC through a buffer to close the
VCO feedback loop.

Receiver Front End Circuitry

The station receive RF signal enters the Receiver through the RF-type connector located on the
back of the Receiver board. This signal is high-pass filtered, amplified and fed into the 1st mixer.
The signal mixes with the 1st LO injection signal to produce a 73.35 MHz 1st IF signal.
The 1st IF signal is sent through a 4-pole bandpass filter and fed to a buffer amplifier. The buffer
amplifier output signal is 4-pole bandpass filtered again and the resultant signal is then passed
through a digital attenuator. This attenuation is determined by the BRC. The resulting signal is
then fed to the RF input of the custom receive IC.

Custom Receiver IC Circuitry

The custom Receiver IC provides additional amplification, filtering, and a second down-
conversion. The 2nd IF signal is converted to a digital signal and is output via differential driver
circuitry to the BRC. This data signal contains the necessary I and Q information, AGC
information, and other data transfer information required by the BRC to process the receive
signal.
The remainder of the custom Receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank circuits to support
the internal oscillator, 2nd LO synthesiser circuitry, and 2nd IF circuitry.
A serial bus provides data communications between the custom Receiver IC and the TDMA
infrastructure support IC (TISIC) located on the BRC. This bus enables the TISIC to control
various current and gain settings, establish the data bus clock rate, program the 2nd LO, and
perform other control functions.

Address Decode Circuitry

The address decode circuitry enables the BRC to use the SPI bus to select a specific device on a
specific Receiver for control or data communication purposes.
If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 through A5 as the Receiver address, it
enables the chip select circuitry. The chip select circuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1
to generate the chip select signals for the EEPROM, A/D converter, and PLL IC.

6866538D01-C 11 - 33
February 2005
Base Radio

Memory Circuitry
The memory circuitry consists of three EEPROMs located on the Receiver. The BRC performs
all memory read and write operations via the SPI bus. Information stored in this memory device
includes the kit number, revision number, module specific scaling and correction factors, and free
form module information (scratch pad).

A/D Converter Circuitry

Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the Receiver board are fed to
the A/D converter. These analog signals are converted to a digital signal and are output to the
BRC via the SPI lines upon request of the BRC.

Voltage Regulator Circuitry

The voltage regulator circuitry consists of two +10 VDC, a +10.8 VDC, and two +5 VDC
regulators. The two +10 VDC and the +10.8 VDC regulators accept the +14.2 VDC input from
the backplane interconnect board and generate the operating voltages for the Receiver circuitry.
One of the +10 VDC regulators feed two +5 VDC regulators, which outputs Analog +5 VDC and
Digital +5 VDC operating voltages for use by the custom Receiver IC.
A +5.1 VDC operating voltage is also available from the backplane interconnect board to supply
+5.1 VDC to the remainder of the Receiver circuitry.

11 - 34 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 RECEIVER #3 FRONT END CIRCUITRY

February 2005
6866538D01-C
RECEIVER #2 FRONT END CIRCUITRY

RECEIVER #1 FRONT END CIRCUITRY

1ST
MIXER
RECEIVE RF
FROM IMAGE 4-POLE 4-POLE
HIGH-PASS PREAMPLIFIER FILTER
RX ANTENNA BANDPASS BANDPASS
FILTER CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY
(MULTICOUPLER) FILTER FILTER
SMA-TYPE
CONNECTOR

DIGITAL AGC
ATTENUATOR FROM
CIRCUITRY CONTROL
MODULE

TO RECEIVER #2 MIXER 3 WAY

SPLITTER
TO RECEIVER #3 MIXER

ADDRESS DECODE, MEMORY, & A/D REGULATORY

CIRCUITRY AAB CUS #3
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY
MEMORY #3 DIGITAL ABACUS #2
+5 V +5 V
+10 V REGULATOR SOURCE
MEMORY #2 REGULATOR
CUSTOM RECEIVER
CHIP IC CIRCUITRY
SELECT (ABACUS #1 )
CHIP SELECT MEMORY #1 DIFFERENTIAL
DECODE CIRCUITRY DATA
+10 V +10 V TO CONTROL
CHIP REGULATOR SOURCE MODULE
SELECT
ADDRESS BUS OR 73.35 MHz
FROM
#3 A/D 1ST IF
CONTROL CONVERTER
MODULE
RECEIVER SELECT VARIOUS
SIGNAL TO #2 A/D
DECODE CIRCUITRY +10 V +5 V ANALOG
CONVERTER +5 V
MONITOR REGULATOR REGULATOR
SOURCE
#1 A/D DRIVER
CONVERTER CIRCUITRY

SPI BUS SECOND

SPI BUS (CLOCK & DATA) +10 V
TO/FROM INJECTION 450 KHZ
CONTROL SOURCE AMPLIFIER FILTER
MODULE CIRCUITRY
+10 V
SYNTHESIZER CUSTOM
CIRCUITRY RECEIVER
CHIP IC
SELECT SUPER SERIAL BUS
FILTER 14.4 MHZ
TIMING TO/FROM
CONTROL

Figure 11-13 3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram

CIRCUITRY
MODULE
CONTROL
AUX 1
2.1 MHZ REF VOLTAGE
(+2.5 to VCO
FROM BUFFER RIN
CONTROL LO-PASS +7.5 VDC) 2ND LO
CHARGE UPPER
MODULE PUMP LOOP OSCILLATOR TANK
PHASE FILTER CIRCUITRY
LOCKED BUFFER
LOOP 2.1 MHz REF
AMP
IC
FIN

VCO VCO
FEEDBACK VCO
FEEDBACK FEEDBACK
BUFFER

2.1 MHz REFERENCE EBTS499

120997JNM

11 - 35
Base Radio
Base Radio

Backplane

Backplane Connectors
All external equipment connections are made on the Base Radio backplane.
Table 11-14 lists and describes each of the connectors on the backplane. Figures 11-14 and 11-15
show the locations of the Base Radio external connections.

Table 11-14 Base Radio Backplane Connectors

Connector Description Type

RX 1 (P19), Provides the input path for the received signal to the Base SMA connectors
RX 2 (P20) Radio. Each receiver has an input for one of these signals
Connect these ports to a multicoupler distribution system and
surge protection circuitry before connecting them to the
receive antennas
EX OUT (P14) Connects the exciter and PAs together to form the transmitter SMA connectors
EX FB (P15) for the Base Radio. These connections are usually made at the
PA IN (P17) factory
PA FB (P16) These four ports close the feedback loop between these two
modules by connecting EX OUT to the PA IN and the EX FB
to the PA FB
PA OUT (P18) Transmits the RF output of the Base Radio. Connect this port SMA connector
to a combiner or duplexer before connecting to the transmit
antenna
ETHERNET A Provides Ethernet connectivity to the Base Radio from the site BNC connector
(P11) controller. This Ethernet port connects directly to the BRC
5MHz/1PPS A Serves as both the timing and frequency reference port for the BNC connector
(P13) Base Radio
This port is connected to the site timing/frequency reference
RS-232 (P8) DTE RS-232 interface. Connects Auto Tune Cavity Combiner DB-9 female
to Base Radio connectors
ALARM (P7) Provides the connection for external calibrated power monitors DB-25 female
to the Base Radio connector
This connector also provides station DC voltages and
programming lines (SPI) for monitoring/potential future
expansion
DC POWER Provides DC power connection Card edge connector
(P12)
GROUND Connects the station to ground. A ground stud and a ground Ground stud
braid on the back of the Base Radio connect the station to a site
ground, such as an appropriately grounded cabinet
This ground provides increased transient/surge protection for
the station

11 - 36 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Figure 11-14 Base Radio Backplane, Rear View

Figure 11-15 Base Radio Backplane, Front View

6866538D01-C 11 - 37
February 2005
Base Radio

Backplane Connector Pinouts

The following tables list the pinouts for the backplane connectors.
Table 11-15 provides the pinout for P1. P1 provides power, digital signal, and analog signal
interconnect to the BRC.

Table 11-15 BRC P1 Pinout, Signal and Power.

Pin No. Row A Row B Row C

1 AGC3 28.6 VDC AGC1

2 AGC4 14.2 VDC AGC2
3 GND GND GND
4 Reset GND GND
5 BATT_STAT GND GND
6 CTS GND GND
7 RTS 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC
8 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC
9 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC
10 Shutdown 5.1 VDC
11 Rclk 5.1 VDC Data1
12 ODC_1 5.1 VDC Data1*
13 Tclk GND Data3
14 ODC_3 GND Data3*
15 RxD GND Data2
16 ODC_2 BP_ID_0 Data2*
17 TxD BP_ID_1 SPI_A6
18 SSI EXT_GPI_1_ SBI_1
19 SSI* EXT_GPO_1_ SBI_3
20 BRG GND SBI_2
21 CLK EXT_GPI_2_ EXT_GPO_2_
22 CLK* GND SPI_A4
23 GND PA_ENABLE* SPI_A3
24 SPI_A5 GND SPI_A2
25 SPI_A0 GND SPI_A1
26 CD GND 5MHZ/1PPS
(5MHZ/SPARE)
27 MTR_STAT GND SPI_MISO
28 WP* GND SPI_CLK
29 GND GND SPI_MOSI
30 GND GND GND
31 1PPS_GPS GND 2.1MHZ_TX
32 GND GND 2.1MHZ_RX

11 - 38 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Table 11-16 RX1 P2 Pinout, Signal and Power

Pin No. Row A Row B Row C Row D

1 GND AGC4 AGC3 SPI_A6

2 GND AGC2 AGC1 SPI_A0
3 GND DATA1 DATA1* SPI_A1
4 GND SBI_1 ODC_1 SPI_A2
5 GND DATA2 DATA2* SPI_A3
6 5.1 VDC SBI_2 ODC_2 SPI_A4
7 GND DATA3 DATA3* SPI_A5
8 GND SBI_3 ODC_3 WP*
9 14.2 VDC SPI_CLK SPI_MOSI SPI_MISO
10 14.2 VDC GND GND GND
11 14.2 VDC GND 2.1MHZ_RX GND
12 GND GND GND GND

Table 11-17 RX1 P3 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection

Pin No. Row A Row B Row C Row D Row E

1 GND - GND - GND

2 - RX1 - -
3 GND - GND - GND
4 - -
5 - - -
6 - -
7 GND - GND - GND
8 - RX2 - RX3 -
9 GND - GND - GND

Table 11-18 Backplane Alarm 25-Pin Dsub (P7)

Pin No. Signal

1 EXT_GPI_1
2 EXT_GPO_1
3 GND
4 EXT_GPI_2
5 EXT_GPO_2
6

6866538D01-C 11 - 39
February 2005
Base Radio

Table 11-18 Backplane Alarm 25-Pin Dsub (P7) (continued)

Pin No. Signal

7
8
9
10 GND
11 28.6 VDC
12 14.2 VDC
13 14.2 VDC
14
15 5.1 VDC
16 GND
17 BATT_STAT_
18 MTR_STAT_
19 EXT_VFWD
20 EXT_VREF
21 GND
22 GND
23 BAT_TEMP
24
25 GND

Table 11-19 PA P6 Pinout, Signal and Power

Pin No. Row A Row B Row C

9 VBLIN GND 28.6 VDC

10 GND GND 28.6 VDC
11 SPI_A0 GND 28.6 VDC
12 GND GND 28.6 VDC
13 SPI_A1 GND 28.6 VDC
14 GND GND 28.6 VDC
15 SPI_A2 GND 28.6 VDC
16 GND GND 28.6 VDC
17 SPI_A3 GND 28.6 VDC
18 GND GND 28.6 VDC
19 SPI_MISO GND 28.6 VDC
20 GND GND 28.6 VDC
21 SPI_MOSI GND 28.6 VDC

11 - 40 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Table 11-19 PA P6 Pinout, Signal and Power (continued)

Pin No. Row A Row B Row C

22 GND GND 28.6 VDC

23 SPI_CLK GND 28.6 VDC
24 GND PA_ENABLE* 28.6 VDC
25 WP* GND 28.6 VDC
26 GND GND 28.6 VDC
27 SPI_A6 GND 28.6 VDC
28 GND GND 28.6 VDC
29 GND GND 28.6 VDC
30 GND GND 28.6 VDC
31 GND GND 28.6 VDC
32 GND GND 28.6 VDC
33 GND 5.1 VDC 28.6 VDC
34 GND 5.1 VDC 28.6 VDC
35 GND 14.2 VDC 28.6 VDC
36 GND 14.2 VDC 28.6 VDC
37 GND 14.2 VDC 28.6 VDC
38 GND 14.2 VDC 28.6 VDC
39 GND 28.6 VDC 28.6 VDC
40 GND 28.6 VDC 28.6 VDC

Table 11-20 EX P5 Pinout, Signal and Power

Pin No. Row A Row B Row C

1 28.6 VDC 28.6 VDC 28.6 VDC

2 28.6 VDC 28.6 VDC 28.6 VDC
3 14.2 VDC 14.2 VDC 14.2 VDC
4 14.2 VDC 14.2 VDC 14.2 VDC
5 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC
6 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC 5.1 VDC
7 GND GND EXT_VFWD
8 GND GND EXT_VREF
9
10 GND GND GND
11 GND GND VBLIN
12 GND GND RESET

6866538D01-C 11 - 41
February 2005
Base Radio

Table 11-20 EX P5 Pinout, Signal and Power (continued)

Pin No. Row A Row B Row C

13 SPI_A6
14 GND GND GND
15 GND GND SPIMISO
16 SPI_A0 GND GND
17 GND GND SPI_CLK
18 SPI_A1 GND WP*
19 GND GND GND
20 SPI_A5 GND SPI_MOSI
21 GND GND GND
22 SPI_A4 GND GND
23 GND GND CLK*
24 SPI_A3 GND GND
25 GND GND CLK
26 GND GND GND
27 GND GND SSI*
28 GND GND GND
29 GND GND SSI
30 GND GND GND
31 GND GND 2.1MHZ_TX
32 GND GND GND

Table 11-21 lists the pinouts for the 9-pin P8 RS-232 connector.

Table 11-21 Backplane RS-232 Pin Dsub (P8)

Pin No. Signal

1 CD
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR (Rclk)
5 GND
6 DSR (Tclk)
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 BRG

11 - 42 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Table 11-22 -48 VDC Battery Power (P12)

Pin Description Pin Description

1 + BATTERY 5 + BATTERY
2 + BATTERY 6 + BATTERY
3 - BATTERY (RTN) 7 - BATTERY (RTN)
4 -BATTERY (RTN) 8 - BATTERY (RTN)

Table 11-23 P11 Ethernet

Coaxial Signal

Centre ETHERNET
Outer GND*
* Ethernet ground is DC isolated from station ground.

Table 11-24 Backplane Coaxial

Connector Signal

P11 ETHERNET
P12 -48 VDC POWER
P13 5MHz/ 1PPS (SPARE)
P14 EX OUT
P15 EX FEEDBACK
P16 PA FEEDBACK
P17 PA IN
P18 PA OUT
P19 RX BRANCH 1
P20 RX BRANCH 2

Table 11-25 through Table 11-27 list the pinouts for the blindmate connectors for Receivers 1- 2,
Exciter and PA.

Table 11-25 EX P14 EX OUT, P15 EX FB

Connector Center Outer

P14 EX OUT GND

P15 EX FEEDBACK GND

6866538D01-C 11 - 43
February 2005
Base Radio

Table 11-26 EXBRC P16 PA FB, P17 PA IN, P18 PA RF OUT

Connector Center Outer

P16 PA FEEDBACK GND

P17 PA IN GND
P18 PA OUT GND

Table 11-27 Blind Mates - Receivers

Connector Signal

P19 RCV ONE RF IN

P20 RCV TWO RF IN

Table 11-28 PS Power and Signal (P9)

Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description

1 GND 2 GND 3 GND

4 28.6 VDC 5 28.6 VDC 6 28.6 VDC 7 28.6 VDC
8 28.6 VDC 9 28.6 VDC 10 28.6 VDC 11 28.6 VDC
12 28.6 VDC 13 28.6 VDC 14 28.6 VDC 15 28.6 VDC
16 14.2 VDC 17 14.2 VDC 18 14.2 VDC 19 14.2 VDC
20 14.2 VDC 21 14.2 VDC 22 14.2 VDC 23 14.2 VDC
24 5.1 VDC 25 5.1 VDC 26 5.1 VDC 27 5.1 VDC
28 5.1 VDC 29 5.1 VDC 30 5.1 VDC 31 5.1 VDC
32 GND 33 GND 34 GND 35 GND
36 GND 37 GND 38 GND 39 GND
40 GND 41 GND 42 GND 43 GND
44 GND 45 GND 46 GND 47 GND
48 GND 49 GND 50 GND 51 GND
52 GND 53 GND 54 FAN CONTROL 55 SCR_Thresh
(SCR_SHUT)
56 Relay_Enable 57 SHUTDOWN 58 28V_AVG 59 BATT_TEMP
60 SPI_MISO 61 SPI_MOSI 62 SPI_CLK 63 SPI_A6
64 65 66 67 SPI_A0
68 SPI_A1 69 SPI_A5 70 71 SPI_A4
72 73 SPI_A3 74 GND 75 SPI_A2
76 GND 77 GND 78 GND

11 - 44 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 Base Radio

Table 11-29 Base Radio Signal Description

Signal Name Signal Description

GND Station ground

28V 28VDC
14.2V 14.2VDC
5.1V 5.1 VDC
A0,A1,A2,A3,A4,A5 The BRC uses these lines to address station modules and devices on
those modules
SPI_MOSI Serial Processor Interface - Master out slave in Data
SPI_MISO Serial Processor Interface - Master in slave out Data
SPI_CLK Serial Processor Interface - Clock signal (100 KHz - 1 MHz)
AGC1, AGC2, AGC3, AGC4 BRC uses these lines to set the digital attenuator's on the receiver(s) for
SGC functionality
2.1MHz_RX 2.1MHz generated on the BRC and used as a reference by
the Receiver(s)
2.1MHz_TX 2.1MHz generated on the BRC and used as a reference by the Exciter
DATA1, DATA1* This differential pair carries receiver 1 data to the Base Radio Controller
DATA2 DATA2* This differential pair carries receiver 2 data to the Base Radio Controller
DATA3, DATA3* This differential pair carries receiver 3 data to the Base Radio Controller
ODC_1, ODC_2, ODC_3 Clocks used to clock differential receive data from each respective
receiver to the BRC
SBI_1, SBI_2, SBI_3 Serial Bus Interface - These lines are used to program the custom
receiver IC on each receiver
SSI, SSI* Differential transmit data from the Exciter to the BRC
CLK, CLK* Differential Data clock used to clock transmit data from the BRC to the
Exciter
VBLIN Programmable bias voltage generated on the Exciter and used to bias the
Power amplifier devices
RESET Output from BRC to Exciter (currently not used)
EXT_VFWD DC voltage representing the forward power at the antenna as measured
by the external wattmeter
EXT_VREF DC voltage representing the reflected power at the antenna as measured
by the external wattmeter
WP* Write protect line used by the BRC to write to serial EEPROMs located
on each module
BAT_STAT Binary flag used to signal BRC to monitor the ATTC supply alarm
MTR_STAT Binary flag used by the BRC to indicate to the BRC it should monitor
the external power meter (power monitor, APM)
PA_ENABLE* Output from BRC to PA enabling bias on the amplifier modules
1PPS Global Positioning System - 1 pulse per second (this may be combined
with 5MHz at the site frequency reference)

6866538D01-C 11 - 45
February 2005
Base Radio

Table 11-29 Base Radio Signal Description (continued)

Signal Name Signal Description

RCLK RS-232 - Receive clock

TCLK RS-232 - Transmit clock
CTS RS-232 - Clear to send
RTS RS-232 - Request to send
CD RS-232 - Carrier detect
RXD RS-232 - Receive data
TXD RS-232 - Transmit data
BRG RS-232 - Baud rate generator
5MHz / Spare Signal currently not used
EXCITER_OUT Forward transmit path QQAM at approximately 11dBm
EXCITER_FEEDBACK Signal comes from the PA at approximately 16dBm. Used to close the
cartesian RF_LOOP
PA_IN 4 dBm QQAM forward path of the transmitter
PA_FEEDBACK Signal to the Exciter at approximately 16dBm. Used to close the
cartesian RF_LOOP
RX1_IN RF into Receiver 1
RX2_IN RF into Receiver 2
RX3_IN RF into Receiver 3
5MHZ REFERENCE 5MHz station/site reference. Signal comes from the redundant site
frequency reference and usually is multiplexed with the 1PPS signal
from the global positioning satellite input to the site frequency reference
ETHERNET Interface between the BRC and the ACG. This connects the Base to the
10 MHz LAN
SCR_SHUT Signal currently not used
SCR_THRESH Signal currently not used
RELAY ENABLE Signal currently not used
SHUTDOWN Input signal from the BRC to the Power supply. Used to exercise a
station "hard start"
28V_AVG Signal currently not used
BATT_TEMP DC voltage from the external batteries used to represent the temperature
of the batteries. Signal used only with AC power supplies
* = enabled low

11 - 46 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 A

AAppendix

Abbreviations
A/D Analogue-to-Digital

A Amperes

AC Alternating Current

ACT Active

AGC Automatic Gain Control

AIC Ampere Interrupting Capacity

AIS Alarm Indication Signal (Keep Alive)

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit

ATCC Auto Tune Cavity Combiner

Aux Auxiliary

avg average

AWG American Wire Gauge

bd baud

BDM Background Debug Mode

BER Bit Error Rate

BERT Bit Error Rate Test

BNC Baby “N” Connector

BPV Bipolar Variation

BR Base Radio

BRC Base Radio Controller

BSC Base Site Controller

BTU British Thermal Unit

6866538D01-C A-1
February 2005
 BW Bandwidth

C/(N + I) Carrier Power to Noise + Interference Ratio

CD Carrier Detect

CLK Clock

CLT Controller

cm centimetre

CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor

CMU Control and Monitor Unit

CNE Central Network Equipment

CPU Central Processing Unit

CSA Cross-Sectional Area (wire size)

CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detect

CTI Coaxial Transceiver Interface

CTL Control (Base Radio Control)

CTS Clear to Send

D/A Digital-to-Analogue

DB-15 15-pin D-subminiature

DB-9 9-pin D-subminiature

dB Decibel

dBc Decibel relative to carrier

dBm Decibels relative to 1mW

DC Direct Current

DCE Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment

DCSPLY DC Supply

DDM Dual Device Module

deg degree

DIP Dual In-line Package

div division

DLCI Data Link Connection Identification

DMA Direct Memory Access

DOP Dilution of Precision

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

A-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 DSP Digital Signal Processor

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DVM Digital Volt Meter

E-NET Ethernet

EAS Environmental Alarm System

EBTS Enhanced Base Transceiver System

EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

EGB Exterior Ground Bar

EIA Electronics Industry Association

ELP Ethernet LAN PCI (card)

EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

ESI Ethernet Serial Interface

ESSC EMEA Systems Support Centre

EX Exciter

F Farad

FB Feedback

FIFO First-In, First-Out

FNE Fixed Network Equipment

freq frequency

FRU Field Replaceable Unit

GND Ground

GPS Global Positioning System

GPSR GPS Receiver

HDLC High-level Data Link

HSO High Stability Oscillator

HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning

Hz Hertz

I/O Input/Output

IC Integrated Circuit

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IF Intermediate Frequency

6866538D01-C A-3
February 2005
 in inches

inj injection

kg kilogram

kHz kilohertz

kPa/m2 Kilo Pascal per metre squared (pressure per area unit)

KVL Key Variable Loader

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure D-Channel

lbs pounds

LDM Linear Driver Module

LED Light Emitting Diode

LFM Linear Final Module

LIU Line Interface Unit

LLC Link Layer Controller

LNA Low Noise Amplifier

LO Local Oscillator

LOS Loss of Signal

MAC Medium Access Control

MAU Media Access Unit

max maximum

MB MegaByte

Mb/s Megabits per second

MGB Master Ground Bar

MGN Multi-Grounded Neutral

MHz MegaHertz

min minimum

min. minute

MISO Master In/Slave Out

mm millimetre

MMI Man-Machine Interface

MOSI Master Out/Slave In

MPM Multiple Peripheral Module

A-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 MS Mobile Station

ms millisecond

MST Modular Screw Terminals

mV milliVolt

mW milliWatt

N.C. Normally Closed

N.O. Normally Open

NIC Network Interface Card

Nm Newton-metre (torque)

no. number

NTU Network Terminating Unit

NTWK Network

P/N Part Number

PA Power Amplifier

PAL Programmable Array Logic

PC Personal Computer

PDOP Position Dilution of Precision

pF picoFarad

PLL Phase Locked Loop

PPM Parts Per Million

PPS Pulse Per Second

PS Power Supply

PUTS Power-Up Tests Suite

pwr power

QRSS Quasi Random Signal Sequence

Qty Quantity

R1 Receiver #1

R2 Receiver #2

R3 Receiver #3

RAM Random Access Memory

RCV Receiver

Ref Reference

6866538D01-C A-5
February 2005
 RF Radio Frequency

RFDS RF Distribution System

RFS RF System

RMC Receiver Multi-Coupler

ROM Read Only Memory

RPM Revolutions Per Minute

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication

RU Rack Unit

Rx Receive

RXDSP Receive Digital Signal Processor

S/W Software

SC Site Controller

SCI Serial Communications Interface

sec second

SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage (circuit)

SGC Software Gain Control

SIMM Single-Inline Memory Module

SINAD Signal Plus Noise Plus Distortion to Noise Plus Distortion Radio

SPI Serial Peripheral Interface

SPST Single-Pole, Single-Throw

SQE Signal Quality Error

SRAM Static Random Access Memory

SRI Site Reference ISA (card)

SS Surge Suppressor

SSC System Status Control

SSI Synchronous Serial Interface

ST Status

STAT Status

Std Standard

SWDLM Software Download Manager

SwMI Switching and Management Infrastructure

TB Terminal Board

A-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 TDM Time Division Multiplex

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access

TDR Time-Domain Reflectometer

TETRA TErrestrial Trunked RAdio system

TISIC TDMA Infrastructure IC

TSC TETRA Site Controller

TSI Time Slot Interchange

TSI Time Slot Interface

TTL Transistor - Transistor Logic

Tx Transmit

TXD Transmit Data

TXDSP Transmit Digital Signal Processor

Txlin Tranlin IC

typ Typical

UHSO Ultra-High Stability Oscillator

V Volt

VAC Volts - alternating current

VCXO Voltage-Controlled Crystal Oscillator

VDC Volts - direct current

VFWD Voltage representation of Forward Power

Vp-p Voltage peak-to-peak

VREF Voltage representation of Reflected Power

VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Radio

W Watt

WDT Watchdog Timer

WP Write Protect

6866538D01-C A-7
February 2005
 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

A-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 B

BAppendix

Safety Information Summary

This appendix contains a summary of the warnings and precautions to be taken into account in
the EBTS PR 3.2 documentation. Note that it is not an exhaustive list of precautions and safety
measures that should be observed. Please ensure that all local and site safety measures are
implemented before carrying out any function with the EBTS or associated equipment.

Any device (i.e., power supply) providing isolation between the mains and the EBTSs must
provide reinforced insulation to hazardous voltages. The DC power source providing power to
the EBTSs shall comply with requirements specified for a safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV)
per EN60950, 1995.

Always use appropriate lifting equipment and number of personnel whenever moving an EBTSs
equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of tipping or injury, a fully configured equipment cabinet
weighs over 270 kg (600 lbs). Tipping can result in serious injury and extensive equipment
damage.

The Dimetra IP EBTSs system manual is intended for trained technicians experienced with
Motorola base radio equipment or similar types of equipment.

The Site Controller board contains a lithium battery. Refer to local regulatory requirements for
proper disposal.

Use extreme caution when wearing a conductive wrist strap near sources of high voltage. The low
impedance provided by the wrist strap also increases the danger of lethal shock should accidental
contact with high voltage sources occur.

6866538D01-C B-1
February 2005
 Never use a bare or damaged wire for the connection of chassis ground or other electrical wiring.
Damage to equipment or potential injury to personnel could result.

Follow all manufacturer’s instructions regarding protective gear and usage when using nail gun.

Follow all manufacturer’s instructions regarding protective gear and usage when using concrete
nails and hammers.

Make sure all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel

RF energy hazard. Disconnect power to all base radios in the cabinet to prevent injury while
disconnecting and connecting antennas

BR weight exceeds 27 kg (60 lbs). To remove the BR, first remove the PA and PSU, then remove
the BR from the cabinet. If required, remove further modules to decrease the weight of the BR
before removal. Ensure that the BR is fully supported when BR is free from mounting rails.

Ensure a good connection between the electrical system ground and site ground to prevent
excessive voltage potential between the two ground systems during lightning strikes

Equipment has two independent power sources (A and B). To remove power from equipment,
disconnect both power sources.

Danger of explosion if the TSC battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace battery only with the same
or equivalent type recommended by manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

B-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Static Sensitive Precautions
The static grounding wrist strap (Motorola P/N 4280385A59) must always be used when
handling any board or module within the EBTS. Many of the boards or modules used in the EBTS
equipment are vulnerable to damage from static charges.
Extreme care must be taken while handling, shipping, and servicing these boards or modules. To
avoid static damage, observe the following precautions:
• Prior to handling, shipping, and servicing EBTS equipment, connect a wrist strap to the
grounding clip on the Equipment Cabinet. This discharges any accumulated static charges.
• Avoid touching any conductive parts of the module with your hands.
• Never remove boards or modules with power applied to the unit (hot-pull) unless you have
verified it is safe to do for a particular board or module. Make sure the unit will not be
damaged by this. Several boards and modules require that power be turned off before any
boards or modules are removed.
• Avoid carpeted areas, dry environments, and certain types of clothing (silk, nylon, etc.) during
service or repair due to the possibility of static buildup.
• Apply power to the circuit under test before connecting low impedance test equipment (such
as pulse generators). When testing is complete, disconnect the test equipment before power is
removed from the circuit under test.
• Be sure to ground all electrically powered test equipment. Connect a ground lead (-) from the
test equipment to the board or module before connecting the test probe (+). When testing is
complete, remove the test probe first, then remove the ground lead.
• Lay all circuit boards and modules on a conductive surface (such as a sheet of aluminium foil)
when removed from the system. The conductive surface must be connected to ground through
100k.
• Never use non-conductive material for packaging modules being transported. All modules
should be wrapped with static sensitive (conductive) material. Replacement modules shipped
from the factory are packaged in a conductive material.

You must be familiar with Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands and their usage prior to
performing procedures in this documentation. Improperly applying MMI commands can result in
equipment damage.

Do not attempt to make a resistance check of the GPS antenna. Damage to the active devices
within the antenna element may result

Do not transmit to an antenna under any circumstance unless those frequencies are licensed.

Do not key any base radio with the Signal Generator directly connected to a Tx antenna port.
Damage to generator will result

6866538D01-C B-3
February 2005
 Some commands executed during Conformance Testing will bypass normally available alarms
and protection associated with normal EBTS operation. Therefore, it is imperative to adhere to
all cautionary information and follow instructions exactly as written in the procedures.

B-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 C

CAppendix

Available FRUs
Table C-1 Available Frequency Replacable Units (FRUs)

FRU Descriiption

0102705U10 Autotune Cavity Combiner 2ch Master 915-950 MHz

0102705U11 Autotune Cavity Combiner 2ch Slave 915-950 MHz

CLN1509B Environmental Alarm System with Adapter Cable

CLF1810A Receiver Multicoupler Tray Primary

CLF1808A Receiver Multicoupler Tray Expand

CTF1087A Base Radio 887-902 MHz 80 W

CRF1023A Receiver 887-902 MHz

DLN1186A Base Radio Controller

DLN1187A DC Power Supply for Base Radio

CTF1089A Power Amplifier 900 MHz 80 W

CLF1807A Exciter 900 MHz

DLN6498B Site Controller with GPS Receiver Dimetra IP

6866538D01-C C-1
February 2005
 This Page Intentionally Left Blank

C-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 D

DAppendix

Planned Maintenance Inspection

In order to assist maintainers of Motorola Dimetra products, Motorola publishes advice for
recommended Planned Maintenance Inspections (PMI), sometimes known as Periodic
Maintenance Inspection or Information. For each Motorola Part Number, the Inspection Schedule
indicates whether any PMI action is required/recommended, the regularity of the
recommended/required action, and a brief description of the activity. The Inspection Schedule
also indicates Motorola's recommended PMI testing activities that should be carried out as part
of the PMI Schedule.
The PMI Inspection Schedule should always be read in conjunction with the relevant Motorola
or Motorola 3rd party suppliers’ Standard Product Manuals and any Technical Information
Bulletins (TIB's), where the methods of access and other information will be located.
In additional to the Planned Maintenance Inspections related to those specific Part Numbers
below Motorola recommends that basic functional testing should be carried out every 12 months.
These functional tests should include RF Power Measurements, RF Frequency measurements,
and Bit Error Rate measurements.
Motorola also recommends that the antennae, PSU / UPS and any Air Conditioning equipment
also be inspected and functionally tested at regular intervals or as advised by the respective
manufactures.

6866538D01-C D-1
February 2005
 Table D-1 Field Replacable Units PMIs

FRU No. Description PMI required

CLN1509B Environmental Alarm System with Adapter Cable No

CTF1087A Base Radio 887-902 MHz 80 W No

CRF1023A Receiver Module 887-902 MHz No

DLN1186A Base Radio Controller No

DLN1187A DC Power Supply Yes, fan should be replaced if noisy.

CTF1089A Power Amplifier 900 MHz 80 W Yes, fan should be replaced if noisy.

CLF1807A Exciter 900 MHz No

DLN6498B Site Controller with GPS Receiver Dimetra IP Yes, fans should be replaced if noisy, but if the EBTS is
operated in high ambient temperature (45°C or above)
fans should be replaced every 4-5 years. TSC Backup
Battery should be replaced every 8 years.

Table D-2 Receiver Multicoupler PMIs

FRU No. Description PMI required

CLF1810A RMC Tray Prime No

CLF1808A RMC Tray Expansion No

Table D-3 Combiner PMIs

FRU No Description PMI required

0102705U10 Cavity Combiner 2ch Master Auto Tune No

0102705U11 Cavity Combiner 2ch Slave Auto Tune No

D-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
 I

IIndex

A Controls and Indicators 11-2

DC Power Supply
Alarms Controls and Indicators 11-29
Base Radio 6-15 Description 11-28
Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections 5-16 Front View 11-28
Connections 4-35 Performance Specifications 11-29
Environmental Alarm System Checkout 6-7 Theory of Operation 11-30
Receiver Multicoupler Alarm Output 10-14 Exciter
RFDS Alarm/Power Monitor Wiring 10-22 Description 11-17
Wiring 4-21 Theory of Operation 11-18
Analog Power Monitor 1-11 Fault Indications 7-1
Antenna Front View 11-2
Base Radio Connections 4-34 FRU Replacement Procedures 7-18
GPS Connections 4-34 Keying 6-28
GPS Requirements 4-19 MMI Commands 6-26
Installation 4-15 Overview 11-1
Surge Arrestors 4-16 Performance Specifications 11-2
Anti-Static Handling Procedures 2-1 Power Amplifier
Application Commands 3-30 Description 11-22
Auto Tune Combiner Theory of Operation 11-22
Power-up Procedure 4-40 Receiver Verification 7-24
Reported/Suspected Problems 7-16
Routine Checkout 7-15
B Setting Circuit Breakers 4-38
Backplane RF Connections 11-37 Setting Position and Receivers 6-14
Base Radio 1-13 Setting Power Levels 6-28
3X Receiver Setting Receive and Transmit Frequencies 6-16
Theory of Operation (Base Radio section) 11- Single Receiver CLN1274 and 3X Receiver
32 CLN1512
3X Receiver Diversity Uses and Cautions (Base Ra- Overview (Base Radio section) 11-31
dio section) 11-32 Start-up Sequence 6-13
Antenna connections 4-34 Station Verification Procedures 7-19
Backplane Test Equipment 7-14
Connector Pinouts 11-38 Theory of Operation 11-5
Connectors 11-36 Transmitter Verification 7-20
RF Connections 11-37 Troubleshooting 7-14
Base Radio Controller Base Radio Controller
Controls and Indicators 11-8 Controls 11-9
Description 11-7 Indicators 11-8
Theory of Operation 11-10 Base Radio Replacement 7-18
Blind Mate Connectors 11-44 BER Floor Measurement

6866538D01-C I-1
February 2005
 Index

Cavity Combining RFDS 6-22 Description 11-28

Breaker Panel 1-10 Front View 11-28
Specifications 11-29
Theory of Operation 11-30
C Description
Cabinet 4-23 Base Radio Controller 11-7
Installation 4-26 Base Radio DC Power Supply 11-28
Racks 4-3 Base Radio Power Amplifier 11-22
Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections 5-16 Cavity Combining RFDS 10-1
Cabling EAS Power Supply 9-2
5 MHz/1 PPS 5-9 Exciter 11-17
Alarm System 4-35 Receiver Multicoupler 10-13
Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections 5-16 X.21 Site Controller 8-1
Chassis Grounding 5-5
DC Power Connections 5-7 E
Ethernet 5-11
Receiver 5-1 E1 Connection Test 6-6
RS-232 5-20 EAS 1-10
Site Alarm 5-18 Enhanced Base Transceiver System
Transmit Power Out 5-3 Electrical Requirements 4-8
Cavity Combiner 1-10 Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch 4-10
Cavity Combining RFDS Environmental Considerations 4-7
BER Floor Measurement 6-22 Temperature Control 4-7
Checking Transmit Operation 6-17 Environmental Alarm System 1-10
Description 10-1 Alarm Checkout 6-7
Specifications 10-3 Block Diagram 9-3
Checking Transmit Operation (Cavity Combining Connections 4-35
RFDS) 6-17 Indicators 9-2
Checkout Power Supply 9-2
Base Radio 7-15 Rear View 9-5
Equipment Cabinet Setup 4-37 Specifications 9-2, 9-5
Commands Theory of Operation 9-3
MMI Commands 3-1 Troubleshooting 7-31, 7-32
Configuration Commands 3-30 Environmental Considerations
Configuring Test Signals 6-29 EBTS 4-7
Connectors Equipment Cabinet
Base Radio Backplane 11-36 Access 4-27
X.21 Site Controller 8-4 Bracing 4-26
Controls and Indicators Circuit Breakers 4-38
Base Radio 11-2 Dimensions 4-3
Base Radio Controller 11-8 External Cabling Connections 4-29
Base Radio DC Power Supply 11-29 Floor Loading 4-5
X.21 Site Controller 8-3 Footprint 4-3
Grounding 4-30
Grounding Requirements 4-11
D Power Connections 4-32
DC Distribution Board 11-25 Powering 4-38
DC Power Connections Test Equipment 6-12
-48 VDC Power Connections (Equipment Cabinet) Verification 6-12
4-31 Ethernet Cabling 5-11
Cabling 5-7 Examples of Test Setups 6-32
DC Power Supply Exciter
Controls and Indicators 11-29 Description 11-17

I-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Index

F K
Fan Module 11-25 Keying Base Radios 6-28
Fault Indications
Base Radio 7-1
Site Controller 7-1 L
FRU Replacement Lifting Equipment Rack 4-24
Base Radio 7-18 LNA/Splitter Board
Replacement 10-17
G
Getting Help M
HELP Command 3-66 Man-Machine Interface. See MMI Commands
Global Positioning System MMI Commands
Antenna Connections 4-34 Access Levels and Modes 3-1
Antenna Line Loss 4-20 Base Radio 3-30
Evaluation Kit 4-18 Conventions and Syntax 3-2
Tracking Criteria 4-17 General Instructions 6-26
GPS. See Global Positioning System HELP Command 3-66
Ground Cabling 5-5 Setting Base Radio Position 6-14
Grounding Requirements Site Controller application mode 3-14
Battery Rack 4-13 Site Controller configuration mode 3-4
Description 4-11 Testing 6-1
Equipment Cabinet 4-30 Modem
Power Supply Rack 4-13 Optional Modem Configuration 6-10

H P
HELP Parts for Installation 2-7
MMI Command 3-66 Peripheral Module 11-25
Planned Maintenance Inspections D-1
I PMI D-1
Power Amplifier
Indicators DC Distribution Board 11-25
Environmental Alarm System 9-2 Description 11-22
X.21 Site Controller 8-3 Fan Module 11-25
Inspection 4-22 Linear Driver Module 11-24
Installation Peripheral Module 11-25
Antenna 4-15 RF Splitter/DC Distribution Board 11-25
Cabinet 4-26 Theory of Operation 11-22
EBTS Pre-Installation Checklist 4-25 Power Supply Rack
Power Supply Rack 4-29 Grounding 4-31
Recommended Parts 2-7 Grounding Requirements 4-13
Recommended Personnel 4-23 Installation 4-29
Recommended Test Equipment 2-7 Powering 4-37
Recommended Tools 2-4, 2-9 Procedures
Inventory 4-22 Antenna Installation 4-15
Base Radio Antenna Connections 4-34
Base Radio FRU Replacement 7-18
J Base Radio Receiver Verification 7-24
Junction Panel 1-10, 4-29 Base Radio Replacement 7-18
Intercabling 4-29 Base Radio Start-up 6-13
Base Radio Transmitter Verification 7-21

6866538D01-C I-3
February 2005
 Index

Base Radio Transmitter Verification Set-up 7-20 S

BER Floor Measurement (Cavity Combining RFDS)
6-22 Service Entrance
Cavity Combining RFDS Replacement 10-7 E1 4-7
Checking Transmit Operation 6-17 X.21 4-6
Connecting Equipment Cabinet Power 4-32 Service Terminal setup 6-4
Displaying Base Radio Alarms 6-15 Setting Receive and Transmit Frequencies 6-28
E1 Connection Test 6-6 Site Controller 1-11
EAS Alarm Checkout 6-7 Application Mode
Equipment Cabinet Grounding 4-30 MMI Commands 3-14
Equipment Cabinet Verification 6-12 Configuration Mode MMI Commands 3-4
Four-Channel Cavity Combiner Replacement 10-9 Fault Indications 7-1
Powering Equipment Cabinet 4-38 Power-up Procedure 4-39
Powering Power Supply Rack 4-37 RF Conformance Testing 6-26
Powering the Auto Tune Combiner 4-40 Setup 6-3, 6-4
Powering the Site Controller 4-39 Test Equipment 6-3
Receiver Testing 6-31 Verification 6-3
RF Distribution System Removal and Replacement X.21
10-7 Connectors 8-4
Service Terminal setup 6-4 Controls and Indicators 8-3
Setting Circuit Breakers 4-38 Description 8-1
Setting Receive and Transmit Frequencies 6-16 Front Panel Switches 8-4
Site Controller setup 6-4 Front View 8-2
Site Controller Verification 6-3 Performance Specifications 8-3
Test Setup Examples 6-32 Rear View 8-2, 8-5
Viewing Transmit Spectrum 6-24 X.21 Troubleshooting 7-13
Site Controller CPU Board 8-6
Site Planning 4-1
R Site Utilities Backboard
E1 4-7
Receipt of Equipment 4-22
X.21 4-6
Receiver
Software Commands
Cabling 5-1
MMI Commands 3-1
Testing Procedures 6-31
Specifications
Receiver Multicoupler 1-10
Antenna Port to Receiver Port 10-13
Alarm Output 10-14
Base Radio 11-2
Theory of Operation 10-13
Base Radio DC Power Supply 11-29
Receiver Verification
Cavity Combining RFDS 10-3
Base Radio 7-24
Cavity Combining RFDS, Transmitter to Antenna
Recommended Tools 2-4
10-4
Replacing Base Radios 7-18
Environmental Alarm System 9-2, 9-5
RF Distribution System
X.21 Site Controller 8-3
Cavity Combining
Static Sensitive Precautions 2-1
Cavity Combiner Replacement 10-9
Station Verification Procedures 7-19
Description 10-1
Surge Arrestors 4-16
Performance Specifications 10-3
E1 4-6
Replacement Procedure 10-7
X.21 4-6
Theory of Operation, Auto Tune 10-5
System Testing
Pinouts and Wiring 10-22
Overview 6-1
Receiver Multicoupler Alarm Output 10-14
Removal and Replacement Procedures 10-7
T
Test Equipment 2-7

I-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Index

Base Radio Troubleshooting 7-14

Equipment Cabinet 6-12
Site Controller 6-3
Theory of Operation
Base Radio 11-5
Base Radio Controller 11-10
Base Radio DC Power Supply 11-30
Base Radio Power Amplifier 11-22
Environmental Alarm System 9-3
Exciter 11-18
Receiver Multicoupler 10-13
Tools, Equipment, and Parts 2-4
Transmit Power Out Cabling 5-3
Transmit Spectrum
Viewing 6-24
Transmitter Verification 7-20
Troubleshooting
Base Radio 7-14
Communication 7-33
Environmental Alarm System 7-31, 7-32
Miscellaneous 7-33
Reported/Suspected Problems 7-16
X.21 7-13

6866538D01-C I-5
February 2005
Index

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

I-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005